View
0
Download
0
Category
Preview:
Citation preview
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
2
Contents
Summary of Changes .......................................................................................................... 6
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 7
Purpose and Applicability of the Manual ........................................................................... 7
Format of the Manual ....................................................................................................... 7
Scope and Definitions ....................................................................................................... 8
2. Financial reporting framework ..................................................................................... 11
Legislative Framework .................................................................................................... 11
Accounting Framework ................................................................................................... 12
Group and Consolidated Accounts ................................................................................. 15
Budgeting Framework .................................................................................................... 19
Other Framework Issues ................................................................................................ 20
Chapter 2 Annex 1: Companies Act 2006 Requirements................................................... 23
Chapter 2 Annex 2: Other Relevant Accounting Pronouncements .................................... 25
Chapter 2 Annex 3 - Accounts Directions (structure) ......................................................... 26
Chapter 2 Annex 4 - NHS Trust Accounts Directions ........................................................ 27
Chapter 2 Annex 5 - Laying annual report and accounts before Parliament ...................... 30
Statutory requirement ..................................................................................................... 30
The process of laying papers before Parliament ............................................................ 31
Deadlines for laying documents before Parliament ........................................................ 31
Chapter 2 Annex 6 - CCG and NHS Trusts Annual Audit Reports ..................................... 33
Chapter 2: CCG Appendix 1 .............................................................................................. 34
Performance measures .................................................................................................. 34
3. Form and content of the Annual Report ...................................................................... 37
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 37
General Principles .......................................................................................................... 37
Accounting/Accountable Officer Responsibilities ............................................................ 38
CCG Governance ........................................................................................................... 39
Performance Report ....................................................................................................... 39
The Accountability Report .............................................................................................. 44
Publication of the Annual Report and Accounts.............................................................. 63
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
3
Chapter 3 Annex 1 - Annual Report and Accounts Outline Structure ................................ 65
Chapter 3 Annex 2 - Salary and Pension disclosure tables: information subject to audit .. 66
Salaries and allowances ................................................................................................. 66
Chapter 3 Annex 3 – Exit packages and severance payments .......................................... 77
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 77
Exit packages ................................................................................................................. 77
Non-compulsory departures ........................................................................................... 77
Chapter 3 Annex 4 – “Off-payroll” engagements ............................................................... 82
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 82
Reformed off-payroll Working Rules ............................................................................... 82
Inclusion in Annual Reports ............................................................................................ 83
Guidance ........................................................................................................................ 83
Chapter 3 CCG Appendix 1: Additional Requirements for CCGs ...................................... 90
Business information ...................................................................................................... 90
Details of Members of the Membership Body and Governing Body ............................... 90
Chapter 3 CCG Appendix 2 – Pension Disclosures ........................................................... 92
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 92
Prior Year Comparatives ................................................................................................ 93
4. Accounting principles and policies............................................................................... 97
Applicability of IFRS ....................................................................................................... 97
Adaptations and interpretations ...................................................................................... 97
Accounting standards not yet adopted ........................................................................... 97
Departures from the FReM ............................................................................................. 97
Accounting Concepts ...................................................................................................... 98
Accounting policies and materiality ............................................................................... 101
Accounting for Income and Expenditure ....................................................................... 105
Accounting for Assets and Liabilities ............................................................................ 116
Group Accounting Standards........................................................................................ 136
Business Combinations ................................................................................................ 143
Changes in Entity Status – Reporting Requirements .................................................... 148
Events after the reporting period .................................................................................. 148
Related party disclosures ............................................................................................. 149
Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the DHSC group ...................... 150
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) ..................................................... 150
International Accounting Standards (IAS) ..................................................................... 157
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
4
IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) Interpretations ............................................... 170
Standards Interpretation Committee (SIC) Interpretations ............................................ 174
Chapter 4 Annex 2: IFRS Standards and amendments issued but not yet adopted in the FReM ............................................................................................................................... 176
Standards issued or amended but not yet adopted in FReM ........................................ 176
Chapter 4 Annex 3: Departures from the FReM .............................................................. 177
Chapter 4 Annex 4 - Valuation Issues ............................................................................. 178
Modern Equivalent Asset (MEA) valuations ................................................................. 178
Recognition and measurement ..................................................................................... 178
Disclosure ..................................................................................................................... 180
Equipment .................................................................................................................... 180
Chapter 4 Annex 5: Accounting requirements for PFI/LIFT schemes .............................. 182
PFI and LIFT................................................................................................................. 182
Recognition of assets under PPP or PFI arrangements ............................................... 183
Disclosures ................................................................................................................... 184
Service concession arrangements in budgets .............................................................. 184
Budget adjustment in summarisation schedules........................................................... 186
Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments ....................................................................... 187
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 187
IFRS Standards ............................................................................................................ 187
HM Treasury interpretations and adaptations ............................................................... 188
Definition of financial instruments ................................................................................. 188
Recognition and de-recognition .................................................................................... 190
Classification and measurement ................................................................................... 191
Embedded derivatives .................................................................................................. 200
Hedge accounting ......................................................................................................... 202
Disclosures ................................................................................................................... 202
Other guidance ............................................................................................................. 205
Chapter 4 Annex 7 - Treasury Discount Rates ................................................................ 206
Summary of discount rates to be applied as at 31 March 2022 .................................... 206
General provisions ........................................................................................................ 207
Inflation assumptions .................................................................................................... 208
Post-Employment Benefits Provisions .......................................................................... 210
Financial instruments .................................................................................................... 210
Chapter 4 Annex 8 – Accounting for Pooled Budgets and Joint Arrangements ............... 212
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
5
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 212
The Better Care Fund (BCF) ........................................................................................ 212
Relevant accounting standards and guidance .............................................................. 213
Detailed guidance ......................................................................................................... 214
Cash management ....................................................................................................... 225
Other reporting requirements........................................................................................ 227
Chapter 4 Annex 9: Reporting requirements on change of status ................................... 229
NHS trusts attaining NHS foundation trust status ......................................................... 229
New NHS trusts and foundation trusts in their first period of operation ........................ 231
NHS trusts and foundation trusts in their final period of operation ................................ 232
Changes to Clinical Commissioning Groups................................................................. 236
Changes to DHSC ALBs .............................................................................................. 237
Chapter 4 Annex 10: Accounting for Maternity Pathways ................................................ 240
Scope of IFRS 15 ......................................................................................................... 240
CCG perspective .......................................................................................................... 241
Provider perspective ..................................................................................................... 242
Rationale behind Revenue Classification ..................................................................... 242
Revenue Recognition ................................................................................................... 245
Lead Provider – secondary transactions ...................................................................... 245
Conclusion .................................................................................................................... 246
5. Form and content of the Financial Statements .......................................................... 247
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 247
Annual Accounts Format .............................................................................................. 247
Accounting policies ....................................................................................................... 249
Statement of Comprehensive Income (SoCI) / Comprehensive Net Expenditure (SoCNE) ....................................................................................................................... 250
Notes to SoCI / SoCNE ................................................................................................ 252
Statement of Financial Position (SoFP) ........................................................................ 263
Notes to SoFP .............................................................................................................. 264
Statement of Changes in Taxpayers Equity (SoCTE) ................................................... 271
Statement of Cash Flows (SoCF) ................................................................................. 272
Other Disclosure Notes ................................................................................................ 273
Chapter 5 Annex 1: Example accounting policies ............................................................ 286
Chapter 5 Annex 2: Consultancy definition ...................................................................... 307
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
6
Summary of Changes
For ease of reference, the key changes in this document compared to the Department of
Health and Social Care Group Accounting Manual 2020-21 (GAM 2020-21) are set out
below. The comparisons are to the final published document.
Area of Change GAM 2021-22
GAM 2020-21
1 Revised Fair Pay Disclosures in line with changes made to the HM Treasury 2021-22 Financial Reporting Manual (FReM)
3.105 to 3.118
3.65 to 3.71
2 Expanded guidance regarding applicability of Managing Public Money to all DHSC group bodies
Below 2.85 Below 2.47
3
NHS trusts: clearer guidance on performance reporting and incorporating performance against national quality indicators
3.27
4 Updated references to EU-adopted IFRS, changing to UK adopted IFRS and references to NHS England and NHS Improvement
Various Various
5 Cosmetic changes to reduce paragraph length to improve understandability and impact of key messages throughout the GAM
All Chapters
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
7
1. Introduction
1.1 The Department of Health and Social Care (DHSC) and bodies within the DHSC
accounting boundary have a statutory requirement to produce an annual report
and accounts (ARA) following the end of the financial year.
1.2 Additionally, DHSC must produce a consolidation of accounts data for the bodies
within the accounting boundary. This Group Accounting Manual (GAM) is DHSC’s
guidance and instruction to these bodies on preparing and publishing an ARA.
Purpose and Applicability of the Manual
1.3 DHSC group bodies are required to prepare accounts in accordance with
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted in HM Treasury’s
'Financial Reporting Manual' (FReM), subject to any agreed divergences for the
DHSC group, or through subordination to the Companies Act 2006.
1.4 The GAM incorporates the requirements of the FReM for DHSC group bodies,
interprets them as appropriate, and provides additional guidance and context
relevant to the NHS.
1.5 DHSC group bodies must comply with the requirements of the GAM, and in so
doing can expect to achieve compliance with the FReM.
1.6 The GAM is not an accounting textbook and does not set out to explain standard
accounting principles.
1.7 DHSC group bodies must ensure they are sufficiently familiar with IFRS Standards
to achieve the necessary compliance. The GAM provides guidance on the
applicability of these standards.
Format of the Manual
1.8 The subsequent chapters in this manual are arranged as follows:
• Chapter 2 provides information on the framework under which the ARA must be
completed
• Chapter 3 covers the form and content of the annual report
• Chapter 4 covers accounting principles, including application of standards, HM
Treasury interpretations and adaptations and specific accounting policies
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
8
• Chapter 5 covers the form and content of the financial statements and accompanying
disclosures.
1.9 The GAM thematically addresses the application of standards. For example IFRS
9 is referenced in;
• Chapter 4 regarding accounting for assets and liabilities,
• Chapter 4 Annex 1 in which the public sector adaptations and interpretations are
replicated,
• Chapter 4 Annex 6 in which additional guidance is provided on financial instruments
accounting under IFRS 9, and,
• Chapter 5 Annex 1 in the example accounting policy note.
1.10 Cross references and hyperlinks are employed to ensure users can quickly locate
the guidance for specific standards throughout the GAM.
1.11 Annexes are used in this manual to provide further specific background
information on the requirements.
1.12 Annexes provide useful additional information on more complex issues for those
that require it, away from the main manual. These can be found after the chapter
they relate to (for example, the application of asset valuation methods is explained
in Chapter 4 Annex 4 Valuation Issues).
1.13 Additional appendices are included within this manual to supplement the core
guidance where there are additional sector specific reporting requirements.
1.14 Appendices form an integral part of the manual and are organised to assist in
locating entity specific guidance (for example, the CCG corporate governance
reporting requirements are presented in the two CCG appendices to Chapter 3).
Scope and Definitions
1.15 This manual applies to entities designated for consolidation within the accounting
boundary of the Department of Health and Social Care. These entities must follow
its requirements in preparing their ARA. Where parts of this guidance are relevant
to specific entities and sectors within the group, this is clearly indicated.
1.16 For annual reporting requirements only, NHS foundation trusts must follow the
separate NHS Foundation Trust Annual Reporting Manual 2020-21 (FT ARM
2020-21).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
9
1.17 NHS charities must follow the Charities Statement of Recommended Practice
(SORP) FRS 102. The requirements of this manual only apply to the results of
NHS charities where they are consolidated within the accounts of a parent NHS
provider.
1.18 For the purposes of this manual, references to entities that follow this manual are
defined as follows:
• Department of Health and Social Care – The core Department of Health and Social
Care, excluding all other group bodies,
• NHS trusts, as established under Section 25 of the National Health Service Act 2006,
• NHS foundation trusts, as authorised by Monitor under Section 35 of the National
Health Service Act 2006,
• NHS providers – All NHS trusts and NHS foundation trusts,
• established under Section 25 of the Health and Social Care Act 2012
• NHS England – The legal entity NHS Commissioning Board (including Commissioning
Support Units), which is also an NDPB,
• NHS Improvement - the banner under which the legal entities Monitor and NHS trust
Development operate,
• NHS England and NHS Improvement - the operating name of the national body that
leads and regulates the NHS in England,
• NHS commissioners – NHS England and all clinical commissioning groups,
• NHS bodies – All NHS providers and clinical commissioning groups,
• NHS charities – Charitable entities within the DHSC accounting boundary, either those
consolidated by parent NHS providers or independent charities consolidated directly
by DHSC,
• DHSC agencies – Executive agencies within the DHSC accounting boundary
(currently only Public Health England)
• Special health authorities – Entities within the DHSC accounting boundary established
as special health authorities,
• DHSC NDPBs – Non-departmental public bodies within the DHSC accounting
boundary. This includes NHS England unless stated otherwise,
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
10
• Other DHSC bodies – Other bodies designated for consolidation within the DHSC
accounting boundary, including limited companies,
• DHSC ALBs – Arm’s length bodies within the DHSC accounting boundary, comprising;
• DHSC agencies,
• special health authorities,
• DHSC NDPBs and
• other DHSC bodies.
• This includes NHS England, unless stated otherwise (Note that the FReM uses a
different definition of arm’s length bodies, which includes all bodies within a
departmental group except the core department and executive agencies)
• DHSC group bodies – All entities designated for consolidation within the DHSC
accounting boundary.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
11
2. Financial reporting framework
2.1 This chapter sets out the framework of legislation, regulations and guidance under
which DHSC group bodies prepare their annual reports and accounts and are held
accountable for their financial performance.
Legislative Framework
Government Resources and Accounts Act 2000
2.2 The departmental accounting group is defined in law by Designation Orders made
under the Government Resources and Accounts Act 2000 (GRAA).
2.3 The GRAA requires DHSC group bodies to:
• prepare such financial information in relation to the year as HM Treasury may request
• present the information in such form as HM Treasury may direct
• arrange for the information to be audited, and
• deliver the information to HM Treasury, in such manner and by such date in the next
year as HM Treasury may direct.
NHS foundation trusts
2.4 The requirements for NHS foundation trusts are set out in paragraphs 24 and 25 of
Schedule 7 to the National Health Service Act 2006 (the ’2006 Act’).
2.5 There are three main statutory requirements for an NHS foundation trust in relation
to its accounts:
• to keep proper accounts and proper records in such form as the regulator may, with
the approval of the Secretary of State, direct
• to prepare in respect of each financial year annual accounts in such form as the
regulator may, with the approval of the Secretary of State, direct, and
• to comply with any directions given by the regulator, with the approval of the Secretary
of State, as to:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
12
• the methods and principles according to which the accounts are to be prepared
and
• the content and form to be given in the accounts.
2.6 The regulator Monitor (one of the legal entities operating under the banner NHS
England and NHS Improvement (NHSE and NHSI)) issues these directions as part
of the FT ARM.
2.7 As guided in the directions, the GAM is directly applicable to NHS foundation
trusts, except for guidance set out in Chapter 3. Annual reporting guidance will
continue to be published alongside the accounts direction in the FT ARM.
Companies Act 2006 requirements
2.8 Although the use of IFRS means that the main generally accepted accounting
practice (GAAP) requirements of the Companies Act 2006 do not apply to the
DHSC group, there are nevertheless some disclosure requirements that remain
applicable as listed in Chapter 2 Annex 1 Companies Act 2006 requirements.
2.9 This does not remove requirements per the Companies Act 2006 in relation to
individual entity statutory accounts where applicable, such as for limited
companies.
Accounting Framework
2.10 To present a true and fair view, the accounts of the DHSC group must comply with
IFRS, as adopted by the FReM, unless directed otherwise.
2.11 As the FReM, like the GAM is not an accounting textbook, a key source of
guidance will be the accounting standards and supplementary guidance, published
by the International Accounting Standards Board.
Generally accepted accounting practice (GAAP)
2.12 This manual follows GAAP to the extent that it is meaningful and appropriate to the
DHSC group. GAAP consists of:
• the accounting and disclosure requirements of the Companies Act 2006, and
• pronouncements by or endorsed by the International Accounting Standards Board
(IASB) including the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting, IFRS Standards
and Interpretations,
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
13
• interpreted as necessary by the body of accumulated knowledge built up over time and
promulgated in, for example, textbooks, technical journals and research papers.
2.13 Where no relevant IFRS guidance exists, reference may be made to other
appropriate accounting standards, such as UK GAAP, to the extent that these do
not conflict with the requirements of IFRS Standards and Interpretations dealing
with similar issues and the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting. See
also Chapter 2 Annex 2: Other Relevant Accounting Pronouncements and
paragraph 2.16.
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
2.14 The IASB Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting sets out the principles
that should underlie general purpose financial statements, the objective of which is
to provide information about the financial position, performance and changes in
financial position.
2.15 Presentation should meet the ‘common needs of most users’.
2.16 This manual follows IFRS, as adopted by the UK, to the extent that it is relevant
and appropriate to the DHSC Group:
• IFRS Standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)
• International Accounting Standards (IASs) issued by the predecessor International
Accounting Standards Committee (IASC) and subsequently adopted by the IASB
• Interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRS IC, previously
IFRIC)
• Interpretations issued by the predecessor Standing Interpretations Committee (SIC)
and subsequently adopted by IFRIC
• the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting issued by the IASB.
UK-adopted IFRS
2.17 Listed companies that prepare group accounts are required to do so in accordance
with IFRS as adopted by the UK rather than IFRS as published by the IASB.
2.18 The adoption process sometimes creates a delay between the IASB or IFRS IC
issuing a pronouncement and its subsequent UK adoption, during which time
companies cannot early-adopt the new, or amended, requirements.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
14
2.19 HM Treasury’s approach in the FReM is to apply UK-adopted IFRS with some
adaptations and interpretations.
2.20 DHSC group bodies must apply IFRS as adopted by HM Treasury in the FReM
(see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the DHSC group),
except where additional departures and interpretations have been agreed by
DHSC (see Chapter 4 Annex 3: Departures from the FReM).
Government Financial Reporting Manual (FReM)
2.21 The 2021-22 GAM has been drafted to meet the requirements of the 2021-22
FReM.
2.22 The FReM is HM Treasury’s technical accounting and annual report guidance for
the preparation of public sector accounts (including, but not limited to, central
government departments, executive agencies and arm’s length bodies).
2.23 The FReM follows IFRS and Companies Act requirements.
2.24 In several important areas, the FReM provides interpretation and adaptation of
IFRS Standards to better meet Government’s reporting requirements.
2.25 The FReM also details additional disclosures for the public sector.
2.26 DHSC arm’s length bodies (ALBs) should additionally refer to the relevant
illustrative accounts, provided by HM Treasury in supplement to the FReM, to
ensure the ARA is presented in the correct format (see paragraph 5.21).
Group Accounting Manual (GAM)
2.27 The GAM is a further interpretation of the FReM, providing technical guidance to
DHSC group bodies that specifically addresses their requirements.
2.28 The GAM is compliant with the FReM, other than for specifically agreed
divergences (see Chapter 4 Annex 3: Departures from the FReM).
2.29 It is expected that those preparing ARAs will consult the GAM alongside the
relevant accounting standards, and thereby comply with the FReM.
2.30 The GAM is not an accounting textbook and does not repeat IFRS requirements
where these can be applied without specific interpretation or adaptation for the
DHSC group.
2.31 The GAM:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
15
• forms part of accounts directions issued to reporting bodies
• mandates particular accounting treatments where standards permit a choice, to ensure
consistency within the DHSC group
• draws attention to interpretations and adaptations of IFRS Standards set out in the
FReM, usually repeating the required departures from IFRS Standards
• highlights specific departures from the FReM, as agreed with Treasury, applicable to
the users of this manual
• specifies scope, contents and layout of the ARA, to ensure that these documents meet
HM Treasury expectations and provide consistent data for national summaries and
consolidations, and
• provides detailed accounting guidance in complex and technical areas (for instance,
Private Finance Initiative (PFI) and group reconstruction) where IFRS requirements
need consistent application in the NHS context.
2.32 This manual will be supplemented, as necessary, by numbered 'frequently asked
questions' (FAQ) updates over the course of the year.
2.33 These updates will be posted to the Department of Health and Social Care group
accounting manual area of ‘.gov.uk’. All content issued in this way will have the
same status as guidance issued in this manual. Users should check the
Department of Health and Social Care group accounting guidance area regularly
for new guidance.
Financial Reporting Advisory Board (FRAB)
2.34 The Financial Reporting Advisory Board provides independent accounting advice
in respect of public sector bodies to HM Treasury.
2.35 Approval is sought from FRAB on changes made to the FReM and to the DHSC
group manuals (GAM and FT ARM) before they are published. FRAB also
approves departmental divergences from the FReM.
Group and Consolidated Accounts
2.36 The financial reporting requirements for the DHSC group are determined by the
Department of Health and Social Care with the approval of HM Treasury.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
16
2.37 DHSC has a role as the relevant authority for agreeing the reporting requirements
for the group, and therefore any concerns about the content of this manual should
be raised with DHSC or the relevant national body, rather than directly with HM
Treasury.
2.38 As a relevant authority, the Department of Health and Social Care has the power
to set the accounts direction for DHSC group bodies (with some exceptions, as
explained below).
2.39 These directions require compliance with this manual, which provides specific
guidance on how DHSC group bodies should prepare their accounts.
2.40 Full details of accounts directions issued within the group are set out in Chapter 2
Annex 3 - Accounts Directions (structure). The text of the accounts direction for
NHS trusts is included in Chapter 2 Annex 4 - NHS Trust Accounts Directions.
DHSC group account
2.41 DHSC is responsible for the preparation of a group account.
2.42 Whereas an entity’s accounting boundary is normally determined by control
criteria, such as those set out in IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements,
government departments’ boundaries are determined by the classification of
entities to the public sector and subsequent allocation to a parent department.
This process is known as designation.
2.43 Entities are classified by the national accounts classification criteria set out by the
Office for National Statistics (ONS).
2.44 This classification process determines whether an entity is considered part of the
public sector and what type of body it is (for example, central government or local
government).
2.45 Most entities classified to central government will be allocated to a parent
department. This process is carried out by ONS, with input from HM Treasury,
based on the nature and role of the entity in question.
2.46 All entities allocated to a department, with some exceptions (for instance, trading
funds and public corporations), are considered to fall within its accounting
boundary.
2.47 The parent department consolidates these entities as though they are wholly
owned subsidiaries, regardless of how they would be treated under IFRS 10 and
related standards.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
17
2.48 With the advent of Sustainability and Transformation Partnerships (STP), evolving
into Integrated Care Systems (ICS), new entities and joint ventures are continually
being developed to deliver healthcare services. These new entities will need to be
assessed to determine whether they are DHSC group bodies and should therefore
be consolidated.
2.49 Any organisation is likely to be designated for consolidation where it is jointly
owned or majority owned by organisations within the DHSC accounting boundary
(determined by adding together the levels of ownership of all DHSC group bodies)
and where it delivers healthcare services through NHS contracts.
2.50 Organisations are also likely to be designated for consolidation where the risks
and rewards of the organisation are held by the DHSC/NHS collectively or other
factors of control are met, as set out in the Manual on Government Deficit and
Debt.
2.51 Determining factors include appointment of officers, determination by government
of functions, objectives and operating provisions, contractual arrangements,
degree of financing, and risk exposure.
2.52 DHSC group bodies that control any new entities (and any JVs not officially
designated) must raise these with NHSE or NHSI or DHSC initially, and may need
to complete the HMT designation questionnaire as part of the classification
process.
2.53 The list of designated entities is confirmed each year in a Designation Order. The
current Order is SI 2020 No. 1530, The Government Resources and Accounts Act
2000 (Estimates and Accounts) (Amendment) (No. 2) Order 2020.. Amendments
to this order will be made in 2021 and 2022.
2.54 The DHSC group account is prepared directly in accordance with the FReM. The
department’s accounting policies are consistent with the principles of the GAM.
NHS England group account
2.55 In accordance with the Health and Social Care Act 2012, NHS England (operating
as part of NHSE and NHSI) is required to prepare a group account consolidating
the accounts of clinical commissioning groups (CCGs).
2.56 NHSE and NHSI is also required to issue accounts directions to CCGs in respect
of their ARA. As the accounts directions require compliance with the 2021-22
GAM, the content of this manual is applicable to CCGs and to NHSE and NHSI.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
18
NHS trusts, foundation trusts and consolidated provider account
2.57 Monitor (operating as part of NHSE and NHSI) is responsible for preparing a
sector-specific consolidated account for NHS foundation trusts, as required by
paragraph 17(1), Schedule 8 to the Health and Social Care Act 2012.
2.58 NHSE and NHSI will also prepare a consolidated account for all NHS providers. It
follows that financial returns submitted by NHS trusts and NHS foundation trusts to
NHSE and NHSI, and the submission of FT and provider consolidated financial
data by NHSE and NHSI to DHSC, must be prepared in accordance with
accounting policies set out in this manual.
Summarisation schedules
2.59 Summarisation schedules are the method of collecting accounts data by DHSC,
NHSE and NHSI for accounts consolidation purposes.
2.60 The summarisation schedules are provided by these bodies in a set format to
ensure all data required for the accounts is collected. The collections allow the
sector sub-consolidations and the DHSC group consolidation to be completed.
2.61 The content within the summarisation schedules must be compliant with this
manual and be consistent with the entity’s own ARA. The term “summarisation
schedule” will refer to all of the following, unless otherwise stated:
• The Department of Health and Social Care Accounts Consolidation Schedule for
DHSC ALBs
• The TAC schedules incorporated into the provider finance in year monitoring return
(PFR) issued by NHSE and NHSI
• NHSE and NHSI CCG_CSU template.
2.62 While discretion applies in the format of the published ARA based on the
application of materiality, DHSC group bodies must complete the whole of the
summarisation schedule.
2.63 While balances may not be material at an entity level, the totals may aggregate
across the sector/group to a material level that DHSC or the relevant national body
would need to disclose on consolidation.
2.64 There are other data requests in the schedules which provide additional assurance
on the accounts, such as agreement of balances data, or for other purposes, such
as management information or Whole of Government Accounts completion.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
19
2.65 Before submission to DHSC or the relevant national body, it is important for any
validation issues to be cleared. This helps to provide assurance for the
consistency of data submitted to the relevant national body, and for the entity’s
annual accounts.
2.66 Entities may also be required to provide their audited annual accounts to the
relevant national body or DHSC for consistency checking.
2.67 Completion guidance and submission timetables will be released towards the end
of 2021.
Budgeting Framework
2.68 The majority of financing for the NHS derives ultimately from Parliamentary
funding issued to DHSC by means of the Estimate process.
2.69 DHSC is accountable to Parliament for these funds and subject to budgetary
control by HM Treasury.
2.70 HMT sets separate budgets for Resource and Capital, covering in year income
and expenditure requirements and funding for investment. Additionally, these
budgets are analysed into:
• Departmental Expenditure Limits (DEL)
• Annually Managed Expenditure (AME).
2.71 The financial performance of DHSC group bodies forms part of the consolidated
budget outturn reported by DHSC.
2.72 Group bodies must therefore provide information at a sufficiently detailed level to
enable the budgetary treatment to be identified. Completion of the summarisation
schedules ensures this.
2.73 The budgetary regime is aligned to National Accounts, which report on the UK
economy.
2.74 These are based on the national frameworks and guidance which differ from IFRS
in several areas, and therefore there are misalignments between budgets and
financial accounts.
2.75 Additional information may be required to calculate the necessary adjustments to
budget outturn. Examples are set out in the following paragraphs.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
20
2.76 Public Private Partnerships (PPPs) – These are generally accounted for as service
concession arrangements under IFRS, resulting in recognition of an asset and
corresponding liability. Different criteria apply under national frameworks and
guidance to determine whether an arrangement should be reported ‘on-balance
sheet’, and many PPPs will be ‘off-balance sheet’ for the purposes of HMT
budgetary controls. Where this is the case, information on the treatment under
national frameworks and guidance will be required to establish the necessary
adjustment to budget outturn. This is described in more detail in Chapter 4 Annex
5: Accounting requirements for PFI/LIFT schemes.
2.77 Capital grants – Grants paid to external bodies are treated as revenue expenditure
in financial accounts. However, where these grants finance investment, they are
required to score against Capital for the purposes of HMT budgetary controls. Any
expenditure identified in summarisation schedules as capital grants is
automatically reclassified to Capital for budgetary purposes.
2.78 Research and development – Most research and development expenditure cannot
be capitalised under IFRS. However, all such expenditure, including staff costs,
scores against Capital for the purposes of HMT budgetary controls. DHSC has
agreed with HMT that, to avoid double counting where DHSC commissions
research from its arm’s length bodies, the group expenditure on research and
development for budgetary purposes will be based on spend in core DHSC only.
DHSC ALBs and NHS bodies will therefore be unaffected and will report research
and development as revenue spend, except where IFRS permits capitalisation of
an asset.
Other Framework Issues
Accounts submission
2.79 A detailed accounts submission process, showing deadlines and procedures for
handling statutory accounts and summarisation schedules will be provided by the
relevant national bodies later in the year.
2.80 Treasury 'Public Expenditure System' (PES) papers give detailed guidance for
laying ARAs in Parliament. These papers apply primarily to government
departments.
2.81 Where relevant to entities that follow the GAM, PES requirements have been
incorporated into the GAM or will be included in this manual’s FAQs.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
21
2.82 Guidance for DHSC group bodies on the process for laying ARAs in Parliament is
included in Chapter 2 Annex 5 - Laying annual report and accounts before
Parliament.
General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)
2.83 The provision of advanced notification to individuals affected, by an entity's intent
to disclose personal information in the remuneration report section of the annual
report, is covered in Chapter 3 of the GAM.
2.84 Group bodies should also consider whether any other personal information
contained within the annual report and accounts should be subject to the GDPR
considerations that are set out in paragraphs 3.81 and 3.83.
Other guidance
2.85 Many of the following items will be made available subsequent to the GAM being
issued. These do not form part of the manual, but form part of a wider body of
guidance:
• NHSE and NHSI issues Monthly Financial Monitoring Guidance for NHS providers to
facilitate the completion of the monthly monitoring returns, with further detail on the
Trust Account Consolidation (TAC) schedules at months 9 and 12. Where detailed
accounting guidance is required, NHS providers must follow this manual, to ensure
consistency of reporting through the year.
• NHSE and NHSI will issue accounts templates for NHS providers at Q4 which are
optional for use and do not form part of its accounts direction to NHS foundation
trusts and do not form part of the GAM (see paragraphs 5.17 to 5.24 for the full list
of example accounts).
• NHSE and NHSI issues a model accounts template for CCGs use of which is optional
and does not form part of its accounts direction and does not form part of the GAM.
• Additional guidance for CCGs is issued by NHSE and NHSI on their SharePoint
site.
• For Month 9: Detailed completion guidance for DHSC summarisation schedules is also
provided alongside the quarterly monitoring guidance.
• Guidance on agreement of balances exercises, issued by DHSC.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
22
• HM Treasury’s Managing Public Money (MPM), which applies to all DHSC group
bodies. DHSC Group bodies must therefore ensure they are sufficiently aware of
MPM requirements. Entities should note;
• MPM adherence includes, but is not limited to, following MPM requirements
around obtaining prospective HM Treasury approvals for;
• novel, contentious or repercussive expenditure - including certain losses or
special payments such as special severance payments,
• novel, contentious or repercussive commitments - such as certain contingent
liabilities,
• spend outside the Department's delegated limits or authorities - such as the
giving of gifts.
• Expenditure and commitments entered into without HM Treasury approval, where
required, is irregular.
• Early and prospective engagement with the entities national body or DHSC
sponsor to avoid issues concerning the regularity or propriety of a transaction is
essential.
• Further reference is made to the reporting and disclosure requirements for ARAs
prescribed in MPM, in Chapter 3 and Chapter 5 of the GAM.
2.86 Additional requirements for clinical commissioning groups are set out below in
Chapter 2: CCG Appendix 1.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
23
Chapter 2 Annex 1: Companies Act 2006
Requirements
2.87 The following table lists the financial reporting requirements under the Companies
Act 2006, and how they are applicable to the accounts of departmental group
bodies.
CA2006 Reference Regulations Reference
per SI 2008 No.410, The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008
Description
Section 409 Regulation 7 and Schedule 4 Information about related undertakings in a note to the accounts.
Section 410A per SI 2008 No.393, The Companies Act 2006 (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2008
Information about off-SoFP arrangements in a note to the accounts.
Section 411 Information about employee numbers and costs in a note to the accounts. For DHSC group bodies, staff numbers and costs are included in the staff report within the annual report.
Section 412 (1) to (5) Regulation 8 and Schedule 5 Not required by the FReM, as these requirements are considered to be met by the preparation of a remuneration report as part of the annual report.
Section 413 NHS foundation trusts only: Information about directors’ benefits: advances, credit and guarantees, in a note to the accounts.
Sections: 414A(1),(3) and (4); 414C and 414D(1);
Strategic Report These requirements are adapted into the Performance Report: see chapter 3 (for bodies
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
24
CA2006 Reference Regulations Reference
per SI 2008 No.410, The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008
Description
as modified / inserted by SI 2013 No.1970, The Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013
other than NHS foundation trusts).
Sections: 415(1) to (3) 416; As modified / inserted by SI 2013 No.1970, The Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013;
418(1) to (4); and 419(1).
Regulation 10 and Schedule 7 Directors’ report These requirements are adapted for the public sector: see chapter 3 (for bodies other than NHS foundation trusts).
Sections: 420(1); 421(1) to (2); and 422(1).
Regulation 11 and Schedule 8 Quoted Companies: Directors’ Remuneration Report Section 497 which requires auditors to report on elements of the directors’ remuneration report in the audit opinion is applicable. These requirements are adapted for the public sector: see chapter 3 (for bodies other than NHS foundation trusts).
Sections 426 and 426A as modified / inserted by SI 2013 No.1970, The Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013
Contents of strategic report with supplementary material. (applicable only if the entity chooses to prepare an additional performance overview report with supplementary material).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
25
Chapter 2 Annex 2: Other Relevant
Accounting Pronouncements
2.88 Certain types of transactions, for which there are no relevant requirements under
IFRS, must be accounted for using the appropriate UK GAAP requirements.
These transactions are set out in the following table:
Transactions not
covered by IFRS
requirements
Accounting
requirements to be
applied
FReM reference
Accounting for value added tax (VAT).
FRS 102 paragraph 29.20 None
Accounting for Heritage Assets
FRS 102 paragraphs 34.49 to 34.35
10.1.31 to 10.1.48
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
26
Chapter 2 Annex 3 - Accounts Directions
(structure)
2.89 The following table summarises how accounts directions are issued to various
bodies within the DHSC group:
Entity Determination by:
Legislation Accounts Direction made under:
Approved by:
Department of Health and Social Care (own accounts and group consolidation)
HM Treasury Government Accounts and Resources Act 2000, s. 5: Resource Accounts Preparation and s. 7 Other Departmental Accounts
HM Treasury
NHS England (including commissioning sector sub-consolidation)
DHSC (Secretary of State) (SofS)
Health and Social Care Act 2012 c. 7 Schedule 1 s.16: Annual Accounts
HM Treasury
Monitor (own accounts and NHS foundation trust sub-consolidation)
DHSC SofS Consolidated FT accounts (s.17) and Monitor’s own accounts (s.18) Health and Social Care Act 2012 c. 7 Schedule 8: Accounts of NHS foundation trusts
HM Treasury
NHS trusts DHSC SofS NHS trust accounts National Health Service Act 2006 c. 41 Schedule 15: Preparation of annual accounts
HM Treasury
NHS foundation trusts
Monitor Paragraph 24 of Schedule 7 to the National Health Service Act 2006 amended Health and Social Care Act 2012 c. 7 part 4: Governance and management Section 154
Department of Health and Social Care (SofS)
CCGs NHSE and NHSI
Health and Social Care Act 2012 c. 7 Schedule 2 s.17 CCG Annual Report Directions (Chapter A1 of Part 2 of the National Health Service Act 2006 as amended by 14Z15 of the Health and Social Care Act 2012 Reports by clinical commissioning groups).
Department of Health and Social Care (SofS)
DHSC ALBs DHSC SofS HM Treasury
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
27
Chapter 2 Annex 4 - NHS Trust Accounts
Directions
2.90 DHSC has issued accounts directions to all NHS trusts, in accordance with
schedule 15 paragraph 3(1) of the National Health Service Act 2006. The text of
this direction is set out below.
2.91 Note the presentation reflects that these directions are incorporated into the
middle of a guidance document.
NATIONAL HEALTH SERVICE ACT 2006 DIRECTIONS GIVEN BY THE SECRETARY OF STATE IN RESPECT OF NATIONAL HEALTH SERVICE TRUSTS’ ACCOUNTS The Secretary of State for Health and Social Care, with the approval of the Treasury, in exercise of powers conferred on him by section 232 of and paragraph 3(1) of Schedule 15 to, and by section 273(1) of the National Health Service Act 2006 gives the following Directions: Commencement and interpretation 1. (1) These Directions are given to English NHS trusts and come into force on the day after the day on which they are signed. (2) In these Directions: “the Accounts” means the accounts of an NHS trust for a given financial year1; “English NHS trust” means an NHS trust all or most of whose hospitals, establishments and facilities are situated in England; “the trust” means the English NHS trust in question. Form of Accounts, including statement of directors' responsibilities 2. (1) NHS trusts are directed as follows. (2) The Accounts submitted under section 232 of and Schedule 15 to the National Health Service Act 2006 must show, and give a true and fair view of, the trust's gains and losses, cash flows and financial state at the end of the financial year. (3) The Accounts must meet the accounting requirements of the Department of Health and Social Care Group Accounting Manual (“the Manual”) as it applies for the relevant financial year, as agreed with the Treasury. (4) Where the Manual requires a statement of directors' responsibilities in respect of the Accounts, this must be signed and dated by the Chief Executive and Finance Director of the trust. Revocation of 2008 Directions
1 “financial year” is defined in section 275 of the National Health Service Act 2006 (c. 41) as “a period of 12 months ending with 31st March in any year”.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
28
3. The Directions entitled “Directions by the Secretary of State in Respect of National Health Service Trusts’ Accounts”, signed on 10th January 2008, are revoked. Signed by the authority of the Secretary of State for Health and Social Care ..................................................................................................... by Christopher Young, a member of the Senior Civil Service, Department of Health and Social Care, 39 Victoria Street, London SW1H 0EU. Dated 23rd March 2018
2.92 A direction to NHS TDA has also been issued regarding the powers conferred by
section 7(1) of the National Health Service Act 2006. The text of this direction is
set out below.
NATIONAL HEALTH SERVICE ACT 2006 Directions to the NHS Trust Development Authority in respect of the Accounts and Annual Reports of NHS Trusts The Secretary of State now gives the following further directions in exercise of powers conferred by section 7(1) of the National Health Service Act 2006: Commencement and interpretation 1. (1) These Directions are given to the NHS TDA and come into force on the day after the day they are signed. (2) In these Directions: “the 2006 Act” means the National Health Service Act 20062; “accounts” means the annual accounts of an English NHS trust prepared under paragraph 3(1) of Schedule 15 to the 2006 Act3; “annual report” means the annual report prepared by an NHS trust under paragraph 12(1) of Schedule 4 to the 2006 Act; “English NHS trust” means an NHS trust all or most of whose hospitals, facilities and establishments are situated in England; “the NHS TDA” means the National Health Service Trust Development Authority4. Functions of the NHS TDA relating to exercise of Secretary of State’s functions in respect of the accounts and annual reports of NHS trusts
2 c. 41 3 The Secretary of State for Health and Social Care has also directed NHS trusts as to the form and content of their accounts. Those Directions were made on 23 March 2018 and can be found via this link: DHSC Group Accounting Manual 4 The National Health Service Trust Development Authority is established by the National Health Service Trust Development Authority (Establishment and Constitution) Order 2012, S.I. 2012/901, amended by S.I. 2013/235 and 2013/260.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
29
2. The Secretary of State directs the NHS TDA to exercise the following functions of the Secretary of State– (a) receiving copies of annual reports sent by English NHS trusts in respect of each financial year under paragraph 12(1) of Schedule 4 to the 2006 Act5; (b) receiving the accounts of NHS trusts in respect of each financial year under paragraph 5(1) of Schedule 15 to the 2006 Act6; and (c) giving directions under paragraph 5(4) of Schedule 15 to the 2006 Act that specify the date, in respect of each financial year, by which accounts must, under paragraph 5(1) of that Schedule, be sent by English NHS trusts7. Signed by the authority of the Secretary of State for Health and Social Care ………...................................................................................................................... Christopher Young, a member of the Senior Civil Service, Department of Health and Social Care, 39 Victoria Street, London SW1H 0EU Dated 6th April 2018
5 This direction, when read with section 275(3) of the 2006 Act, has the effect that the requirement in paragraph 12(1) of Schedule 4 to that Act for NHS trusts to submit their annual reports to the Secretary of State is to be read as a requirement for the submission of those reports to the NHS TDA. The NHS TDA’s website provides information about how reports may be submitted to it: https://improvement.nhs.uk/financialreporting/. 6 This direction, when read with section 275(3) of the 2006 Act, has the effect that the requirement in paragraph 5(1) of Schedule 15 to that Act for NHS trusts to submit their accounts to the Secretary of State is to be read as a requirement for the submission of the accounts to the NHS TDA. The NHS TDA’s website at the link in footnote 5 provides information about how accounts may be submitted to it. 7 See footnote 6 – NHS trusts must send their accounts to the NHS TDA by the date specified in directions made by the NHS TDA in the exercise of the Secretary of State’s function under paragraph 5(4) of Schedule 15 to the 2006 Act.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
30
Chapter 2 Annex 5 - Laying annual report
and accounts before Parliament
2.93 This guidance applies to DHSC group bodies required to lay their annual report
and accounts (ARA) before Parliament. This includes;
• NHS foundation trusts,
• DHSC agencies,
• special health authorities,
• DHSC non-departmental public bodies (NDPBs) and the core department,
2.94 This therefore does not include;
• NHS trusts,
• clinical commissioning groups (CCGs),
• consolidated limited companies or
• NHS charities.
Statutory requirement
2.95 Entities falling within the sectors referred to above are required to lay their ARA,
with any report of the auditor on them, before Parliament.
2.96 Guidance on the form and content of the annual report is included in Chapter 3 of
this manual (except for NHS foundation trusts).
2.97 For NHS foundation trusts, the FT ARM 2021-22 sets out the format of a
foundation trust annual report. This must include the quality report together with
the limited assurance opinion on this report.
2.98 NHS foundation trusts must make themselves familiar with updated or revised
guidance offered in the FT ARM each financial year.
2.99 The ARA laid before Parliament must include the full statutory accounts, not
summarised information, and must be one document.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
31
2.100 Once laid before Parliament the content of the ARA cannot be changed. If
preparing a "glossy" annual report and accounts, this must be the final version,
including all graphics.
2.101 Entities have the discretion, after laying the document before Parliament, to
publish a condensed performance report with supplementary material in lieu of
local publication of the full ARA.
2.102 Further guidance on supplementary material can be found in paragraphs 3.131 to
3.135 of this manual (or in the FT ARM 2021-22, as applicable).
2.103 Until the ARA has been laid before Parliament, nothing can be published. Any
online version must be identical to the printed version.
The process of laying papers before Parliament
2.104 Entities must follow the guidance for laying papers in the House of Commons
Journal Office document Guide to laying papers (August 2017). Note that this
guidance is updated regularly.
2.105 Note also that the Journal Office guidance is aimed at government departments as
well as organisations such as NHS bodies.
2.106 The physical act of laying the report before Parliament can only be undertaken by
the Department of Health and Social Care Parliamentary Clerk, who will also
arrange for laying letters to be prepared.
2.107 More detailed guidance for DHSC group bodies on the requirements for laying
ARAs is available on the DHSC accounting guidance website.
2.108 The submitted ARA will be bound together in a series of reports by the House
authorities and will be stored in perpetuity.
2.109 It is therefore very important that reports are produced in the correct format for
laying in Parliament.
2.110 Reports that are not in the correct format will not be accepted for laying and the
entity may be required to undertake re-printing.
Deadlines for laying documents before Parliament
2.111 All ARAs must be sent to arrive at the Parliamentary Relations Unit to allow
sufficient time for laying before the Parliamentary summer recess.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
32
2.112 The timetable for submission will be confirmed at a later date. For FTs the
timetable for submission will be part of the accounts timetable issued by NHSE
and NHSI.
2.113 ARAs will be welcomed for laying before the submission date. It is the
responsibility of the entity to ensure its ARA is laid.
2.114 Laying reports in good time before the Parliamentary recess ensures that there is
an opportunity for appropriate Parliamentary scrutiny.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
33
Chapter 2 Annex 6 - CCG and NHS Trusts
Annual Audit Reports
2.115 The Code of Audit Practice places a requirement on all CCG and NHS Trust
auditors to issue an annual audit report.
2.116 An annual audit report is intended to be a public document, and CCGs and NHS
Trusts must ensure the document is made available to members of the public free
of charge.
2.117 The annual audit report is separate and distinct from the ISA 260 in which the
auditor reports to those charged with governance, for which there is no
requirement to make publicly available.
2.118 DHSC expects publication on the individual CCG / NHS Trust website to be the
easiest way to ensure the annual audit letter is made available.
2.119 The letter should not be made available prior to publication of the entity’s Annual
Reports and Accounts.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
34
Chapter 2: CCG Appendix 1
2.120 The following additional disclosures are applicable to CCGs.
Performance measures
2.121 NHSE and NHSI issued guidance on reporting CCG performance (“Note 42” in the
CCG_CSU template”). This is reproduced below:
Clinical commissioning groups have a number of financial duties under the National Health
Service Act 2006 (as amended).
The clinical commissioning group’s performance against those duties was as follows:
NHS Act Section
Duty Maximum performance £000s (2021-22 £x)
Duty Achieved?
223H(1)* Expenditure not to exceed income x (x) Y/N
223I(2) Capital resource use does not exceed the amount specified in Directions
x (x) Y/N
223I(3) Revenue resource use does not exceed the amount specified in Directions
x (x) Y/N
223J(1) Capital resource use on specified matter(s)does not exceed the amount specified in Directions
x (x) Y/N
223J(2)
Revenue resource use on specified matter(s) does not exceed the amount specified in Directions
x (x) Y/N
223J(3)
Revenue administration resource use does not exceed the amount specified in Directions
x (x) Y/N
* Note: For the purposes of 223H(1); expenditure is defined as the aggregate of gross expenditure on revenue and capital in the financial year; and, income is defined as the aggregate of the notified maximum revenue resource, notified capital resource and all other amounts accounted as receivable in the financial year (whether under provisions of the Act or from other sources, and included here on a gross basis).
2.122 For items under 223J(1) and 223J(2) provide information on the specified
matter(s) and their individual performance against target, splitting the table
disclosure if need be to highlight items that have breached target separate from
items within target (i.e. disclosing aggregated achievement within target must not
be used to ‘hide’ a breach of target against one or more Direction).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
35
2.123 Disclose the details of any reports that have been issued by the clinical
commissioning group’s auditors.
Points to Note
2.124 Where a clinical commissioning group breaches, or plans to breach, one of the
statutory financial provisions, even if this is agreed with NHSE and NHSI (for
example, setting a deficit budget), local auditors are under a duty to make a report
to the Secretary of State for Health under Section 30 of the Local Audit and
Accountability Act 2014.
2.125 The wording of Section 223H(1) is as follows:
"(1) Each clinical commissioning group must, in respect of each financial
year, perform its functions so as to ensure that its expenditure which is
attributable to the performance by it of its functions in that year does not
exceed the aggregate of:
(a) the amount allotted to it for that year under section 223G
(b) any sums received by it in that year under any provision of this Act
(other than sums received by it under section 223G), and
(c) any sums received by it in that year otherwise than under this Act for
the purpose of enabling it to defray such expenditure."
2.126 Sections 223H(1) and 223G do not distinguish between resources allotted for
capital use and resources allotted for revenue use.
2.127 The amount to be included in the ‘Maximum’ column for the 223H(1) line is
therefore the aggregate of:
(a) the clinical commissioning group’s notified maximum revenue resource use
plus maximum capital resource use
PLUS
(b) all other sums received in year under other provisions of the Act (and
accounted for in the financial results of the year)
PLUS
(c) all other income received in year (and accounted for in the financial results of
the year, regardless of whether accounted for gross or net).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
36
2.128 The amount to be included in the ‘Performance’ column for the 223H(1) line is the
aggregate of:
(a) total revenue expenditure (accounted for in the financial results of the year,
regardless of whether accounted for gross or net)
PLUS
(b) total capital expenditure (accounted for in the financial results of the year).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
37
3. Form and content of the Annual
Report
3.1 This chapter is relevant to all DHSC group bodies except NHS foundation trusts,
who must instead refer to the 2021-22 FT ARM.
Introduction
3.2 DHSC group bodies are required to publish, as a single document, a three-part
annual report and accounts (ARA):
1. The Performance Report, which must include:
• an overview
• a performance analysis.
2. The Accountability Report, which must include:
• a Corporate Governance Report
• a Remuneration and Staff Report
• a Parliamentary Accountability and Audit Report.
3. The Financial Statements
3.3 The structure of the ARA adopted here is the one described in the FReM. DHSC
group bodies may omit headings or sections where they consider that these are
not relevant, but the structure of the three-part ARA outlined in this manual must
be adhered to.
3.4 The structure on an ARA is illustrated in Chapter 3 Annex 1 – Annual Report and
Accounts Outline Structure.
General Principles
3.5 This guidance sets out the minimum content of the ARA.
3.6 Beyond this however, the entity must take ownership of the document and ensure
that additional information is included where necessary to reflect the position of the
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
38
body within the community and give sufficient information to meet the
requirements of public accountability.
3.7 Where a DHSC group body has changed status in year, the body must give
additional consideration to the requirements described in paragraphs 4.391 to
4.394 and Chapter 4 Annex 9: Reporting requirements on change of status.
3.8 Part A of the Financial Reporting Manual (FReM) sets out the purposes, principles
and best practice in financial reporting.
3.9 In establishing these, the FReM makes a number of references to the Financial
Reporting Council's July 2018 publication of Guidance on the Strategic Report.
3.10 Reporting requirements expressed in the FReM and GAM apply these principles to
the preparation of annual report and accounts.
3.11 Specific reference is made to the application of the concept of materiality to the
Performance Report and Accountability Report. Unless explicitly permitted, the
concept of materiality cannot be applied to disclosures required:
• By the GAM and consequently the FReM;
• By law or by regulation;
• Promulgated by HM Treasury through PES papers. DHSC Group bodies will receive
updates regarding additional requirements through the FAQ process
3.12 The use of terms such as 'to the extent necessary for an understanding of' or
'principal' identify instances in which materiality judgements can be made in
relation to disclosure requirements within the Performance Report and
Accountability Report.
3.13 Where additional information is provided per paragraph 3.5 preparers should
equally ensure that the disclosure of information meets the principles and
practices as detailed in the FReM in force for the appropriate financial year.
Accounting/Accountable Officer Responsibilities
3.14 The ARA as a whole must be fair, balanced and understandable.
3.15 The Accounting/Accountable Officer takes personal responsibility for it and the
judgments required for determining that it is fair, balanced and understandable.
NHS bodies are not required to comply with the UK Code of Corporate
Governance.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
39
3.16 The DHSC group body must include a Statement of Accounting/Accountable
Officer's Responsibilities within the Accountability Report (see paragraph 3.52).
Additionally, NHS trusts must include a Statement of Directors' Responsibilities.
3.17 The Accounting/Accountable Officer/Chief Executive must sign and date the
following within the ARA to confirm adherence to the reporting framework:
• Performance Report (see paragraphs 3.22 to 3.37 for content)
• Accountability Report, which incorporates the Corporate Governance
Report/Statement (see paragraphs 3.49 to 3.57), the Remuneration and Staff Report
(see paragraphs 3.68 to 3.119) and the Parliamentary Accountability Report (where
applicable, see paragraphs 3.120 to 3.127)
• Statement of Financial Position (see Chapter 5).
CCG Governance
3.18 This manual adopts FReM and Companies Act terminology in references to
“Boards” and “Directors”.
3.19 It is recognised however that CCGs have unique governance arrangements that
are not fully reflected in the core manual.
3.20 All references to Boards or Directors in the following chapter should, for the
purposes of CCGs, be interpreted as governing bodies and governing body
members.
3.21 Further details regarding the application to CCGs is available in Chapter 3 CCG
Appendix 1: Additional Requirements for CCGs, in relation to the status of CCG
governing bodies, governing body members and CCG membership and members.
Performance Report
3.22 The purpose of the performance section of the annual report is to provide
information on the entity, its main objectives and strategies and the principal risks
that it faces.
3.23 The requirements of the performance report are based on the matters required to
be dealt with in a Strategic Report as set out in Chapter 4A of Part 15 of the
Companies Act 2006, as amended by SI 2013 No.1970, The Companies Act 2006
(Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
40
3.24 Public entities must comply with the Act as adapted: i.e. they must treat
themselves as if they were quoted companies.
3.25 The performance report is required to have two sections: a 'performance overview'
and a 'performance analysis'.
3.26 The report must be fair, balanced and understandable. Infographics and visual
aids should be used where they can enhance users understanding of the report.
3.27 For NHS trusts, performance of the organisation in both the overview and
performance analysis should cover all aspects of performance and not only
financial. This should include delivery against quality improvement priorities and
performance against the most pertinent indicators for the Trust in the NHS
Oversight Framework. Linkage should be made to disclosures on quality
governance and data quality included in the accountability report.
3.28 The performance report shall be signed and dated by the Accounting/Accountable
Officer/Chief Executive.
3.29 Auditors will review the performance report for consistency with other information
in the financial statements.
3.30 Auditors are required to read the information in the annual report and refer to this
in their audit report.
3.31 Therefore, the draft annual report must be submitted to the auditor to allow them
sufficient time to do this prior to signing their opinion on the accounts.
Performance overview
3.32 The purpose of the performance overview is to give the user a short (no more than
10 to 15 pages) summary that provides them with sufficient information to
understand the organisation, its purpose, the key risks to the achievement of its
objectives and how it has performed during the year.
3.33 The overview should be enough for the lay user to have no need to look further
into the rest of the ARA unless they were interested in further detail or had specific
accountability or decision-making needs to be met.
3.34 As a minimum, the overview must include:
• A short summary explaining the purpose of the overview section
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
41
• a statement from the chief executive providing their perspective on the performance of
the organisation over the period
• a statement of the purpose and activities of the organisation, including a brief
description of the business model and environment, organisational structure,
objectives and strategies.
• a performance appraisal which provides a synopsis of the performance analysis
discussed in paragraph 3.35 and an assessment of the entity's progress towards
delivering its objectives. An assessment should cover;
• whether performance has met expectation and provision of explanations where
this is not the case,
• the key issues and risks that could affect the entity in delivering its objectives and
affect its future performance and plans. The description of the risks should be
sufficiently specific that it is easily understood why they are important,
• how the risks have been managed and how the risks have changed through the
period. Significant changes should be highlighted and explained with reference to
where relevant disclosures have been made elsewhere in the ARA such as the
accountability report or performance report.
• an explanation of the adoption of the going concern basis (see paragraphs 4.18 to
4.27) where this might be called into doubt (expected in extremely limited
circumstances as, for instance, the issue of a report under Section 30 of the Local
Audit and Accountability Act 2014 for a CCG or an NHS provider, or the demise of an
NHS body where service provision continues, will not call going concern into doubt).
• Where a trust hosts a Nightingale facility, whilst these arrangements will be immaterial
to the financial statements, as trusts either make no or peppercorn payments, it is
material by nature to the users of the accounts, therefore requiring adequate
explanation of the arrangement. As such trusts must disclose;
• The nature of the hosting arrangement, such as when the facility was established
and its maximum occupancy, and,
• pertinent detail regarding the impact of hosting the facility as disclosed in the trusts
Provider Finance Return forms.
Performance analysis
3.35 The purpose of the performance analysis is for entities to provide a detailed
performance summary of how their entity measures its performance, more detailed
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
42
integrated performance analysis and long-term expenditure trend analysis where
appropriate.
3.36 It is expected to provide a cohesive and consistent understanding of performance
from across the ARA.
3.37 As a minimum, the performance analysis must include:
• A short explanation of the purpose of the section and its structure.
• Information on how the entity measures performance i.e. what the entity sees as its
key performance measures, how it checks performance against those measures, and
narrative to explain the link between KPIs, risk and uncertainty.
• A more detailed analysis and explanation of the development and performance of the
entity during the year and an explanation of the relationships and linkages between
different pieces of information. This analysis is required to include a financial review
which will utilise a wide range of data including key financial information from the
financial statements section of the accounts. Trend data presenting balance sheet
movements for assets and liabilities and detail on the type of spend incurred (on
employees, equipment or buildings) are considered best practice items to include in
such a financial review.
• Further detail on the risk profile of the organisation, expanding on the summary offered
in the performance overview, to describe;
• how risks have affected the organisation achieving its objectives
• how such risks have been mitigated
• how such mitigation may affect future performance and plans
• significant changes in risks, including their likelihood and impact
• new and emerging risks
• how both existing and new risks could affect performance and delivery of plans in
future years.
• Non-financial information, including social matters, respect for human rights, diversity,
anti-corruption and anti-bribery matters.
• A summary of how equality of service delivery to different groups has been
promoted through the organisation should be considered as part of a best practice
disclosure. This is a mandatory disclosure requirement for NHS bodies regardless
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
43
of whether a performance analysis is omitted from the Performance Report.
Disclosure may include, cross referencing separate publications that contain such
information, or provision of information regarding:
• How the entity has had due regard to the aims of the public sector equality
duty where applicable.
• Customer satisfaction scores broken down by protected characteristics where
collected.
• Performance against equality of service delivery KPIs and metrics if
applicable.
• Explanations of activities the entity is undertaking to promote equality of
service delivery.
• Information on environmental matters, including the impact of the entity’s business on
the environment. Reporting entities are expected to report annually on sustainability
matters. Reporting requirements can be met by following the guidance and standard
reporting format for NHS bodies produced by the Sustainable Development Unit. It is
envisaged that reporting entities will produce a report that will be integral, with
reference throughout the annual report and accounts and not a separate standalone
report.
• Performance on other matters raised during the year (for example, in Treasury PES
papers): DHSC will notify group bodies of such additional requirements in FAQs.
3.38 Entities should include the following information on a comply or explain basis, if
not captured in meeting the minimum requirements of the performance overview
or analysis:
• Further detail on the structure of the organisation unless sufficient detail is already
provided in the annual report.
• If unit costs are central to decision making or the accountability functions of the entity
they should be disclosed where permissible. Disclosure should include assumptions
employed to derive calculations and should be maintained to enable meaningful
comparison across periods.
• Where data is disclosed without trend data the reason for its absence should be
disclosed. This can include reasons such as this being the first year data is available
for instance.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
44
• In the financial review offered in the performance analysis, key financial indicators or
measures should be employed in the broader discussion of an entity's performance.
This can also include the identification of where effective or ineffective use of
resources has contributed to meeting or failing to meet objectives.
• Detail in relation to future plans and expected future performance if not captured as
part of the trend analyses provided in the performance analysis.
• A summary or reference to any accountability issues or breaches outlined in the
accountability report, worth drawing to the attention of users. Detail from the
accountability report should not be duplicated here.
3.39 Entities should also consider how the following information could be incorporated
into their performance analysis to incorporate 'best practice recommendations' per
the FReM:
• context and explanation of the budgeting framework with any key terms being defined
• a summary of outturn to accounts reconciliation
• A trend analysis showing spend in the budgeting currencies that are relevant to the
entity (for example RDEL, CDEL, RAME, CAME, Capital Resource Limit, breakeven
duty, 'adjusted financial performance' etc.) over the previous 5 years and future
projections where available.
3.40 The FReM establishes that disclosing several years of trend data is best practice
and that five years is a positive target to attain for reporting purposes.
3.41 Entities should ensure that trend data employed helps establish the context of the
data. This means that the length of trend may appropriately vary by entity and
performance indicator.
3.42 Clear explanations of the employment of trend data over an appropriately judged
period will assist the users understanding of information disclosed.
The Accountability Report
Scope of the Accountability Report
3.43 The purpose of the accountability section of the annual report is to meet key
accountability requirements to Parliament.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
45
3.44 The requirements of the Accountability Report are based on the matters required
to be dealt with in a Directors’ Report, as set out in Chapter 5 of Part 15 of the
Companies Act 2006 and Schedule 7 of SI 2008 No.410, The Large and Medium-
sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008, and in a
Remuneration Report, as set out in Chapter 6 of the Companies Act 2006 and
Schedule 8 of SI 2013 No 1981, The Large and Medium-sized Companies and
Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013.
3.45 The requirements of the Companies Act 2006 have been adapted for the public
sector context and only need to be followed by entities which are not companies to
the extent that they are incorporated into this manual.
3.46 Auditors will review the Accountability Report for consistency with other
information in the financial statements and will provide an opinion on the following
disclosures which must clearly be identified as audited within the Accountability
Report:
• disclosures on Parliamentary accountability, as detailed in paragraph 3.124
• single total figure of remuneration for each director
• CETV disclosures for each director
• payments to past directors, if relevant
• payments for loss of office, if relevant
• “fair pay” (pay multiples) disclosures
• exit packages, if relevant, and
• analysis of staff numbers and costs.
3.47 The Accountability Report is required to have three sections:
• a Corporate Governance Report
• a Remuneration and Staff Report
• a Parliamentary Accountability and Audit Report.
3.48 DHSC group bodies must provide a short overview of these sections and explain
how they help deliver accountability to Parliament (where relevant) and embody
best practice to comply with corporate governance norms and codes.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
46
Corporate governance report
3.49 The purpose of the corporate governance report is to explain the composition and
organisation of the entity’s governance structures and how they support the
achievement of the entity’s objectives.
3.50 As a minimum, the Corporate Governance Report must include:
• the directors’ report (members’ report for CCGs)
• the statement of Accounting/Accountable Officer's responsibilities
• the governance statement.
The directors’/members’ report
3.51 The directors’/members’ report must include the following, unless disclosed
elsewhere in the ARA, in which case a cross-reference may be provided:
• the names of the chair and chief executive, and the names of any individuals who
were directors of the entity at any point in the financial year and up to the date the
ARA was approved
• the composition of the board of directors (including advisory and non-executive
members) having authority or responsibility for directing or controlling the major
activities of the entity during the year
• the names of the directors forming an audit committee or committees (recommended)
• the details of company directorships and other significant interests held by members of
the management board which may conflict with their management responsibilities
(where a register of interests is available online, a web link may be provided instead of
a detailed disclosure in the annual report)
• information on personal data related incidents where these have been formally
reported to the information commissioner’s office
• (NHS bodies) a statement to the effect that each director: knows of no information
which would be relevant to the auditors for the purposes of their audit report, and of
which the auditors are not aware, and; has taken “all the steps that he or she ought to
have taken” to make himself/herself aware of any such information and to establish
that the auditors are aware of it.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
47
Statement of Accounting/Accountable Officer’s responsibilities
3.52 The Accounting/Accountable Officer must explain his/her responsibility for
preparing the financial statements.
3.53 The Accounting/Accountable Officer is required to confirm that, as far as he or she
is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the entity’s auditors are
unaware, and the Accounting Officer has taken all the steps that he or she ought
to have taken to make himself or herself aware of any relevant audit information
and to establish that the entity’s auditors are aware of that information.
3.54 The Accounting/Accountable Officer is required to confirm that the ARA as a whole
is fair, balanced and understandable and that he or she takes personal
responsibility for the ARA and the judgments required for determining that it is fair,
balanced and understandable.
3.55 NHSE and NHSI issues model statements of Accounting / Accountable Officer
Responsibilities for use by NHS Foundation Trusts and NHS Trusts. NHSE and
NHSI also issues an annual report template on SharePoint for CCGs to utilise.
3.56 Other DHSC group bodies may wish to consider the model statements offered in
the Annexes of the FReM as appropriate to their entity.
Governance statement
3.57 In preparing the statement, the Accounting/Accountable Officer should reflect the
particular circumstances in which the entity operates.
3.58 NHS trusts must follow guidance to be issued by NHSE and NHSI. CCGs must
follow the template and guidance published via the NHSE and NHSI/CCG
SharePoint
3.59 The FReM expresses the following as minimum requirements the statement
should acknowledge and explain:
• responsibilities for risk management and internal control systems and for reviewing
their effectiveness
• the on-going process and structures used to identify, evaluate and manage the
principal and emerging risks faced, cross referencing to the performance report where
appropriate.
• that the systems have been in place for the year under review and up to the date of
approval of the annual report and accounts
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
48
• the main features that support regular monitoring, review and assurance
• the process applied in reviewing the effectiveness of the system of risk management
and internal control, including explaining what actions have been or are being taken to
remedy any significant failings or weaknesses. Where this information has been
disclosed elsewhere in the annual report and accounts, a cross-reference to where
that information can be found will suffice; and
• the extent to which arrangements comply with requirements for specific sectors and
jurisdictions governed by the Relevant Authorities per paragraph 3.57, such as the
central government Corporate Governance Code and the Orange Book, with
explanations of any departures.
• Exceptionally, where information is not reported due to issues regarding accuracy,
reliability, or collection itself, this should be acknowledged. The steps being taken to
improve data and disclosure, as well as when reliable data will be made available,
need to be identified.
Modern Slavery Act 2015 – Transparency in Supply Chains
3.60 The Modern Slavery Act 2015 establishes a duty for commercial organisations
with an annual turnover in excess of £36 million to prepare an annual slavery and
human trafficking statement.
3.61 This is a statement of the steps the organisation has taken during the financial
year to ensure that slavery and human trafficking is not taking place in any of its
supply chains or in any part of its own business.
3.62 Income earned by NHS bodies from government sources, including CCGs and
local authorities, is considered to be publicly funded and is therefore outside the
scope of these reporting requirements.
3.63 Where NHS bodies engage in profit-making activities, these may still be sufficient
to trigger the reporting requirements. This is likely to be the case where income is
earned from non-government sources, such as private patients, and where this
income exceeds £36 million in total.
3.64 It is ultimately for individual NHS bodies to consider whether they have activities
that require them to be treated as a commercial organisation for the purpose of the
Modern Slavery Act 2015, and to produce the required statement accordingly.
3.65 The Home Office have produced a practical guide on applying the reporting
requirements, Transparency in Supply Chains etc. a practical guide.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
49
3.66 Note that, where a slavery and human trafficking statement is required, the Act
specifies that entities must publish this on their website if they have one.
3.67 It is not a mandatory requirement to include the statement in an entity’s ARA, but
DHSC group bodies may nevertheless choose to do so.
Remuneration and staff report
3.68 The remuneration and staff report sets out the organisation’s remuneration policy
for directors and senior managers, reports on how that policy has been
implemented and sets out the amounts awarded to directors and senior managers
and where relevant the link between performance and remuneration.
3.69 In addition, the report provides details on remuneration and staff that users of the
accounts see as key to accountability.
3.70 Group bodies should consider where the inclusion of narrative, to define the scope
of the information being disclosed, would assist users in this respect.
'Group' basis of preparation
3.71 The remuneration report must disclose information on those persons in senior
positions having authority or responsibility for directing or controlling major
activities within the group body.
3.72 This means those who influence the decisions of the entity as a whole rather than
the decisions of individual directorates or departments.
3.73 It is important for individual entities to consider the 'group' basis of the scope
governing the above requirement.
3.74 The Companies Act 2006, Part 15 Chapter 5, confirms the group perspective to be
employed for the directors' report. This perspective is equally relevant to the
determination as to which senior management influence the entity as a whole.
3.75 The chief executive or Accounting/Accountable Officer must be asked to confirm
whether this covers more than the executive and non-executive directors (for
CCGs – attendees at Governing Body meetings).
3.76 It is usually considered that the regular attendees of the entity’s board meetings
are its senior managers.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
50
3.77 The 'group' basis of preparation may also have an impact on the nature of the
disclosure required regarding the individual's qualifying services as detailed in
paragraph 3.151(v).
Staff sharing scenarios
3.78 For staff-sharing arrangements, the remuneration report must include
remuneration details showing the entity’s share of the relevant components of
remuneration, for those senior managers holding a position in the entity..
3.79 In addition, the senior manager’s total salary (across all organisations they are
engaged by) must be shown separately.
3.80 Where such additional information is separately presented, entities should
carefully consider how best to disclose this detail in a transparent and informative
manner, enabling users to effectively hold entities to account.
GDPR considerations
3.81 There is a presumption that information about named individuals will be given in all
circumstances and all disclosures in the remuneration report will be consistent with
identifiable information of those individuals in the financial statements.
3.82 Individuals must be advised in advance of the intention to disclose information
about them, with an invitation for sight of the intended information to be published
and notification that the individual can object under Article 21 of GDPR.
3.83 If a member does not agree to disclosure, the entity must consider whether to
accept non-disclosure.
3.84 Under such circumstances the GDPR requires the entity to demonstrate
compelling legitimate grounds for the disclosure which override the interests, rights
and freedoms of the member or for the establishment, exercise or defence of legal
claims.
3.85 Entities are strongly advised to take legal advice in such a case, because a
decision not to publish may be challenged under the Freedom of Information Act.
Where non-disclosure is agreed, the fact that disclosure has been omitted should
be disclosed.
Subject to Audit
3.86 Certain information is auditable and will be referred to in the audit opinion. The
report must be annotated to identify those items that are auditable.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
51
Relationship between the remuneration report and exit packages, severance
payments and off-payroll engagements disclosures
3.87 In many cases, individuals who fall to be named in the remuneration report will
also be included, although not individually identified by name, in the exit packages,
non-compulsory departures or off-payroll engagements disclosures.
3.88 Where this is the case, the remuneration report must provide the details of those
agreements or payments on an individual by individual basis in a way that permits
the user to cross-reference remuneration report data to that in the wider notes to
the accounts.
Remuneration policy
3.89 Entities must disclose their policy on the remuneration of directors for the current
and future years.
Remuneration of Very Senior Managers (VSMs) – CCGs only
3.90 Where one or more senior managers of a CCG are paid more than £150,000 per
annum, the remuneration report must explain (not necessarily on an individual
basis) the steps the CCG has taken to satisfy itself that this remuneration is
reasonable.
3.91 Pay for a part time senior manager must be compared against a pro rata of
£150,000. For this disclosure, ‘pay’ should be considered to be columns (a), (b),
(c) and (d) of the ‘single total figure table’ in the remuneration report (see Chapter
3 Annex 2 - Salary and Pension disclosure tables: information subject to audit).
3.92 A similar disclosure applies to NHS foundation trusts, set out separately in the FT
ARM 2021-22.
Remuneration Report Tables
3.93 The tables for use as part of the remuneration report (the Single Total Figure, and
Pension Entitlement tables) are ‘Table 1: Single total figure table’ and ‘Table 2:
Pension Benefits’.
3.94 These are reproduced with further guidance offered in Chapter 3 Annex 2 - Salary
and Pension disclosure tables: information subject to audit.
3.95 The figures relate to all those individuals who hold or have held office as a senior
manager of the DHSC group body (CCGs – member of the Governing Body)
during the reporting year or in the prior period.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
52
3.96 If an individual is seconded into the organisation at no cost to the organisation,
disclose the arrangement. It is irrelevant that:
• an individual was not substantively appointed (holding office is sufficient, irrespective
of defects in appointment), or an individual's title as senior manager included a prefix
such as "temporary" or "interim", or
• an individual was engaged via a corporate body, such as an agency, and payments
were made to that corporate body rather than to the individual directly.
3.97 It is a requirement to disclose explanations of any significant awards made to past
senior managers.
3.98 Calculations in the single total figure table (notably in column “e” – all pensions
related benefits) may return negative values. Negative figures must not be shown
in any columns in the table: a zero must be substituted.
3.99 The only exception to this relates to instances of a recovery or withholding of sums
in the current financial year, in respect of amounts disclosed in the remuneration
report for a previous financial year.
3.100 In such instances the negative value should be shown in a separate additional
column subtracted from the 'total' column and explanation given in a note to the
table.
3.101 CCG pension disclosures relating to GPs serving on the Governing Body are
discussed in Chapter 3 CCG Appendix 2 – Pension Disclosures, including tables
to demonstrate how the pensions disclosure of governing body members should
be disclosed.
Compensation on early retirement or for loss of office
3.102 If a payment for compensation on early retirement or for loss of office (paid or
receivable) has been made under the terms of legislation or an approved
Compensation Scheme, the fact that such a payment has been made must be
disclosed, including a description of the compensation payment and details of the
total amounts paid (the cost to be used must include any top-up to compensation
provided by the employer to buy out the actuarial reduction on an individual’s
pension).
Payments to past directors
3.103 DHSC group bodies must provide details of any payments made to any person
who was not a director at the time the payment was made, but who had been a
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
53
director of the entity previously, unless already disclosed within a previous
remuneration report, the current year single total remuneration disclosure or within
the disclosure of compensation for early retirement or loss of office.
3.104 Only payments of regular pension benefits which commenced in previous years
and payments in respect of employment for the entity other than as a director may
be excluded.
Fair Pay Disclosure
3.105 Entities are required to disclose pay ratio information and detail concerning
percentage change in remuneration concerning the highest paid director. The
specific disclosure requirements are described in paragraphs 3.107 to 3.118.
3.106 Where the disclosure requirement is new for 2021-22, the requirement to provide a
prior year comparative is best practice rather than mandatory. This is identified in
the description of the disclosure requirements below.
Percentage change in remuneration of highest paid director
3.107 For the single total figure table components:
• Salary and allowances
• performance pay and bonuses
• all taxable benefits,
3.108 Entities are required to disclose separately for each single total figure table
component:
(a) The percentage change from the previous financial year in respect of the
highest paid director, and,
(b) The average percentage change from the previous financial year in respect of
employees of the entity, taken as a whole.
3.109 Two percentage figures will therefore be provided for each single total figure
component detailed in paragraph 3.107, giving a total of six percentages to be
disclosed for each financial year under this requirement.
3.110 Prior year comparatives for each percentage change are required to be given in
every year after 2021-22, with 2021-22 being the first year for which this disclosure
is made, thus making prior year comparatives best practice than mandated.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
54
3.111 Entities should provide context regarding the percentage figures disclosed, to help
users of the accounts understand percentages disclosed. This may assist entities
where comparisons are not straightforward
Pay ratio information
3.112 Entities are required to disclose:
• the 25th percentile, median and 75th percentile of remuneration of the reporting
entity’s staff (based on annualised, full-time equivalent remuneration of all staff
(including temporary and agency staff) as at the reporting date)
• the 25th percentile, median and 75th percentile of the salary component of
remuneration of the reporting entity’s staff (based on annualised, full-time equivalent
remuneration of all staff (including temporary and agency staff) as at the reporting
date)
• the range of staff remuneration
• separate ratios for the 25th percentile, median and 75th percentile of staff
remuneration against the mid-point of the banded remuneration of the highest paid
director, for which an illustrative table is provided below which identifies the derivation
of the pay ratio and the nature of the prior year comparative.
Year 25th percentile pay ratio
Median pay ratio 75th percentile pay ratio
202x-2x X:1 (X being the
mid-point of highest
paid director/25th
percentile of
employee
remuneration)
Y:1 (Y being the
mid-point of highest
paid director/50th
percentile of
employee
remuneration)
Z:1 (Z being the
mid-point of highest
paid director/75th
percentile of
employee
remuneration)
202x-2x X:1
(Prior year
comparative is best
practice for 2021-
22)
Y:1
(Prior year
comparative is
mandatory)
Z:1
(Prior year
comparative is best
practice for 2021-
22)
• an explanation for any significant changes in the ratio between the current and prior
years.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
55
3.113 All DHSC group bodies must include a narrative highlighting the reasons for any
variance in year-on-year ratios in order to:
• describe the purpose of including the ratios, and what they mean
• ensure transparency in executive remuneration
• allow the public to hold government to account for their use of public funds
• provide an opportunity for entities to monitor their own remuneration and note any
adverse or anomalous trends.
3.114 The narrative should be concise and clearly linked to the figures disclosed in the
remuneration report and use terms that are easily understandable by the public.
The narrative must be introduced by the following text:
“Reporting bodies are required to disclose the relationship between the
remuneration of the highest-paid director / member in their organisation
against the 25th percentile, median and 75th percentile of remuneration of
the organisation’s workforce. Total remuneration is further broken down to
show the relationship between the highest paid director's salary
component of their total remuneration against the 25th percentile, median
and 75th percentile of salary components of the organisation’s workforce.
The banded remuneration of the highest paid director / member in [the
organisation] in the financial year 202x-2x was £xx (202x-2x, £xx). The
relationship to the remuneration of the organisation's workforce is
disclosed in the below table.
Year 25th percentile total remuneration ratio
25th percentile Salary ratio
Median total remuneration ratio
Median salary ratio
75th percentile total remuneration ratio
75th percentile salary ratio
202x
-2x
X:1 (X being
the mid-
point of
highest paid
director/25th
percentile of
employee
remuneratio
n)
See left
derivation
but on
salary only
Y:1 (Y being
the mid-
point of
highest paid
director/50th
percentile of
employee
remuneratio
n)
See left
derivation
but on
salary only
Z:1 (Z being
the mid-
point of
highest paid
director/75th
percentile of
employee
remuneratio
n)
See left
derivation
but on
salary only
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
56
202x
-2x
X:1
(Prior year
comparative
is best
practice for
2021-22)
(Prior year
comparativ
e is best
practice
for 2021-
22)
Y:1
(Prior year
comparative
is
mandatory)
(Prior year
comparativ
e is best
practice
for 2021-
22)
Z:1
(Prior year
comparative
is best
practice for
2021-22)
(Prior year
comparativ
e is best
practice
for 2021-
22)
In 202x-2x, xx (202x-2x, xx) employees received remuneration in excess
of the highest-paid director / member. Remuneration ranged from £xx to
£xx (202x-2x £xx-£xx).
Total remuneration includes salary, non-consolidated performance-related
pay, benefits-in-kind, but not severance payments. It does not include
employer pension contributions and the cash equivalent transfer value of
pensions.”
3.115 It must then be followed by a concise and factual explanation of the changes on
either side of the ratio, taking into account where relevant:
• any adjustment to the number or composition of the general workforce (for example,
through restructuring, downsizing and outsourcing)
• any change to the remuneration of the most highly paid individual. Entities should
note that this may not necessarily be an increase to base pay, but a change in taxable
expenses or allowances. Where the allowance is temporary (for example, relocation
allowance), entities must note this and its likely impact on the pay multiple
• any change of the most highly paid individual (for example, a new appointment, or the
previously highest paid post having been vacated and/or eliminated)
• any impact of a pay freeze on the ratio (for example, senior pay freeze that does not
affect the majority of staff.)
• whether and if so why, the entity believes the median pay ratio for the relevant
financial year is consistent with the pay, reward and progression policies for the
entity's employees taken as a whole.
3.116 The above list is not exhaustive and should be treated only as general guidance.
It is not intended to act as a checklist of justification for higher ratios.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
57
3.117 Where there is a sharing arrangement, it is cost to the entity of an individual that
identifies them as “highest paid” and not the total of that individual’s remuneration.
Termination benefits must be excluded from the calculation of the highest-paid
director’s / member’s salary to avoid distorting the ratio.
3.118 Annex 4 of the FReM cites the Hutton Review of Fair Pay - Implementation
Guidance as additional guidance for this disclosure requirement. Preparers
should note that the presentation of the disclosure as described in the Hutton
Review guidance has now been superseded.
Staff report
3.119 The staff report must include the following information:
(a) Where applicable, the number of senior civil service staff (or senior managers)
by band.
(b) Staff numbers and costs – entities must provide an analysis of staff numbers
and costs, distinguishing between ‘permanently employed’ staff and ‘other’
staff, which must state that the figures are subject to audit (see paragraph
3.46). In this context:
• ‘Permanently employed’ refers to members of staff with a permanent (UK) employment
contract directly with the entity
• ‘Other’ refers to any staff engaged on the objectives of the entity that does not have a
permanent (UK) employment contract with the entity. This includes employees on
short term contracts of employment, agency/temporary staff, locally engaged staff
overseas, and inward secondments from other entities where the whole or majority of
the employees’ costs are met locally.
• In addition, DHSC only, is required to provide a further breakdown of benefits incurred
under two additional categories (ministers and special advisors).
(i) The figures must exclude non-executive directors/ lay Governing Body
Members but include executive board members/Governing Body Members
and staff recharged by other DHSC group bodies.
(ii) The analysis of staff costs must additionally report by the accounts
headings set out in paragraph 5.58.
(iii) The analysis of staff numbers must additionally report by the functional
categories of employees defined in NHS Digital’s NHS Occupation Code
Manual.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
58
(iv) The average number of employees is calculated as the whole time
equivalent number of employees under contract of service in each week in
the financial year, divided by the number of weeks in the financial year.
The “contracted hours” method of calculating whole time equivalent
number must be used, that is, dividing the contracted hours of each
employee by the standard working hours.
(v) To note: Staff on outward secondment must not be included in the
average number of employees.
(c) Staff composition – Entities must provide an analysis of the number of persons
of each sex who were directors, senior civil servants (or equivalent) and
employees of the entity.
(d) Sickness absence data - NHS bodies are required to report on staff sickness.
The information is also required on the summarisation schedules for
consolidation purposes and will be issued by DHSC after draft accounts
submission.
(e) Staff turnover percentage - applying the Cabinet Office (CO) guidance for
calculating turnover in the civil service on a comply or explain basis.
(i) A turnover percentage therefore should be provided, but the derivation of
the percentage per the CO guidance is on a comply or explain basis.
(ii) Information should be provided with sufficient explanation, context,
including trend data and or caveats where appropriate.
(iii) HM Treasury have confirmed that no new data collections need to be
developed in meeting this disclosure requirement.
(iv) Entities whose staff turnover is captured as part of NHS Digital's NHS
workforce statistics should refer and provide a link to, than duplicate, the
data disclosed in that series. Sufficient explanation to aide user
understanding of the data should be provided. This should include that
the series is an official statistics publication complying with the UK
Statistics Authority's Code of Practice.
(f) For those entities who contribute to it, staff engagement percentage scores
from the latest Civil Service People Survey. Entities that do not participate in
the Civil Service People Survey should provide similar indicators where
possible, ensuring sufficient explanation and context, including trend data is
provided where appropriate. The NHS Staff Survey would be an appropriate
equivalent survey for NHS bodies to refer to.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
59
(g) Staff policies applied during the financial year:
(i) for giving full and fair consideration to applications for employment made
by disabled persons, having regard to their particular aptitudes and
abilities
(ii) for continuing the employment of, and for arranging appropriate training
for, employees who have become disabled persons during the period
when they were employed
(iii) otherwise for the training, career development and promotion of disabled
employees.
(iv) As a best practice recommendation, but mandatory for NHS bodies,
entities should include details regarding their diversity and inclusion
policies, initiatives and longer term ambitions. Disclosure may include
cross referencing separate publications that contain such information, or
provision of information regarding:
• How policies and activities undertaken in the year have or will improve the
diversity and inclusiveness of the workforce.
• Whether the entity has identified any barriers to improving the diversity of its
workforce and if so, what actions the entity has or will put in place.
• Changes in staff composition impacting on the diversity and inclusiveness of
the workforce, including appropriate trend data.
• Performance against internal targets set in relation to diversity and
inclusiveness of the workforce if applicable.
(h) Trade Union Facility Time Reporting Requirements - Entities in scope of the
Trade Union (Facility Time Publication Requirements) Regulations 2017,
which took effect from 1 April 2017, are required to publish detail as prescribed
by the Statutory Instrument (SI) in their ARA.
(i) The regulations and subsequent disclosure apply to those entities listed in
schedule 1 part 2 and part 5 of the regulations that are an employer with at
least one trade union representative and has more than 49 full time
equivalents during any seven, of the twelve-month relevant period (1st
April to 31st March).
(ii) Disclosure would not be required if the period of the annual report for a
demising trust is less than seven months.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
60
(iii) Entities should note that legal titles, rather than operating titles are
employed in the schedule. For instance, the Health and Social Care
Information Centre is referenced rather than its trading name of NHS
Digital.
(iv) Whilst the majority of Group bodies are in scope, it is a deliberate act on
the part of the regulations to exclude advisory bodies, expert panels and
bodies with a predominantly commercial focus.
(v) Per the Cabinet Office guidance on facility time publication offered to
assist preparers in meeting the ARA and wider reporting requirements,
disclosure can be made in the form prescribed by the SI in the staff report,
or can be referenced in the staff report and then disclosed fully and in the
prescribed form, in an annex to the ARA.
(vi) Schedule 2 of the regulation and Annex A of the Cabinet Office guidance
provide the prescribed layout for the disclosure under this regulation. No
disclosures are required for prior periods
(i) Other employee matters – other diversity issues and equal treatment in
employment and occupation; employment issues including employee
consultation and/or participation; health and safety at work; trade union
relationships; and human capital management such as career management
and employability, pay policy etc.
(j) Expenditure on consultancy (see Chapter 5 Annex 2: Consultancy definition)
(k) Off-payroll engagements – Treasury requires public sector bodies to report
arrangements whereby individuals are paid through their own companies (and
so are responsible for their own tax and NI arrangements).
(i) Model templates along with further guidance on “Off-payroll” disclosures
can be found in Chapter 3 Annex 4 – “Off payroll” engagements.
(ii) The report must state whether there are, or are not, engagements to
report under this heading (i.e. a NIL return is required).
(l) Exit packages – The figures to be disclosed here relate to exit packages
agreed in the year. The actual date of departure might be in a subsequent
period, and the expense in relation to the departure costs may have been
accrued in a previous period. The data here is therefore presented on a
different basis to other staff cost and expenditure notes in the accounts. The
disclosure must state that the figures are subject to audit (see paragraph
3.46).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
61
(i) HM Treasury has issued specific guidance on severance payments (i.e.
covering any payments that are not made under either legal or contractual
obligation): this is now included in HM Treasury’s Managing Public Money.
Special severance payments when staff leave a public sector employer
should only rarely be considered. They will always require HM Treasury
approval because they are usually novel, contentious and potentially
repercussive: NHS bodies have no delegated authority to make such
payments unless so approved.
(ii) Model templates can be found in Chapter 3 Annex 3 – Exit packages and
severance payments.
Parliamentary accountability and audit report
3.120 The Parliamentary accountability and audit report is a requirement for those
entities that report directly to Parliament. It is therefore also required in the
consolidated DHSC annual report.
3.121 Entities that do not produce a Parliamentary accountability report must
nevertheless include an audit certificate and report.
3.122 DHSC group bodies that are not required to produce a Parliamentary
accountability report may include these disclosures within the annual report.
3.123 Where an entity elects not to do this, it must include the disclosures on remote
contingent liabilities, losses and special payments, gifts, and fees and charges as
notes within its financial statements.
3.124 There will be a need to collect data for the consolidated account via the
summarisation schedules to assist the completion of this report.
3.125 Therefore, regardless of applicability of this report, all DHSC group bodies must
ensure the summarisation schedule is completed.
3.126 The Parliamentary Report will contain disclosures on the following (as outlined in
the FReM Chapter 6), which must be stated as being subject to audit:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
62
*Guidance on the reporting requirements for contingent liabilities, including those too remote to require disclosure under IAS 37 but which must nevertheless be reported to Parliament, can be found in Managing Public Money and within the Contingent Liability Approval Framework published by HM Treasury. ** Refers to losses and special payments where the total amounts incurred are over the limits prescribed in Managing Public Money (£300k) In the case of reporting on special payments which are severance payments, the detail to be disclosed must include the number of special severance payments made, the total amount paid out, and the maximum (highest), minimum (lowest) and median values of payments made. (An entity must disclose where some of the required detail is excluded due to the reporting of special severance payments conflicting with a legal obligation arising as a result of the Data Protection Act 2018, or otherwise.) *** In line with the guidance in Managing Public Money Annex 4.12, DHSC group bodies must report on the total value of gifts made, if this exceeds £300k, and provide details of any individual gifts over £300k. DHSC group bodies are not expected to make gifts in the normal course of business, and must contact their national body or DHSC sponsor division in the first instance.
Requirement
Sector
DHSC DHSC ALBs NHS trusts CCGs
Statement of Parliamentary Supply Mandatory N/A N/A N/A
Name of public sector bodies outside boundary where department has lead policy responsibility
Mandatory N/A N/A N/A
Brief description of material remote contingent liabilities (under Parliamentary reporting requirements not IAS 37) and estimate of its financial effect*
Mandatory Mandatory Optional (para.3.122)
Optional (para3.122.)
An explanation of the regularity of expenditure
Mandatory Mandatory Optional Optional
A statement is required if cost allocation and charging requirements set by HMT have not been complied with
Public Sector Information Holders only
N/A N/A
A statement of losses and special payments over £300k**
Mandatory Mandatory Optional (para.3.122)
Optional (para 3.122)
Notation of gifts made over a value of £300k (per Managing Public Money annex 4.12 – note these require HMT approval)***
Mandatory Mandatory Optional (para 3.122)
Optional (para 3.122)
Analysis of material (>£1m) fees and charges income. This must include: 1) the financial objective(s) and performance against the objectives; 2) the full cost and unit costs charged in year; 3) the total income received in year; 4) the nature/extent of any subsidies or overcharging
Mandatory Mandatory Optional (para 3.122)
Optional (para 3.122)
Audit certificate and report**** Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
63
**** Where the relevant legislation requires the auditor to report on the examination of the financial statements, the auditor will provide such a report. The form and content of the report is the responsibility of the auditor. Where the auditor has no substantive comment to make, the report will generally be in the form of a single sentence appended to the audit opinion in the form: ‘I have no observations to make on these financial statements’. Where there is a substantive report, it will be referred to in the audit opinion, but will be quite separate from it.
3.127 Where an entity has included the above disclosures in its annual report, it must
omit the equivalent disclosure notes to the financial statements referred to in
Chapter 5.
Publication of the Annual Report and Accounts
Entities that do not lay accounts before Parliament
3.128 DHSC group bodies that are not required to lay their ARA before Parliament (NHS
trusts, CCGs, NHS charities, other DHSC bodies) must publish them locally.
3.129 NHS trusts may publish ARAs in advance of the consolidated Resource Account
being submitted by DHSC to Parliament.
3.130 CCGs should refer to Chapter 3 CCG Appendix 1: Additional Requirements for
CCGs for further guidance.
Separate performance report overview and supplementary material
3.131 For DHSC group bodies that do lay accounts before Parliament there is discretion
to publish a separate performance report overview and supplementary material,
rather than the full ARA.
3.132 These accounts must not be published before the ARA has been laid before
Parliament.
3.133 The Companies Act 2006 refers to publishing a strategic report with
supplementary material. The FReM has replaced the strategic report in the public
sector with the performance report.
3.134 For the DHSC group, the performance report overview section (as defined in this
chapter) is the equivalent to the strategic report for these purposes.
3.135 The performance review: performance overview and supplementary material must
contain the Annual Governance Statement and must be made available to the
public free of charge.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
64
3.136 A reasonable copying charge may be levied only for copies of the full audited
accounts, where the decision has been made to publish the strategic report and
supplementary material.
3.137 The supplementary material must, as a minimum in accordance with section 426A
of the Companies Act 2006:
• contain a statement that the performance report: performance overview is only part of
the entity’s ARA
• state how a person can obtain a copy of the full ARA
• state whether the auditor’s report on the full ARA was unqualified or qualified and, if
qualified, set out the auditor’s report in full together with any further material needed to
understand the qualification
• state whether, in that auditor’s report, the auditor’s statement as to whether the
performance report: performance overview and directors’ report was consistent with
the accounts and was unqualified or qualified. If it was qualified, set out the qualified
statement in full together with any further material needed to understand the
qualification, and
• contain a copy of that part of the directors’ remuneration report which sets out the
single total figure table in respect of the entity directors’ remuneration.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
65
Chapter 3 Annex 1 - Annual Report and
Accounts Outline Structure
3.138 In summary, the structure for the Annual Report and Accounts, as defined by the
FReM is as follows:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
66
Chapter 3 Annex 2 - Salary and Pension
disclosure tables: information subject to
audit
3.139 This annex provides a standard layout for the disclosure of salary and pensions
paid to staff, which will be subject to audit.
3.140 The guidance that follows specifies minimum requirements for disclosure. In all
instances entities should consider how additional narrative and presentation can
assist users understanding of the disclosure.
3.141 Where considered appropriate entities should reference the statutory regulations
and guidance that govern the disclosures being made, providing links where
specific regulations are referenced.
Salaries and allowances
Table 1: Single total figure table
Name and title
(a) Salary (bands of £5,000) £000
(b) Expense payments (taxable) to nearest £100* £
(c) Performance pay and bonuses (bands of £5,000) £000
(d) Long term performance pay and bonuses (bands of £5,000) £000
(e) All pension-related benefits (bands of £2,500) £000
(f) TOTAL (a to e) (bands of £5,000) £000
*Note: Taxable expenses and benefits in kind are expressed to the nearest £100. The values and bands used to disclose sums in this table are prescribed by the Cabinet Office through Employer Pension Notices and replicated in the HM Treasury Financial Reporting Manual.
3.142 Provide comparative information for the prior year.
3.143 Disclose, for each individual, payments or compensation for loss of office, and
cross-reference this to other disclosures and notes in the accounts (for example,
exit packages and non-compulsory departures).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
67
3.144 Where more than one individual occupied the same post over the year, details
must be disclosed here.
Table 2: Pension Benefits
Name and title
(a) Real increase in pension at pension age (bands of £2,500) £000
(b) Real increase in pension lump sum at pension age (bands of £2,500) £000
(c) Total accrued pension at pension age at 31 March 20xx (bands of £5,000) £000
(d) Lump sum at pension age related to accrued pension at 31 March 20xx (bands of £5,000) £000
(e) Cash Equivalent Transfer Value at 1 April 20xx £000
(f) Real increase in Cash Equivalent Transfer Value £000
(g) Cash Equivalent Transfer Value at 31 March 20xx £000
(h) Employer’s contribution to stakeholder pension £000
3.145 As non-executive directors do not receive pensionable remuneration, there will be
no entries in respect of pensions for non-executive directors.
Cash Equivalent Transfer Values
3.146 A Cash Equivalent Transfer Value (CETV) is the actuarially assessed capital value
of the pension scheme benefits accrued by a member at a particular point in time.
3.147 The benefits valued are the member’s accrued benefits and any contingent
spouse’s (or other allowable beneficiary’s) pension payable from the scheme.
CETVs are calculated in accordance with SI 2008 No.1050 Occupational Pension
Schemes (Transfer Values) Regulations 2008.
Real Increase in CETV
3.148 This reflects the increase in CETV that is funded by the employer.
3.149 It does not include the increase in accrued pension due to inflation or contributions
paid by the employee (including the value of any benefits transferred from another
pension scheme or arrangement).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
68
Content of tables: salaries and allowances
3.150 The requirements of Part 3 of Schedule 8 of the Large and Medium-sized
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013
(the 2013 Regulations) are set out below. In the table in paragraph 5 of the
schedule, column:
(a) is salary and fees (in bands of £5,000)
(b) is all taxable benefits (total to the nearest £100)
(c) is annual performance-related bonuses (in bands of £5,000)
(d) is long-term performance-related bonuses (in bands of £5,000)
(e) is all pension–related benefits (in bands of £2,500)
• (additional columns must also be included for any other items in the nature of
remuneration - but excluding payments to former senior managers (see below))
(f) the final column is total of the above items (in bands of £5,000).
3.151 Each of the above requirements is disclosed for each individual in scope of this
reporting requirement and are described in further detail below.
(a) the total amount of salary and fees paid to or receivable by the person in
respect of qualifying services (in bandings of £5,000).
(i) Salary and other remuneration covers both pensionable and non-
pensionable amounts. The amounts paid or payable by the entity in
respect of the period the senior manager held office must be shown.
(ii) Where, for example, an individual held a contract of employment for the
entire financial year but was only a senior manager for six months, it is the
remuneration for six months which must be shown.
(iii) Where there has been overlap in a post, for example where there have
been two finance directors for a month, or where a temporary director has
covered another on long term absence, both must be shown, together with
the date the post was started or vacated.
(iv) Where the senior manager has been employed under separate contracts
for different services for the same entity, it may be useful to note this
below the table.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
69
(v) Qualifying services of a senior manager include duties for the entity that
are not part of their management role.
(vi) Where a senior manager’s remuneration includes elements for their
management role and another role, for example clinical roles of medical
directors and similar staff, the remuneration report must reflect the total
remuneration paid by the entity for the individual’s services to the entity,
including remuneration for duties that are not part of their management
role.
(vii) For transparency, entities must disclose the element of the individual’s
total remuneration from the entity that relates to their non-managerial role.
This disclosure need not include details of the individual components
(columns) of the single total figure table if the split between elements is not
available in this detail.
(viii) Where the individual receives part of their remuneration from another
body, for example a GP providing services as a director at a CCG, the
entity must make disclosures only in respect of its share of the individual’s
remuneration. This is separate and distinct to staff sharing considerations.
(ix) Note the requirement detailed in paragraph 3.78, relating to staff sharing
arrangements in which the total salary for the senior manager across all
the organisations they are engaged by, must be a separate and distinct
disclosure to the salary and fees paid in respect of qualifying services for
the entity.
(x) Paragraph 48 of Schedule 8 of the 2013 Regulations confirms that where
necessary distinctions are required to ensure compliance with the
reporting requirements, apportionments of payments can be made as is
appropriate.
(xi) Salary includes:
• all amounts paid or payable by the entity including recharges from any other entity
• overtime
• the gross cost of any arrangement whereby a senior manager receives a net amount
and an entity pays income tax on their behalf
• any financial loss allowances paid in place of remuneration
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
70
• geographical allowances such as London weighting, or other recruitment and retention
allowances, and
• any other allowance which is subject to UK taxation and any severance or ex-gratia
payments.
(xii) Salary Excludes
• recharges to any other entity
• reimbursement of out-of-pocket expenses
• reimbursement of "travelling and other allowances" (paid under determination order)
including home to work travel costs
• taxable benefits
• employers' superannuation and National Insurance contributions
• performance related bonuses (these are recorded separately), and
• any amount paid which the director must subsequently repay.
(b) all taxable benefits (to the nearest £100 and disclosed in £s).
(i) This is the gross value of such benefits before tax. It includes:
• expenses allowances that are subject to UK income tax and paid or payable to the
person in respect of qualifying services, and
• benefits received by the person (other than salary) that are emoluments of the person
and are received by them in respect of qualifying services.
(ii) A narrative disclosure to detail the nature of these benefits. Entities may
consider it informative to disclose the footnote to table 1.
(c) annual performance pay and bonuses (in bandings of £5,000)
(i) These comprise money or other assets received or receivable for the
financial year as a result of achieving performance measures and targets
relating to a period ending in the relevant financial year other than:
• those which result from awards made in a previous financial year and the final vesting
is determined as a result of achieving performance measures or targets relating to a
period ending in the relevant financial year, and
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
71
• those which are receivable subject to the achievement of performance measures or
targets in a future financial year.
(ii) Where an amount included in column (c) is for a deferred bonus, the
amount and percentage of such deferral must be disclosed in a note
accompanying the table.
(d) long-term performance pay and bonuses (in bandings of £5,000).
(i) These comprise money or other assets received or receivable for periods
of more than one year where final vesting:
• is determined as a result of achieving performance measures or targets relating to a
period ending in the relevant financial year, and
• is not subject to the achievement of performance measures or targets in a future
financial year.
(ii) For both columns (c) and (d), where the performance measures or targets
are substantially (but not fully) completed by the end of the financial year,
the amount shown in the table may include sums which relate to the
following financial year but this must be explained in the report. In the
following year’s report, the amount must not be included as remuneration
for that year.
(iii) For every component of remuneration included in columns (c) or (d), a
note accompanying the table must disclose:
• details of any performance measures and the relative weighting of each;
• for each performance measure:
• the performance targets set at the beginning of the performance period and the
corresponding value of bonus achievable, and
• details of actual performance against the targets set and measured over the
performance period and the resulting bonus awarded.
• where discretion has been exercised in the award, details of how the discretion was
exercised and how the resulting bonus was determined.
(iv) Compiling the above detail for all remuneration regarding performance pay
and bonuses will assist entities in determining whether the sums should be
disclosed in column (c) or column (d).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
72
(e) all pension-related benefits (in bandings of £2,500), including:
• the cash value of payments (whether in cash or otherwise) in lieu of retirement
benefits, and
• all benefits in year from participating in pension schemes. These are the aggregate
input amounts, calculated using the method set out in section 229 of the Finance Act
2004.
• Paragraph 10(1)(e)(ii)(cc) of schedule 8 of SI 2013 No.1981, The Large and Medium-
sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013
(update to the Finance Act 2004) requires the exclusion of any employee contributions
from the figure arrived at to reach the amount which must be disclosed.
(i) This figure will include those benefits accruing to senior management from
membership of the NHS Pension Scheme which is a defined benefit
scheme (although accounted for by NHS bodies as if it were a defined
contribution scheme). It is to be disclosed in £2,500 bands following the
calculation expressed as follows:
*The real increase is the difference between the annual rate of pension or value of any lump
sums payable to the director at the end of the financial year and the rate or values payable at
the start of the year. It excludes increases due to inflation/decreases due to transfer of
pensions rights.
(ii) The information will be provided by the pension scheme the director is a
member of, as part of the Greenbury disclosure requirements.
(iii) Employee contributions for the year are deducted in the calculation above.
(iv) Annex D of the NHS Business Services Authority guidance on the
Disclosure of Senior Managers Remuneration (Greenbury) 2020 provides
further detail regarding the context and calculation to be made by entities,
as well as a worked example to assist preparers.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
73
(v) Specific consideration should be given to the provision of additional
narrative to explain how the figure in column (e) is calculated, what the
figure signifies and offering high level explanation as to significant
variations between senior managers in year or between years for the
same individual, if this is considered to be informative.
(vi) As such the following is recommended to be disclosed;
"The value of pension benefits accrued during the year is calculated as the real
increase in pension multiplied by 20, less, the contributions made by the individual.
The real increase excludes increases due to inflation or any increase or decrease
due to a transfer of pension rights.
This value does not represent an amount that will be received by the individual. It
is a calculation that is intended to convey to the reader of the accounts an
estimation of the benefit that being a member of the pension scheme could
provide.
The pension benefit table provides further information on the pension benefits
accruing to the individual."
(vii) Further to the above, entities considering it informative to expand upon the
reasons as to why significant variation is found between pension related
benefits calculated, may wish to insert a paragraph similar to the following
but including only pertinent factors for their entity;
"Factors determining the variation in the values recorded between individuals
include but is not limited to:
A change in role with a resulting change in pay and impact on pension benefits
A change in the pension scheme itself
Changes in the contribution rates
Changes in the wider remuneration package of an individual"
(f) the total of the values disclosed in columns (a) to (e) (in bandings of £5,000).
(i) This is expressed in bandings of £5,000 to be consistent with the salary
and performance pay bandings.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
74
Complex Arrangements
(i) In line with paragraph 3.140, Part 1 of Schedule 8 of the 2013 regulations,
paragraph 2 (2) confirms that the provisions of the Schedule;
• do not prevent entities setting out additional information as is considered appropriate
and,
• allow any items to be shown in greater detail.
(ii) Specific consideration of these points should be made where complex
arrangements exist.
Content of tables: pensions
3.152 Total pension entitlement. For each senior manager, Companies Act regulations
require disclosure of:
• the pension entitlement at the end of the year: this requirement is met by the
completion of the “pensions” table, the contents of which are described below
• a description of additional benefits that will become receivable by the individual in the
event that they retire early, and
• separate disclosures where the individual is a member of more than one scheme.
3.153 Pension entitlements: The information required in FReM 6.5.9 must be disclosed
as follows:
(a) the real increase during the reporting year in the pension at pension age in
bands of £2,500
(b) the real increase during the reporting year in the pension related lump sum at
pension age in bands of £2,500
(c) the value at the end of the reporting year of the pension at pension age in
bands of £5,000
(d) the value at the end of the reporting year of the pension related lump sum at
pension age in bands of £5,000
(e) the value of the cash equivalent transfer value at the beginning of the reporting
period to the nearest £1,000
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
75
(f) the real increase in the cash equivalent transfer value at the end of the
reporting period to the nearest £1,000, and
(g) the value of the cash equivalent transfer value at the end of the reporting
period to the nearest £1,000
(h) in the case of a stakeholder pension account, the employer’s contribution (the
bulleted disclosures will not apply).
Payments for loss of office
3.154 For each individual who was a senior manager in the current or in a previous
financial year, that has received a payment for loss of office during the financial
year, the following must be disclosed:
• the total amount payable to the individual, broken down into each component
• an explanation of how each component was calculated
• any other payments to the individual in connection with the termination of services as a
senior manager, including outstanding long-term bonuses that vest on or following
termination, and
• where any discretion was exercised in respect of the payment, an explanation of how it
was exercised.
Payments to past senior managers
3.155 The report must contain details of any payments of money or other assets to any
individual who was not a senior manager during the financial year but has
previously been a senior manager at any time.
3.156 The following payments do not need to be reported in this disclosure:
• payments for loss of office (which are separately reported above)
• payments that are otherwise shown in the single total figure table
• payments that have already been disclosed by the entity in a previous remuneration
report
• payments for regular pension benefits that commenced in a previous year, and
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
76
• payments for employment or services provided by the individual other than as a senior
manager of the entity.
NHS Business Services Authority (NHS BSA) Greenbury Guidance
3.157 The revised NHS BSA guidance concerning Disclosure of Senior Managers
Remuneration (Greenbury) 2020 offers significant detail and worked examples
assisting entities with the derivation of the values for each column.
3.158 The guidance makes specific reference to examples of deriving the appropriate
values for senior managers only in post part year.
Discussion with auditors regarding remuneration reporting
3.159 Entities should note paragraph 49, Schedule 8 of the 2013 Regulations which
requires information to be disclosed only so far as it is contained in the entity's
books and papers, available to members of the public, or the entity has a right to
obtain it.
3.160 It is advisable that entities establish these expectations with auditors early in the
engagement. This is particularly necessary where changes and or additions are
being considered in relation to disclosures subject to audit.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
77
Chapter 3 Annex 3 – Exit packages and
severance payments
Introduction
3.161 This annex provides two model tables designed to meet HM Treasury reporting
requirements for exit packages and non-compulsory departures.
3.162 These additional disclosures are required to strengthen accountability in the light
of public and Parliamentary concern about the incidence and cost of these
payments. Both tables are shown at the end of the Annex.
3.163 Tables 1 and 2 must be consistent with related disclosures in (a) the
Remuneration Report and (b) the Losses and Special Payments Note.
3.164 Where entries here relate to individuals listed in the Remuneration Report, there
must be a separate disclosure in the Remuneration Report listing details of the
individuals’ severance payments (whether compulsory or voluntary).
3.165 Similarly, the Losses Statements must be consistent with those listed here under
“special non-contractual payments”. In line with the consistency requirements
stated above, comparative information should be included.
Exit packages
3.166 This note (table 1) discloses details of all exit packages, analysed between
compulsory redundancies and other, or non-compulsory, departures. The values
of these exit packages are analysed by cost band.
Non-compulsory departures
3.167 This note (table 2) discloses the number of non-compulsory departures which
attracted an exit package in the year, and the values of the associated payment(s)
by individual type.
3.168 The note is prepared on the same basis as table 1 i.e. showing the exit packages
agreed in the year, irrespective of the actual date of accrual or payment.
3.169 The total value in this note must agree with the Total Resource Cost for Other
Departures Agreed in table 1.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
78
3.170 However, there are likely to be differences in the component numbers as table 1
relates to the number of individuals receiving an exit package while this note gives
the number for each component.
3.171 As a single exit package is likely to be made up of several components each of
which will be counted separately, the total number is likely to be higher than the
number of individuals.
3.172 Contractual payments relating to individual contractual entitlements are to be
disclosed in the following categories:
• voluntary redundancies including early retirement costs (the cost to be used must
include any top-up to compensation provided by the employer to buy out the actuarial
reduction on an individual’s pension)
• mutually agreed resignations (MARS)
• early retirements in the efficiency of the service and payments in lieu of notice
(contractual)
3.173 Exit payments made following an Employment Tribunal or court order are also
included. Any such payments are considered contractual as the orders have to be
paid by the party against whom the order is made, although may relate to
compensation for loss of office.
3.174 Non-contractual payments are those made outside contractual or legal obligation,
including those from judicial mediation.
3.175 Pre-authorisation from the HM Treasury (or the relevant national body for cases
below de minimis limits) must be sought for such payments before they are agreed
with the employee.
3.176 In the footnote the amounts of any non-contractual payments in lieu of notice are
to be listed.
3.177 A further footnote discloses the number and value of non-contractual payments
made to individuals where the payment was more than 12 months annual salary.
3.178 The reference salary for this disclosure is the annualised salary at the date of
termination of employment, and excludes bonus payments and employer’s
pension contributions.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
79
3.179 The entity must also disclose the maximum (highest), minimum (lowest) and
median values of special severance payments, i.e. amounts included in the ‘non-
contractual payments’ line of the table.
3.180 It follows that for any values included here, working papers will document the
relevant approval for the payment.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
80
Table 1: Exit packages
Redundancy and other departure costs have been paid in accordance with the provisions of the [NHS Scheme name]. Exit costs in this note are the full costs
of departures agreed in the year. Where the [organisation] has agreed early retirements, the additional costs are met by the [organisation] and not by the NHS
Pensions Scheme. Ill-health retirement costs are met by the NHS Pensions Scheme and are not included in the table.
[Note: entities must provide additional text if any payments are not covered by the [NHS Pensions scheme], for example ex-gratia payments agreed with the
Treasury / exit scheme details where using another scheme (e.g. MARS).]
This disclosure reports the number and value of exit packages agreed in the year. Note: the expense associated with these departures may have been
recognised in part or in full in a previous period.
Exit package cost band (including any special payment element)
Number of compulsory redundancies
Cost of compulsory redundancies
Number of other departures agreed
Cost of other departures agreed
Total number of exit packages
Total cost of exit packages
Number of departures where special payments have been made
Cost of special payment element included in exit packages
WHOLE NUMBERS ONLY £s
WHOLE NUMBERS ONLY £s
WHOLE NUMBERS ONLY £s
WHOLE NUMBERS ONLY £s
Less than £10,000
£10,000 - £25,000
£25,001 - £50,000
£50,001 - £100,000
£100,001 - £150,000
£150,001 - £200,000
>£200,000
Totals Agrees to A below
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
81
Table 2: Analysis of Other Departures
Type of Other Departures Agreements Number
Total Value of Agreements £000s
Voluntary redundancies including early retirement contractual costs
Mutually agreed resignations (MARS) contractual costs
Early retirements in the efficiency of the service contractual costs
Contractual payments in lieu of notice*
Exit payments following Employment Tribunals or court orders
Non-contractual payments requiring HMT approval**
Total Agrees to total in table 1
As a single exit package can be made up of several components each of which will be counted separately in this Note, the total number above will not necessarily match the total numbers in Note xx which will be the number of individuals. * any non-contractual payments in lieu of notice are disclosed under “non-contractual payments requiring HMT approval” below. **includes any non-contractual severance payment made following judicial mediation, and X (list amounts) relating to non-contractual payments in lieu of notice. X (number) non-contractual payments (£x,000) were made to individuals where the payment value was more than 12 months’ of their annual salary. The Remuneration Report includes disclosure of exit payments payable to individuals named in that Report
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
82
Chapter 3 Annex 4 – “Off-payroll”
engagements
Introduction
3.181 A HM Treasury requirement for public sector bodies to report arrangements
whereby individuals are paid through their own companies (and so are responsible
for their own tax and NI arrangements, not being classed as employees) has been
promulgated in Public Expenditure System (PES) guidance.
3.182 HM Treasury’s guidance on this is summarised below.
Reformed off-payroll Working Rules
3.183 The Government has reformed the Intermediaries legislation, introducing Chapter
10 Part 2 Income Taxes (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (ITEPA 2003)
supporting Chapter 8 Part 2 ITEPA 2003, often known as IR35.
3.184 The legislation for the off-payroll working rules within the public sector applies to
payments made on or after 6 April 2017.
3.185 Under the reformed off-payroll working rules, Departments must determine
whether the rules apply when engaging a worker through a Personal Service
Company (PSC).
3.186 Guidance and more information can be found here: Off-payroll working rules
(IR35) for public authorities - GOV.UK.
3.187 The cross-government Tax Centre of Excellence (TCoE) has similarly offered
guidance on common themes and offer links to additional Cabinet Office and
HMRC guidance. This guidance is accessible to all on the TCoE website.
3.188 DHSC group bodies will already be operating the new rules to provide employment
status determinations for all of their off-payroll engagements.
3.189 Bodies will have also established a periodic re-assessment mechanism from 6
October 2017, in line with the revised reporting requirements of Table 2, covered
below.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
83
Inclusion in Annual Reports
3.190 DHSC group bodies must include the disclosures set out below within the staff
report section of their ARA (or within the financial statements if they wish, but if so,
clearly signposted from the staff report).
3.191 There is no requirement to have the disclosure audited (although inclusion in the
financial statements will bring the disclosure into the scope of audit), and DHSC
will not require information for consolidation purposes from NHS trusts, NHS
foundation trusts and CCGs.
3.192 DHSC will, however, disclose comparable figures in respect of its own core and
agency business, and consolidated figures from DHSC ALBs, together with a note
that individual DHSC group bodies are required to make disclosures in the
remuneration report section of their ARA.
3.193 DHSC group bodies should be aware that this information is provided in the public
interest and may be expected to be requested under the Freedom of Information
Act 2000.
Guidance
3.194 Following the Review of the tax arrangements of public sector appointees
published by the Chief Secretary to the Treasury on 23 May 2012, departments
and their arm’s length bodies (this is taken to include all those bodies included
within the DHSC reporting boundary) must publish information on their highly paid
and/or senior off-payroll engagements.
3.195 Payments to GP practices for the services of employees and GPs are deemed to
be “off-payroll” engagements, and are therefore subject to these disclosure
requirements.
3.196 HM Treasury guidance confirms that the reported data should include (where paid
£245 or more per day per day) those appointments to which the off-payroll
legislation applies whereby the department and their ALBs are required to
undertake IR35 assessments under Chapter 10 ITEPA 2003.
3.197 This applies as defined to: "a worker (or contractor), not employed by the client
department, the supplier or any other organisation within the supply chain, that
instead provides their services through their own limited company or another type
of intermediary to the client. An intermediary will usually be the worker’s own
personal service company but could also be a partnership or an individual.”
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
84
3.198 Reported data should also include those appointments that are not on the entities
payroll and where the off-payroll legislation does not apply. For example, the
legislation does not apply to sole traders or workers that are employed by and on
the payroll of an umbrella company, agency or other organisation in the supply
chain.
3.199 Off-payroll appointments should be included regardless of the commercial route
through which they are engaged. The disclosures are not limited to workers
engaged via the Public Sector Resourcing Framework and should include
procurements of resource / workers through other frameworks such as, but not
limited to, Digital Outcomes and Specialists, G-cloud, Non-Medical Non-Clinical
and all other commercial routes aside.
3.200 Those not to be included in the reported data include workers that are controlled
and directed by external suppliers in the course of providing the department with a
contracted-out service, workers who are seconded to the department and on the
payroll of the supplying organisation and consultants that are providing
consultancy services to the department that do not go beyond provision of advice.
3.201 As part of the remuneration report section of their ARA DHSC group bodies must
present the data described below in the following sections.
Length of all highly paid off payroll engagements
3.202 For all highly paid off-payroll engagements as of 31 March 2022, greater than
£245 per day:
• the total number of existing engagements as of 31 March 2022
• the number that have existed for less than one year at time of reporting
• the number that have existed for between one and two years at time of reporting
• the number that have existed for between two and three years at time of reporting
• the number that have existed for between three and four years at time of reporting
• the number that have existed for four or more years at time of reporting,
3.203 Disclosure must be in the format shown in Table 1: Length of all highly paid off-
payroll engagements below.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
85
Off-payroll workers engaged at any point during the financial year
3.204 For all off-payroll appointments engaged at any point between 1 April 2021 and 31
March 2022, greater than £245 per day:
• the number of off-payroll workers engaged between April 2021 and March 2022
• the number not subject to off-payroll legislation
• the number subject to off-payroll legislation and determined as in-scope of IR35
• the number subject to off-payroll legislation and determined as out-of-scope of IR35
• the number of engagements reassessed for compliance or assurance purposes during
the year
• of which the number of engagements that saw a change to IR35 status following
review.
3.205 Disclosure must be in the format shown in Table 2: Off-payroll workers engaged at
any point during the financial year below.
3.206 Off-payroll worker tax liabilities and or HMRC penalties imposed as a result of non-
compliance with off-payroll worker legislation must be disclosed as a loss per the
requirements outlined in the table below paragraph 3.126. References to such
losses must also be disclosed beneath the table 2.
Board Member/Senior Management engagements
3.207 For any off-payroll engagements of board/Governing Body members and/or senior
officials with significant financial responsibility between 1 April 2021 and 31 March
2022 reporting entities must also disclose:
• the number of off-payroll engagements of board/Governing body members and/or
senior officials with significant financial responsibility
• details of the exceptional circumstances that led to each of these engagements
• details of the length of time each of these exceptional engagements lasted
• the total number of individuals both on and off-payroll that have been deemed “board
members and/or senior officials with significant financial responsibility” during the
financial year. This total figure must include engagements which are ON PAYROLL as
well as those off-payroll.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
86
3.208 Disclosure must be in the format shown in Table 3: Off-payroll board
member/senior official engagements below.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
87
Table 1: Length of all highly paid off-payroll engagements
For all off-payroll engagements as of 31 March 2022, for more than £245(1) per
day :
Number
Number of existing engagements as of 31 March 2022
Of which, the number that have existed:
for less than one year at the time of reporting
for between one and two years at the time of reporting
for between 2 and 3 years at the time of reporting
for between 3 and 4 years at the time of reporting
for 4 or more years at the time of reporting
Note (1) The £245 threshold is set to approximate the minimum point of the pay scale for a Senior Civil Servant.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
88
Table 2: Off-payroll workers engaged at any point during the financial year
For all off-payroll engagements between 1 April 2021 and 31 March 2022, for
more than £245(1) per day
Number
No. of temporary off-payroll workers engaged between 1 April 2021 and 31 March 2022
Of which...
No. not subject to off-payroll legislation(2)
No. subject to off-payroll legislation and determined as in-scope of IR35(2)
No. subject to off-payroll legislation and determined as out of scope of IR35(2)
No. of engagements where the status was disputed under provisions in the off-payroll legislation
Of which: no. of engagements that saw a change to IR35 status following review
Note (1) The £245 threshold is set to approximate the minimum point of the pay scale for a Senior Civil Servant. (2) A worker that provides their services through their own limited company or another type of intermediary to the client will be subject to off-payroll legislation and the Department must undertake an assessment to determine whether that worker is in-scope of Intermediaries legislation (IR35) or out-of-scope for tax purposes.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
89
Table 3: Off-payroll board member/senior official engagements
For any off-payroll engagements of board members, and/or, senior officials with
significant financial responsibility, between 1 April 2021 and 31 March 2022
Number of off-payroll engagements of board members, and/or senior officers with significant financial responsibility, during the financial year (1)
Total no. of individuals on payroll and off-payroll that have been deemed “board members, and/or, senior officials with significant financial responsibility”, during the financial year. This figure must include both on payroll and off-payroll engagements (2)
Note (1) There should only be a very small number of off-payroll engagements of board members and/or senior officials with significant financial responsibility, permitted only in exceptional circumstances and for no more than six months (2) As both on payroll and off-payroll engagements are included in the total figure, no entries here should be blank or zero In any cases where individuals are included within the first row of this table the department should set out: • Details of the exceptional circumstances that led to each of these engagements. • Details of the length of time each of these exceptional engagements lasted.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
90
Chapter 3 CCG Appendix 1: Additional
Requirements for CCGs
3.209 In addition to the requirements set out in Chapter 3, CCGs are required to publish
their full ARA in accordance with arrangements notified via the NHSE and
NHSI/CCG SharePoint. They may additionally produce and distribute a separate
Performance Report: Overview with Supplementary Material, produced in
accordance with this manual.
3.210 For CCGs the gender distribution must be analysed as follows:
• members of the governing body
• all other senior managers, including all managers at grade VSM, not included above,
and
• all other employees not included in either of the previous two categories.
Business information
3.211 CCGs must ensure they include sufficient information on the delivery of their
statutory duties to comply with the requirements of Section 14Z15 Paragraph 2 of
the National Health Service Act 2006 (as amended) and the CCG Assurance
Framework.
Details of Members of the Membership Body and Governing
Body
3.212 The Report must provide:
• the member practices, forming the Membership Body, of the CCG
• the names of the Chair and Accountable Officer throughout the financial year and up
to the signing of the ARA
• the composition of the Governing Body throughout the financial year and up to the
signing of the ARA (including advisory and lay members)
• the names of the individuals forming the Audit Committee throughout the financial year
and up to the signing of the ARA, and
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
91
• reference to the Remuneration Report for details of the membership of the
Remuneration Committee, and the Governance Statement for details of and
membership of all other Governing Body and Membership Body Committees.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
92
Chapter 3 CCG Appendix 2 – Pension
Disclosures
Introduction
3.213 For CCGs the correct classification of GPs on the Governing Body will drive the
salary and pension disclosures required in the Remuneration Report.
3.214 Within the NHS Pensions Scheme there are two types of member:
• Practitioner, and
• Officer.
3.215 Practitioner covers medical, dental and some ophthalmic practitioners, who meet
specific criteria.
3.216 In summary there are three types of medical Practitioner in NHS pension terms:
• a type 1 medical Practitioner is a GP Provider (GP partner, single–hander) who has
entered into a GMS, PMS, or APMS contract
• a type 2 medical Practitioner is generally a salaried GP employed by a (GMS, PMS, or
APMS) surgery, and
• a Locum Practitioner is a freelance GP locum who deputises or assists on a temporary
basis in a surgery.
3.217 All of the above must be on the medical performers list and registered with the
General Medical Council.
3.218 Their NHS Pensions Scheme Employing Authority is NHSE and NHSI even for
salaried GPs employed by a surgery.
3.219 Individuals not meeting the criteria to be classed as a Practitioner in NHS Pension
terms are classed as an Officer.
3.220 Tables 1 and 2 which follow describe how the benefits received by the different
governing body members must be disclosed.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
93
Prior Year Comparatives
3.221 Where prior year disclosures do not comply with this guidance they must be
restated, to allow meaningful comparison year on year. Narrative to explain the
reason for restatement must be agreed with local auditors.
Table 1: Governing Body Member is a Medical Practitioner
Type of Contract
Contract of Service with individual
Contract for Service with individual
Contract with GP Practice/Surgery
Contract with Corporate Body
Employment Status
Employee Off Payroll Worker
Payment Route Payroll Accounts Payable*
Accounts Payable
Eligible for NHS Pension
Yes No
NHS Pension Status
Officer Practitioner n/a
NHS Pension Employing Authority
CCG NHSE and NHSI n/a
Responsibility for Pension Contributions
CCG
Legal requirement on the CCG to deduct at source, as agent for NHSE and NHSI
GP n/a
Payment Method
As part of routine employee contributions to NHS Pensions
SOLO Form submitted to NHSE and NHSI (PCS) together with pension payment due
n/a
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
94
Salary Disclosures
Full disclosure as per GAM
Gross payment to the individual disclosed in the salary column (including employer pension contributions, where relevant). All other columns £NIL. Note required below the salary table to explain the off-payroll payment arrangement, as per GAM requirement.
Off Payroll Worker Disclosures
n/a Include as per GAM guidance. Confirmation of regularity of tax arrangements and tax payments required, as per GAM guidance.
Pension Disclosures
Full disclosure as per GAM. Request information from NHS Pensions in line with Greenbury process.
Off payroll worker – no pension disclosure required. Exclude from the pensions table. Include a note under the pension table to explain why some individuals included in the salary table are not included in the pension table.
* Please note that HMRC typically deem services provided directly to fulfil the role of
Governing Body Member as being those of an “office holder”. For payments relating to
these services, the “office holder” should typically be treated as an employee, with
deduction at source through the payroll for taxation and national insurance payments.
CCGs should liaise with their local HMRC contact in case of query.
On occasions HMRC may deem long term contract for service holders as ‘office holders’ of
the organisation, and require the organisation to deduct income tax and national insurance
at source. This designation does not change their employment status with the CCG (as an
off-payroll worker rather than an employee of the CCG) but is merely a route for HMRC to
collect tax and national insurance ‘in-year’ rather than 10 months after the year end.
In this situation the deduction of tax and national insurance would be processed via ESR,
and the resulting deduction paid over in the normal way. An Officer Pension record must
NOT be created in ESR and Officer Pension must NOT be deducted via payroll.
Practitioner Pension must continue to be deducted ‘off-system’ and paid over using the
SOLO Form. The individual remains an off-payroll worker.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
95
Table 2: Governing Body Member is not a Medical Practitioner
Type of Contract Contract of Service with individual
Contract for Service with individual
Contract with Corporate Body
Employment Status Employee Off Payroll Worker
Payment Route Payroll Accounts Payable* Accounts Payable
Eligible for NHS Pension
Yes No
NHS Pension Status Officer n/a
NHS Pension Employing Authority
CCG n/a
Responsibility for Pension Contributions
CCG n/a
Payment Method
As part of routine employee contributions to NHS Pensions
n/a
Salary Disclosures Full disclosure as per GAM
Gross payment to the individual disclosed in the salary column. All other values £NIL. Note required below the salary table to explain the off-payroll payment arrangement, as per GAM requirement.
Off Payroll Worker Disclosures
n/a
Include as per GAM guidance. Confirmation of regularity of tax arrangements and tax payments required, as per GAM guidance.
Pension Disclosures
Full disclosure as per GAM. Request information from NHS Pensions in line with Greenbury process.
Off payroll worker – no pension disclosure required. Exclude from the pensions table. Include a note under the pension table to explain why some individuals included in the salary table are not included in the pension table.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
96
* Please note that HMRC typically deem services provided directly to fulfil the role of
Governing Body Member as being those of an “office holder”. For payments relating to
these services, the “office holder” should typically be treated as an employee, with
deduction at source through the payroll for taxation and national insurance payments.
CCGs should liaise with their local HMRC contact in case of query.
On occasions HMRC may deem long term contract for service holders as ‘office holders’ of
the organisation, and require the organisation to deduct income tax and national insurance
at source. This designation does not change their employment status with the CCG (as an
off-payroll worker rather than an employee of the CCG) but is merely a route for HMRC to
collect tax and national insurance ‘in-year’ rather than 10 months after the year end.
In this situation the deduction of tax and national insurance would be processed via ESR,
and the resulting deduction paid over in the normal way. A pension record must therefore
NOT be created and pension must NOT be deducted. The individual remains an off-
payroll worker.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
97
4. Accounting principles and policies
Applicability of IFRS
4.1 As set out from paragraph 2.10, DHSC group bodies are required to prepare
accounts in accordance with IFRS, as adopted in HM Treasury’s Financial
Reporting Manual (FReM).
Adaptations and interpretations
4.2 Where appropriate, the FReM adapts and interprets IFRS for the public sector
context.
4.3 This may be necessary where IFRS Standards address issues that are less
relevant to public sector bodies, or where they do not adequately take account of
public sector considerations.
4.4 Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the DHSC group provides
a full list of applicable standards, together with any adaptations and
interpretations.
Accounting standards not yet adopted
4.5 IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors requires
entities to disclose details where they have not applied a new IFRS Standard that
has been issued but is not yet effective.
4.6 Chapter 4 Annex 2: IFRS Standards and amendments issued but not yet adopted
in the FReM provides a list of such standards.
4.7 DHSC group bodies must not adopt a new accounting standard before its effective
date unless indicated otherwise in this manual.
Departures from the FReM
4.8 In addition to the adaptations and interpretations to IFRS set out in the FReM, HM
Treasury has permitted DHSC group bodies to depart from the FReM in a small
number of areas.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
98
4.9 Details of these departures, and the entities to which they apply, are set out in
Chapter 4 Annex 3: Departures from the FReM.
Accounting Concepts
4.10 The financial reporting framework establishes various fundamental concepts on
which a set of accounts should be based. The following paragraphs provide more
information on the principal concepts.
4.11 The Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting sets out the principles that the
IASB believes should underlie the preparation and presentation of financial
statements for users.
4.12 The preparers of ARAs should familiarise themselves with these principles,
particularly as the framework updated and approved by the IASB in March 2018
introduces, re-introduces and revises various concepts preparers need to
consider.
True and fair view
4.13 The financial statements must give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the
reporting body at the end of the financial year and of the results of the year.
4.14 Section 393 of the Companies Act 2006 requires that directors must not approve
accounts unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view.
4.15 In applying section 393, any reference to ‘company’ should be read to mean
‘DHSC group body’ and for CCGs ‘director’ to mean ‘Governing Body Member’.
4.16 References to ‘present fairly’ and ‘fair presentation’ in IAS 1, Presentation of
Financial Statement should be taken to have the same meaning as ‘true and fair’
in the Companies Act 2006.
Accounting convention
4.17 The financial statements are prepared under the historical cost convention
modified by the revaluation of non-current assets and, where material, current
asset investments and inventories, and certain financial assets and liabilities, to
fair value as determined by the relevant accounting standards, and subject to the
interpretations and adaptations of those standards made in the FReM.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
99
Going concern
4.18 The FReM notes that in applying paragraphs 25 to 26 of IAS 1, preparers of
financial statements should be aware of the following interpretations of Going
Concern for the public sector context.
4.19 For non-trading entities in the public sector, the anticipated continuation of the
provision of a service in the future, as evidenced by inclusion of financial provision
for that service in published documents, is normally sufficient evidence of going
concern.
4.20 A trading entity needs to consider whether it is appropriate to continue to prepare
its financial statements on a going concern basis where it is being, or is likely to
be, wound up.
4.21 Sponsored entities whose statements of financial position show total net liabilities
must prepare their financial statements on the going concern basis unless, after
discussion with their sponsor division or relevant national body, the going concern
basis is deemed inappropriate.
4.22 Where an entity ceases to exist, it must consider whether or not its services will
continue to be provided (using the same assets, by another public sector entity) in
determining whether to use the concept of going concern in its final set of financial
statements.
4.23 While an entity will disclose its demise in various areas of its Annual Report and
Accounts such as in the Performance Report, this event does not prevent the
accounts being prepared on a going concern basis or give rise to a material
uncertainty in relation to the going concern of the entity.
4.24 DHSC group bodies must therefore prepare their accounts on a going concern
basis unless informed by the relevant national body or DHSC sponsor of the
intention for dissolution without transfer of services or function to another entity.
4.25 Where a DHSC group body is aware of material uncertainties in respect of events
or conditions that may bring into question the going concern ability of the entity,
these uncertainties must be disclosed.
4.26 As the continued provision of service approach, per paragraph 4.22, applies to
DHSC group bodies, material uncertainties requiring disclosure, will only arise in
very exceptional circumstances.
4.27 Should a DHSC group body have concerns about its “going concern” status (and
this will only be the case if there is a prospect of services ceasing altogether), or
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
100
whether a material uncertainty is required to be disclosed (which will only arise in
exceptional circumstances), it must raise the issue with its sponsor division or
relevant national body as soon as possible.
4.28 Consideration of risks to the financial sustainability of the organisation is a
separate matter to the application of the going concern concept. Determining the
financial sustainability of the organisation requires an assessment of its anticipated
resources in the medium term. Any identified significant risk to financial
sustainability is likely to form part of the risks disclosures included in the wider
performance report, but is a separate matter from the going concern assessment.
Gross and Net accounting
4.29 The overarching principle is that transactions must be accounted for in accordance
with accounting standards, with all treatments having been agreed by both parties.
4.30 Generally, this means revenue income and expenditure must be recorded gross
unless one party is acting solely as an agent.
4.31 "Gross accounting" refers to the separate recording of inflows and outflows in an
entity's accounts, recognising the impact on the entity's income and expenditure.
4.32 "Net accounting" refers to the netting off of inflows and outflows in an agency
relationship, so that the entity only recognises impacts to the extent that it is acting
as a principal.
4.33 An organisation is acting as an agent if its performance obligation is to arrange for
the provision of a specified good or service by another party. It does not control
that good or service before it is transferred to the customer.
4.34 For example, in the case of staff secondments, if the parent organisation is
primarily responsible for the work the secondee carries out for the host
organisation, including providing a substitute in the event of sickness, then the
parent is acting as a principal. Both parties must therefore use gross accounting.
4.35 On the other hand, if the host organisation is primarily responsible for the
secondee’s work, and provides its own substitute in the event of sickness, then the
parent does not control the services of the secondee and is acting as an agent.
Both organisations must therefore use net accounting.
4.36 To avoid mismatches during the agreement of transactions and balances process,
it is important that each arrangement is assessed individually against the relevant
accounting standards and that the treatment is agreed between parties.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
101
4.37 In particular, if net accounting is used by a commissioning or intermediary
organisation, the ultimate purchaser and supplier will need to be told against
whom to record the transactions to ensure these will net out on consolidation.
Further specific guidance on agreement of balances is published for the Q2, Q3
and Q4 (year-end) agreement exercises.
Users of the annual report and accounts
4.38 The information presented in the financial statements must be adequate for the
needs of the key users of the financial statements.
4.39 Users include, but are not limited to:
• an NHS foundation trust’s council of governors
• members of an NHS foundation trust
• patients and their carers
• Parliament, including relevant Select Committees
• NHSE and NHSI and other regulatory bodies
• the Department of Health and Social Care
• HM Treasury
• boards of directors and audit committees
• local authorities
• health and well-being boards
• Sustainability and Transformation Partnerships (STPs)
• commissioners, and
• the taxpayer.
Accounting policies and materiality
4.40 DHSC group bodies must adopt accounting policies which provide the most
relevant and reliable information on completion of the annual accounts, taking note
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
102
of Chapter 5 Annex 1: Example accounting policies and related versions provided
by the relevant national bodies.
4.41 Policies must be consistent with any group-wide accounting policies specified in
this manual.
4.42 IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors notes
that accounting requirements in IFRS Standards need not be applied to immaterial
items, but also notes in paragraph 8 that “it is inappropriate to make, or leave
uncorrected, immaterial departures from IFRS to achieve a particular presentation
of an entity’s financial position, financial performance or cash flows”.
4.43 Similarly, IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements notes that specific
disclosure requirements of IFRS need not be satisfied if the information is not
material. Both IAS 1 and IAS 8 define materiality as follows:
"Information is material if omitting, misstating or obscuring it could
reasonably be expected to influence decisions that the primary users of
general purpose financial statements make on the basis of those financial
statements, which provide financial information about a specific reporting
entity."
4.44 Entities should refer to IFRS Practice Statement 2: Making Materiality
Judgements, issued in September 2017, for further guidance on materiality.
4.45 In the absence of a specific IFRS Standard or Interpretation, paragraphs 10 to 12
of IAS 8 describe the approach that management should take to formulating an
accounting policy, including the hierarchy of guidance to which it should refer.
4.46 Entities must consult national bodies or the relevant DHSC sponsor about any
novel or contentious accounting policies they might propose to adopt to reflect
their specific circumstances.
4.47 Where entities consider it necessary to adjust retrospectively for changes in
accounting policies or material errors, they must first consult national bodies or the
relevant DHSC sponsor to ensure that the budgeting implications have been
properly considered.
Errors in the financial statements
4.48 All material errors identified in a previous year’s financial statements must be
corrected through a prior period adjustment except to the extent that, it is
impracticable to determine either the period-specific effects or the cumulative
effect of the error.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
103
4.49 Further information regarding prior period adjustments can be found in paragraph
4.57.
Changes in accounting policy
4.50 An entity may change an accounting policy only where it is required by a new
IFRS Standard or Interpretation (including any revisions to this manual) or
voluntarily only if it results in the financial statements providing reliable and more
relevant information about transactions, events, conditions, or the entity’s financial
position, financial performance or cash flows.
4.51 Changes in accounting policy arising from the introduction of a new IFRS Standard
or Interpretation must be implemented in accordance with the specific transitional
provisions, if any, of that Standard or Interpretation.
4.52 Where no such specific transitional provisions exist, or where an accounting policy
is changed voluntarily, the change must be applied retrospectively, i.e. through a
prior period adjustment.
4.53 IAS 8 requires that prior period adjustments must be effected by restating each
element of equity (reserves) at the start of the prior year as if the accounting policy
had always applied.
4.54 Any difference between the reported financial results and the adjusted financial
results must be reported, as described in the Standard. The restatement must be
replicated in the relevant sections of the summarisation schedules.
4.55 Where an entity has to make a prior period adjustment (for any reason other than
an adjustment required by the GAM), they must inform the relevant sector finance
lead so that the appropriate information can be collected for consolidation.
4.56 Further information on prior period adjustments can be found below.
Prior period adjustments (PPAs)
4.57 In preparing the DHSC group accounts, the DHSC must make a distinction
between:
• those PPAs which will require restatement of the consolidated accounts including, but
not limited to, changes in accounting policy, machinery of government changes, errors
material to the consolidated accounts, and
• PPAs requiring local restatement under IAS 8, which may include, but are not limited
to, errors material to the entity (but not consolidated) accounts.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
104
4.58 In the case of PPAs other than errors, the FReM and this manual will usually
prescribe the appropriate handling arrangements, and DHSC will issue detailed
guidance on any restatement of consolidated accounts and the collection of
restated data via summarisation schedules where appropriate, even if immaterial
at a local body level.
4.59 In the case of PPAs that are material locally, but not nationally, the consolidated
accounts will not be restated.
4.60 The effect of PPAs in local accounts will therefore be recorded ‘in year’ in the
consolidated accounts, with a corresponding adjustment between the local
accounts and the data consolidated for that entity.
4.61 Where an entity considers that a prior year error is not material and does not
require restatement, it must adjust for the cumulative effect of the error in the
current year, reflecting any impact for income and expenditure as appropriate.
4.62 It may not take income and expenditure adjustments directly to retained earnings.
Impact for bodies other than NHS providers
4.63 Where PPAs appear in local statutory accounts but are not material to the
consolidated accounts, these PPAs will not be reflected in the brought-forward
balances in the summarisation schedules.
4.64 Entities will therefore need to enter opening balance adjustments where relevant in
the summarisation schedules to resolve any differences compared with their own
restated accounts.
4.65 Subsequent entries for the current financial year should therefore match the local
accounts.
4.66 To enable DHSC to identify the nature and impact of local PPAs and ensure these
are reflected appropriately in the current year in the consolidated accounts, the
summarisation schedules require entities to provide additional analysis of any
opening balance adjustments.
Impact for NHS providers only
4.67 NHS trusts and foundation trusts must ensure that the summarisation schedules
submitted to NHSE and NHSI are always consistent with their accounts.
4.68 NHS providers must therefore apply IAS 8 to both their accounts and
summarisation schedules but must explain any PPAs in the PPA tab of the
schedule.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
105
4.69 This enables NHSE and NHSI to recategorise the PPA upon consolidation and
reporting to DHSC.
Accounting for Income and Expenditure
4.70 The main relevant standards for income are 'IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts
with Customers' and IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of
Government Assistance.
4.71 Entities that receive Parliamentary Funding (special health authorities and DHSC
agencies) or receive Grant-in Aid (DHSC NDPBs) must separate these funding
streams from general income as it is possible to receive cash from DHSC in either
or both categories. This also applies to funding from NHSE and NHSI received by
CCGs.
4.72 The FReM (11.1.1) details those items that must be dealt with through the General
Fund and not as income. A rule of thumb is that entities will recognise income
where it delivers a specific service or provides goods to customers, using usual
order and invoicing systems.
4.73 IFRS 15 requires entities to recognise revenue from contracts with customers
when they satisfy a performance obligation by transferring a promised good or
service.
4.74 Performance obligations can be satisfied over time or at a point in time. For a
performance obligation satisfied over time, the corresponding revenue is also
recognised over time. Otherwise, the revenue may only be recognised at the point
the performance obligation is satisfied in full.
4.75 IFRS 15 paragraph 35 states that a performance obligation is satisfied over time if:
• the customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits provided by the
entity’s performance as the entity performs
• the entity’s performance creates or enhances an asset that the customer controls as it
is created or enhanced, or
• the entity’s performance does not create an asset for which it has an alternative use
and the entity has an enforceable right to payment for performance to date.
4.76 IFRS 15 paragraphs B2 to B8 assist with identifying what is entailed by each of the
criteria listed above.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
106
4.77 Of note should be the guidance provided where an entity may find it difficult to
identify whether an obligation satisfies the first criteria (IFRS 15, B4). In such
instances it should be determined that an obligation is satisfied over time if an
entity would not need to substantially re-perform the work completed to date, to
fulfil the remaining obligation to the customer.
4.78 If a performance obligation is not satisfied over time, then it is satisfied at a point in
time.
4.79 A performance obligation relating to delivery of a spell of healthcare is likely to be
satisfied over time as healthcare is received and consumed simultaneously by the
customer as the entity performs it. Even if identification is not readily available as
per B4 of the Standard, healthcare would be consistent with the consideration
made in paragraph 4.76 above.
4.80 Healthcare generally aligns with paragraph 22 (b) of the Standard entailing a
delivery of a series of distinct goods or services that are substantially the same
and have a similar pattern of transfer.
4.81 When accounting for revenue from contracts with customers, DHSC group bodies
must apply the following interpretations to IFRS 15:
• Upon transition, the option to restate using IAS 8 has been withdrawn. Entities must
recognise the difference between the previous carrying amount and the carrying
amount at the beginning of the annual reporting period that includes the date of initial
application in the opening general fund / income and expenditure reserve within
taxpayers’ equity (or other component of equity, as appropriate). In using this transition
approach, it is identified that;
• The election to apply this Standard retrospectively only to contracts not completed at
the date of initial application must be exercised.
• The practical expedient available for contract modifications must be exercised
(paragraph C7A of the Standard, removes the need to retrospectively restate any
contract modifications that either occurred before the beginning of the earliest period
presented, or for all modifications occurring before the date of initial application)
4.82 Additionally, IFRS 15 is adapted as follows:
• The definition of a contract is expanded to include legislation and regulations which
enables an entity to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity that is
not classified as a tax by ONS. The costs of preparing the legislation or regulations do
not amount to assets under IFRS 15 (91-94).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
107
• Where, by statute or approval from HM Treasury, an entity is permitted to retain the
revenue from taxation, fines and penalties, this revenue shall be accounted for under
IFRS 15 paragraph 15a,
However, where entities receive revenue through taxation, fines and penalties which is
wholly non-refundable and leads to no obligations, entities are not required to wait until
all, or substantially all, of the promised revenue has been received to recognise the
revenue. In these instances, entities should recognise revenue when an equivalent to
a taxable event has occurred, the revenue can be measured reliably, and it is probable
that the assisted economic benefits from the taxable event will flow to the collecting
entity. All these elements are required to be satisfied.
4.83 The above adaptations will require entities to carefully consider the existence of
legislation or regulation in governing the satisfaction of performance obligations of
its customers.
4.84 To assist in application of IFRS 15 a number of in scope revenue streams are
discussed below. This list is not exhaustive of the revenue streams in existence
across the DHSC group.
4.85 The below provides application guidance in adopting IFRS 15 in full, with the
adaptations and interpretations presented above.
4.86 Entities are required to consider all revenue streams in line with IFRS 15 as
appropriate.
4.87 Further IFRS 15 application guidance has been published by HM Treasury.
Injury costs recovery (ICR) revenue
4.88 ICR revenue must be accrued only when form NHS2 has been received and it has
been confirmed from the NHS provider’s records that injury treatment has been
given. If there are discrepancies that need investigating, income must not be
accrued.
4.89 The expansion of the definition of a contract mentioned in paragraph 4.48 ensures
that ICR revenue must be recognised in line with IFRS 15.
4.90 The above process of revenue recognition is viewed to be compliant with the
Standard as the ‘contract’ can only be identified as per paragraph 9 (a) to (e) of
the Standard, when the NHS2 form is received by the provider. Prior to this there
is no ability to identify payment terms (Paragraph 9(c)) or that consideration will be
received relating to ICR (Paragraph 9(e)).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
108
4.91 The form completion and confirmation of no discrepancies arising constitutes the
performance obligation for this revenue stream.
4.92 It is IFRS 15 compliant to recognise the revenue on satisfaction of this obligation
and to not accrue where discrepancies have arisen.
4.93 The obligation is satisfied at a point in time, in virtue of ICR not satisfying one of
the three ‘over time’ criteria identified in paragraph 35 of the Standard. As per
paragraph 38 of the Standard, when an obligation is satisfied at a point in time the
satisfaction occurs when control is transferred.
4.94 Control includes obtaining benefit from an asset which can include potential cash
flows. As such revenue should be recognised when inflow of cash flows can be
expected which is when there are no discrepancies arising from the NHS2 form.
4.95 Each year, the Compensation Recovery Unit (CRU) advises a percentage
probability of not receiving the income, which should be included within the
provision for impairment of receivables. For 2020-21 this figure was 22.43%. This
figure will be updated for 2021-22 later in the year in an amendment to the GAM.
4.96 This aligns to the IFRS 9 simplified approach to impairments, in which a loss
allowance equal to the lifetime expected credit losses, must be recognised for
contract assets (accrued income) that do not contain a significant financing
component. See Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments for more detail.
4.97 Where NHS providers are in a position to make a reliable estimate of their own
provision percentage they should use their own local information to inform the
provision, ensuring any loss allowance reflects the IFRS 9 simplified approach
referenced above.
Partially completed treatments spells and maternity pathway
transactions
4.98 Where partially completed treatment spells arise, the NHS provider and its
commissioning counterparty must consider the terms of the contract that they have
entered into to determine how revenue should be recognised in accordance with
IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
4.99 Revenue related to those spells of treatment that are partially completed at the
financial year end must be allocated across the financial years, applying the
principles relating to performance obligations referenced in paragraph 4.73.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
109
4.100 It is for the NHS provider and commissioner to establish and agree a suitable
basis of measurement towards satisfaction of the performance obligation, and
where material, disclose this in the accounting policy note.
4.101 Guidance issued by NHSE and NHSI, and DHSC addresses the issue of
accounting for maternity pathway commissioning in the light of a potential non-
symmetrical treatment by commissioners and NHS providers. The guidance
revised in light of IFRS 15 is available in Chapter 4 Annex 10: Accounting for
Maternity Pathways.
Maternity Incentive Scheme (MIS)
4.102 The MIS supports the delivery of safer maternity care through the inclusion of an
incentive element to contributions to the Clinical Negligence Schemes for Trusts
(CNST).
4.103 Where a trust has successfully demonstrated compliance against the 10 safety
actions, it will recover its element of CNST contribution that went in to the
maternity incentive fund, plus a share of any unallocated funds.
4.104 Trusts unable to evidence sufficient compliance with the 10 actions may be able to
recover a lesser sum from the fund.
4.105 As NHS Resolution (NHSR) is not deemed a customer in this arrangement, the
monies received from the scheme are considered out of scope of IFRS 15 per
paragraph 6 of the Standard.
4.106 Trusts should offset the receipt of monies under the MIS against its CNST
contributions. This is consistent with the rules for offsetting in IAS 1 paragraph 33.
4.107 In accordance with the principles of the Conceptual Framework, trusts will only be
expected to recognise any award from the incentive fund when it can be measured
reliably. This is to be interpreted as when NHSR has confirmed the award amount
payable to the trust. This interpretation includes instances in which appeals are
being considered.
Investment revenue
4.108 IAS 17, Leases and IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures, paragraph 20(b)
require the disclosure of interest and other income arising from investments.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
110
Profits and losses on disposal of non-current assets
4.109 As set out in IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements paragraph 98(c) and (d),
where non-current assets are disposed of, but the activities which they supported
are continuing, then any profit or loss on disposal must be recognised in income or
expenses as appropriate.
4.110 Where the asset has been disposed of as part of the disposal or discontinuance of
an activity, then any profit or loss on disposal must be shown on the face of the
SoCNE within the amount for “Surplus/(deficit) of discontinued operations and the
gain/(loss) on disposal of discontinued operations”. See paragraphs 5.124 to 5.126
for the definition of continuing/discontinued operations and paragraphs 4.162 to
4.176 for further guidance on asset valuation and revaluation of surplus assets.
Other gains and losses
4.111 IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures paragraph 20 requires the disclosure of
income and expenditure arising from financial instruments. Further guidance on
financial instruments is provided in Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments.
Government grants (IAS 20) and donations
4.112 DHSC group bodies must apply IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and
Disclosure of Government Assistance to the treatment of government and other
grants, with the following interpretations.
4.113 The option in IAS 20 to offset a grant for acquisitions of an asset against the cost
of the asset has been withdrawn.
4.114 The option in IAS 20 to defer grant income relating to an asset is restricted to
income where the funder imposes a condition.
4.115 Where assets are financed by government grant, the funding element is
recognised as income through the Statement of Comprehensive Net Expenditure
(SoCNE) / Statement of Comprehensive Income (SoCI).
4.116 To defer this income, a condition imposed by the funder must be a requirement
that the future economic benefits embodied in the grant are consumed as
specified by the grantor or must be returned to them.
4.117 A grant for an asset may be received subject to a condition that it is to be returned
to the grantor if a specified future event does or does not occur. For example, a
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
111
grant may need to be returned if the entity ceases to use the asset purchased with
that grant for a purpose specified by the grantor.
4.118 In such cases, a return obligation does not arise until such time as it is expected
that the condition will be breached and a liability is not recognised until that time.
Such a condition would not therefore require the grant to be treated as deferred
income.
4.119 Grant-in-aid is provided to match the recipient’s cash needs and is to be
accounted for on a cash basis. Any exceptions to this treatment must be agreed
by DHSC and HM Treasury.
4.120 Note that Parliamentary supply and grant-in-aid are forms of financing and do not
fall within the meaning of government grants.
4.121 DHSC group bodies must account for donations by applying the same principles
as for government grants above.
4.122 Where an NHS provider consolidates NHS charitable funds, donations received
from those funds will be eliminated on consolidation in the local group accounts.
4.123 Where a group body is a member of the EU Greenhouse Gas Emission Allowance
Trading scheme and it has been issued allowances at less than fair value or
current value in existing use then the difference between the amount paid and the
fair value or current value in existing use represents a government grant that is
subject to a condition, as per the interpretation of IAS 20. The income element
must be deferred and released to income as the liability to emit greenhouse gases
is recognised in expenses.
4.124 Credits arising from receipt of grants and donations are taken to the SoCNE /
SoCI.
Donation of centrally procured items for COVID-19 pandemic response
4.125 A number of items have been centrally procured by DHSC and other national
bodies and provided to trusts free of charge. Such items include personal
protective equipment, ventilators and other medical equipment.
4.126 Items received by trusts should be considered a transfer of resources akin to a
'government grant relating to income' in IAS 20 and follow established accounting
for donated assets.
4.127 Therefore, a non-cash gain is recognised equivalent to the value of the items
received for no consideration. Items such as ventilators and other medical
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
112
equipment should be capitalised consistent with this policies of this Manual and
where such equipment is below capitalisation thresholds, an amount equivalent to
the non-cash gain is taken to expenses. For personal protective equipment the
treatment by trusts should be consistent with the approach to accounting for
consumables i.e. held as inventory or charged to expenses where not material.
4.128 Normally, where grants are provided by DHSC to a group body, as the entity's
controlling party, group bodies should regard those grants as financing, The
FReM allows for the Department and its relevant authority HM Treasury to
approve alternative treatment. The treatment as described in paragraph 4.127 has
the approval of HM Treasury.
4.129 NHSE and NHSI have issued further detailed guidance for accounts to describe
the practical operationalisation of the approach and provide accounting information
as to how appropriate valuations and market prices have been derived and their
impact for impairment purposes at year end.
4.130 In relation to donations of items and equipment in relation to the pandemic
response, such arrangements should not be classified as a gift per Annex 4.12 of
Managing Public Money.
4.131 Transactions which do not score as gifts includes grants in kind that are part of a
planned programme of HMG support for an organisation. The central procurement
and onward distribution of items as part of the pandemic response are clearly part
of planned programme of HMG support.
4.132 Moreover, the government receives value in the furtherance of its policy objective
in its the pandemic response and the purchase and distribution of items for the
pandemic response, is funded through the Estimate and thus per A4.12.2 of
Managing Public Money such donations do not constitute a gift.
Retirement benefits
4.133 Retirement benefits must be accounted for in accordance with IAS 19, Employee
Benefits. As set out in Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the
DHSC group, IAS 19 is interpreted to require the NHS Pensions Scheme, the
Principal Civil Service Pension Scheme and the Civil Servant and Other Pension
Scheme (known as ‘alpha’) to be accounted for as defined contribution schemes.
4.134 DHSC group bodies paying in to these schemes must therefore recognise an
expense equal to their employer contribution to the scheme during the year.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
113
4.135 Where DHSC group bodies are members of other defined benefit schemes, they
will need to assess whether these schemes should be accounted for as defined
benefit schemes or as defined contribution schemes.
4.136 Where defined benefit schemes have a minimum funding requirement, this may
affect the amount of any net asset which the DHSC group body can recognise
when the scheme is in surplus.
4.137 IFRIC 14, IAS 19 – The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding
Requirements and their Interaction provides guidance on any adjustments
required to the asset in these circumstances.
Termination benefits
4.138 Termination benefits include, for example, redundancy costs, termination gratuities
and pension enhancements on termination.
4.139 Termination benefits are only those benefits where the event giving rise to the
benefit is the termination of the employment by
• the employer, or
• an employee deciding to accept the employer’s offer of benefits in exchange for
termination.
4.140 Benefits that are conditional on future service by an employee are not termination
benefits.
4.141 Termination benefits are recognised at the earlier of:
• when the entity can no longer withdraw the offer of those benefits, and
• when the entity recognises costs for a restructuring that is within the scope of IAS 37
and involves the payment of termination benefits.
Apprenticeship Levy
4.142 The Apprenticeship Levy is a levy introduced by the UK Government on 6 April
2017, requiring all employers operating in the UK, with a pay bill over £3 million
each year, to invest in apprenticeships. Affected employers are required to pay a
levy of 0.5% of their pay bill, less an allowance of £15,000.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
114
4.143 Employers will then be able to access funding for apprenticeships through an
account on the digital apprenticeship service. These funds will be used to make
payments directly to approved training providers.
4.144 The Government has published guidance for employers on how the
Apprenticeship Levy works.
4.145 Apprenticeships are a devolved policy, and different arrangements apply in each
part of the UK. Employers in England will not be able to access funding in respect
of their employees that live outside England.
4.146 The Department for Education is the lead department for the Apprenticeship Levy,
and has developed accounting guidance to be followed by all central government
bodies in England. This guidance is adopted in this manual, and DHSC group
bodies must follow the requirements set out below.
4.147 There are two aspects to the treatment of the levy in local accounts:
• Recognition of the initial levy payment
• Recognition of the receipt of the associated training grant.
Recognising the levy payments
4.148 There is no accounting standard that directly applies to the levy charge. As such,
accounting for the levy defaults to IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements and
the overarching IASB Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting.
4.149 Bodies subject to payment of the levy will see an outflow of assets when cash is
paid over under the terms of the levy. The levy can therefore be treated as an
expense under the definition set out in the Conceptual Framework.
4.150 The nature of the expense has been confirmed to be a tax, surrenderable to the
Consolidated Fund, and as such the levy must be recognised as an additional
social security cost within the financial statements.
4.151 HM Treasury has determined that the use of virtual accounts to hold the levy paid
over for 24 months does not support the need to recognise a prepayment in the
financial statements.
4.152 As the levy has tax status there should be no recognition of such prepayments for
expected future utilisation of the training aspect. The expenditure must be
recognised in the period in which it arose.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
115
4.153 Any portion of the levy not yet paid over at the period end must be recognised as a
social security liability in line with other social security expenditure not yet paid
over to the relevant tax authority.
Benefits arising from apprentice training
4.154 It is expected that apprenticeship funding arising from the scheme will be passed
directly to training providers. Consequently, there will be different accounting
treatments dependent upon whether the employer is a training provider.
4.155 If the employer is not a training provider, but benefits from the scheme via an
employee receiving levy funded training, it remains necessary to recognise the
value of the levy-funded training received. The portion of the employees’ training
funded by this scheme must therefore be recognised as a non-cash expense in
the period in which the training occurs.
4.156 To ensure that performance is neutral, an additional non-cash income amount
equal to the costs paid directly to the training provider must also be recognised.
This income must be accounted for in accordance with IAS 20, Accounting for
Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance.
4.157 If the employer is itself an accredited training provider, then it will receive cash
payment for its training activities. Again, this income is accounted for in
accordance with IAS 20. Expenditure incurred in delivering training is accounted
for in the usual way.
Climate Change Levy (CCL)
4.158 The levy is the successor scheme to the Carbon Reduction Commitment (CRC)
Energy Efficiency Scheme allowances.
4.159 There is no accounting standard that directly applies to the levy charge. As such,
accounting for the levy defaults to IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements and
the overarching IASB Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting.
4.160 Bodies subject to payment of the levy will see an outflow of assets when cash is
paid over under the terms of the levy. The levy can therefore be treated as an
expense under the definition set out in the Conceptual Framework.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
116
Accounting for Assets and Liabilities
Property, plant and equipment (PPE)
4.161 The main relevant standards are IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment, IFRS 5,
Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations and IFRS 13, Fair
Value.
Valuation
4.162 DHSC group bodies are required to follow the revaluation model. In this guidance,
Chapter 4 Annex 4 - Valuation Issues discusses revaluation issues in the DHSC
group context.
4.163 IFRS 13, Fair Value, is adopted in full in the public sector; however, IAS 16 and
IAS 38 have been adapted and interpreted for the public sector context to limit the
circumstances in which a valuation is prepared under IFRS 13 (see Chapter 4
Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the DHSC group).
4.164 Assets which are held for their service potential and are in use (i.e. operational
assets used to deliver either front line services or back office functions) must be
measured at their current value in existing use.
4.165 For non-specialised assets, current value in existing use must be interpreted as
market value in existing use which is defined in the Royal Institution of Chartered
Surveyors (RICS) Red Book as Existing Use Value (EUV).
4.166 Where non-property assets are short-lived, or are of low value (or both) it is
acceptable for such assets to be carried at depreciated historical cost as a proxy
for current value in existing use. Where this is the case, this fact must be
disclosed, including the classes of assets where it has been used (where
appropriate), the reasons why, and information about any significant estimation
techniques (where applicable).
4.167 For depreciated historical cost to be considered as a proxy for current value in
existing use, the useful life must be a realistic reflection of the life of the asset and
the depreciation method used must provide a realistic reflection of the
consumption of that asset class
4.168 For specialised assets, current value in existing use must be interpreted as the
present value of the asset’s remaining service potential, which can be assumed to
be at least equal to the cost of replacing that service potential. The methodology
used will be depreciated replacement cost on a modern equivalent asset basis.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
117
4.169 Assets which were most recently held for their service potential but are surplus
must be valued at current value in existing use if there are restrictions on the entity
or the asset which would prevent access to the market at the reporting date.
4.170 If the entity can access the market, then the surplus asset must be valued at fair
value using IFRS 13.
4.171 In determining whether such an asset which is not in use is surplus, management
must assess whether there is a clear plan to bring the asset back into future use
as an operational asset.
4.172 Where there is a clear plan, the asset is not surplus and the current value in
existing use must be maintained. Otherwise, the asset must be assessed as
being surplus and valued under IFRS 13.
4.173 Assets which are not held for their service potential must be valued in accordance
with IFRS 5 or IAS 40 depending on whether the asset is actively held for sale.
4.174 Where an asset is not being used to deliver services and there is no plan to bring it
back into use, with no restrictions on sale, and it does not meet the IAS 40 and
IFRS 5 criteria, these assets are surplus and must be valued at fair value using
IFRS 13.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
118
4.175 In summary:
Asset Treatment
Asset held for its service potential: in use
Current value in existing use For non-specialised assets this means Existing Use Value (EUV) For specialised assets this usually means depreciated replacement cost on a modern equivalent asset basis
Asset most recently held for its service potential: surplus but restrictions on its sale
Current value in existing use
Asset most recently held for its service potential: surplus and no restrictions on its sale
Fair value - Highest and best use (IFRS 13)
Assets not held for their service potential: Investment property
Fair value - highest and best use (IAS 40 and IFRS 13)
Assets not held for their service potential: Held for Sale
Lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell (IFRS 5) Carrying amount in this instance must be treated as the amount at which it was most recently held in use.
Assets not held for their service potential: Surplus
Fair value - highest and best use (IFRS 13)
4.176 Reclassification of an asset between the above categories must reflect a clear
decision to change the basis on which the asset is held – for instance a decision to
actively market an asset for sale in accordance with the criteria set out in IFRS 5,
or to take an asset out of use and treat it as surplus.
4.177 It is not necessary to reflect theoretical intermediate stages, for instance to
consider an asset to become surplus between being in use and being sold if there
is no appreciable time gap. There is therefore no requirement to revalue an asset
immediately prior to sale or immediately prior to reclassification to Non-Current
Assets Held for Sale.
4.178 DHSC group bodies must ensure consistency across disclosure notes when
reclassifying assets, with the carrying amount of the asset transferring from PPE to
Assets Held for Sale being reflected in both disclosures.
4.179 Where common reclassifications occur within the PPE note (for example, from
assets under construction to operational buildings) the total of reclassifications
across all asset types must be zero.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
119
4.180 Where the entity wishes to sell an asset, which does not meet the IFRS 5 criteria
for an asset held for sale, the sale must be recorded against the PPE note.
4.181 If disposing directly from the PPE note, the carrying amount of the asset on
disposal will be the amount at which it was most recently held whilst in use, and
sale proceeds differing from this amount will be recognised as a profit/loss on
disposal.
Transfers
4.182 Specific guidance on accounting for asset transfers that form part of “machinery of
government” transfers or “transfers of functions” can be found from paragraph
4.370.
4.183 Where non-current assets are transferred outside a transfer of functions or
machinery of government change, the transfer value must be at fair value in line
with IFRS 3 (any revaluation to be carried out in the transferor’s accounts).
4.184 For such transfers, DHSC permits transacting DHSC group bodies to sell and
purchase assets provided that: (a) the parties record mirror sale/purchase
transactions; and (b), the transaction does not involve the issue or repayment of
DHSC funding (i.e. for NHS trusts and NHS foundation trusts, PDC is not issued or
repaid in connection with the transaction).
Legal charges on properties
4.185 Charges on properties will result in the property being included in the PPE note if
the conditions of IFRIC 12 (as adapted by the FReM) or IFRIC 4 apply.
Revaluations and impairment
4.186 DHSC group bodies must select a suitable method to value assets. Where indices
are used, these must be widely recognised and in common use. The source of the
index must be disclosed in the narrative to the PPE note.
4.187 Cost and cumulative depreciation balances must be carried forward, without
adjustment, from year to year. Hence, adjustments for revaluation or impairment
are made in-year (at the date of revaluation or impairment).
4.188 On formal revaluation (as opposed to indexation), cumulative depreciation is
“zeroed” as an in-year movement. A corresponding adjustment to the “cost” lines
ensures that the “zeroing” arrangement does not itself distort net book values.
Adjustments are made to each of the “revaluation” lines to effect the “zeroing”.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
120
Example requirements on revaluation of PPE Prior to revaluation: PPE asset at cost/valuation Accumulated depreciation Net book value Asset is revalued to £1.5m. After revaluation: Cost/valuation PPE asset at cost/revaluation Gain on revaluation PPE asset at revalued amount Accumulated depreciation Carry forward balance Gain on revaluation Depreciation after revaluation Net book amount after revaluation Amount carried to the revaluation reserve
£000 1,000 (400) 600 1,000 500 1,500 (400) 400 Nil 1,500 900
Note: A revalued asset may attract further depreciation charges after “zeroing” at the date of revaluation, such that (depending on the date of revaluation) some cumulative depreciation may still be attached to the asset at the year-end.
4.189 A change in value must be presented in the PPE note as a revaluation only where
the value changes upwards, and even so, only when the upward revaluation is not
the reversal of an impairment.
4.190 A downward change in value must be presented as an impairment. See
paragraph 4.212 for more information.
4.191 Negative revaluation reserve balances for individual assets are not permitted.
Similarly, reversals of impairments should only bring the asset back to the value it
was held at prior to impairment.
4.192 Subsequent increases in asset value must be treated as a revaluation (an asset
cannot be “positively” impaired).
Asset lives
4.193 DHSC group bodies must adopt accounting policies setting appropriate useful
lives for their assets.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
121
4.194 DHSC group bodies must discuss any significant proposals to change asset lives
with the relevant national body or the DHSC sponsor, to ensure that the budgeting
implications have been considered.
Capitalisation threshold of non-current assets – de minimis limits
4.195 DHSC group bodies must adopt a capitalisation threshold of £5,000. This figure
includes VAT where it is not recoverable.
Grouped assets
4.196 "Grouped assets" are a collection of assets which individually may be valued at
less than £5,000 but which together form a single collective asset because the
items fulfil all the following criteria:
• the items are functionally interdependent
• the items are acquired at about the same date and are planned for disposal at about
the same date
• the items are under single managerial control, and
• each individual asset thus grouped has a value of over £250.
IT assets
4.197 It is expected that IT hardware will be considered interdependent if it is attached to
a network, the fact that it may be capable of stand-alone use notwithstanding.
4.198 The effect of this will be that all IT equipment purchases, where the final three
criteria listed above apply, will be capitalised.
Initial equipping and setting-up costs of a new building
4.199 Assets which are capital in nature, but which are individually valued at less than
£5,000 but more than £250, may be capitalised as collective, or “grouped”, assets
where they are acquired as part of the initial setting-up of a new building.
4.200 The enhancement or refurbishment of a ward or unit must be treated in the same
way as "new build", provided that the work would be considered as “subsequent
expenditure” in IAS 16 terms.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
122
Heritage assets
4.201 Heritage assets are assets with historical, artistic, scientific, technological,
geophysical or environmental qualities that are held and maintained principally for
their contribution to knowledge and culture.
4.202 It is not expected that DHSC group bodies will hold such assets as this definition
excludes assets that are held for operational purposes.
4.203 Where an entity does hold a heritage asset then FRS 102, The Financial
Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland, must be
followed.
Intangible Non-Current assets
4.204 The main relevant standards are IAS 38, Intangible Assets, IFRS 13, Fair Value
and SIC 32, Intangible Assets – Web Site Costs.
4.205 Guidance under Property, plant and equipment is generally applicable.
4.206 IAS 38 is adapted to remove the cost option (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS
Standards and applicability to the DHSC group).
4.207 Where there is an active market, intangible assets must be carried at market value
in existing use.
4.208 Where no active market exists, entities must revalue the asset to the lower of
depreciated replacement cost and value in use where the asset is income
generating.
4.209 Where there is no value in use, the asset must be valued using depreciated
replacement cost.
Impairment of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets and
heritage assets (IAS 36)
4.210 IAS 36, Impairment of Assets defines value in use as the present value of the
future cash flows from the asset's continued use.
4.211 It adds that, where a non-current asset is not held for the purpose of generating
cash flows, an alternative measure of its service potential may be more relevant.
HM Treasury has interpreted this for the public sector, stating that, the value in use
of a non-cash-generating asset is assumed to equal the cost of replacing that
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
123
service potential, unless there has been a reduction in service potential (see
Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the DHSC group).
Impairments arising from a clear consumption of economic benefits or service
potential
4.212 IAS 36, Impairment of Assets is adapted to require an impairment loss arising from
a clear consumption of economic benefits or reduction of service potential to be
recognised in operating expenses (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and
applicability to the DHSC group), rather than offset against any amount in the
revaluation reserve for the asset in question.
4.213 Examples of such impairments include losses as a result of loss or damage,
abandonment of projects, gold-plating, and use of the asset for a lower
specification purpose (FReM paragraph 10.3.3).
4.214 However, to ensure that the reserves are in the same position as if IAS 36 applied
without adaptation, an amount must be transferred from the revaluation reserve to
the income and expenditure reserve.
4.215 This transfer is the lower of:
• the amount of the impairment loss charged to expenses, or
• the balance on the revaluation reserve in respect of the asset.
4.216 An impairment that arose from a loss of economic benefits or service potential can
be reversed if, and to the extent that, the circumstances that gave rise to the loss
subsequently reverse.
4.217 For the avoidance of doubt, an increase in an asset’s valuation due to an increase
in general market prices is a separate event and does not represent a reversal of a
previous economic benefit/service potential impairment.
4.218 Such events must therefore be accounted for as a revaluation gain rather than a
reversal of a past economic benefit impairment.
4.219 Where an economic benefit/service potential impairment is reversed, the amount
of the reversal recognised in expenditure is limited to the amount that restores the
asset’s carrying value to that it would otherwise have had if the impairment had not
been recognised originally.
4.220 If, at the time of the original impairment, an amount was transferred from the
revaluation reserve to the income and expenditure reserve, an amount must be
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
124
transferred back to the revaluation reserve when the impairment is reversed to
avoid overstating the income and expenditure reserve.
4.221 The amount transferred back is that which will bring the respective reserves to the
balances that they would have had if the impairment and impairment reversal had
been taken to the revaluation reserve in accordance with IAS 36.
Other impairments
4.222 Where an impairment loss does not result from a clear consumption of economic
benefit or reduction of service potential, for instance due to a change in market
price, then the standard treatment in IAS 36 applies.
4.223 The impairment must be taken to the revaluation reserve to the extent that the
impairment does not exceed the amount in the revaluation reserve for the asset in
question, and thereafter to income and expenditure.
4.224 As land and buildings are reported separately in the notes to the SoFP,
impairments and revaluations need to be analysed between land and buildings,
based on the valuer’s analysis of the overall valuation of the property, and upward
revaluations or impairments need to be recognised separately on land and on
buildings.
Borrowing costs (IAS 23)
4.225 IAS 23, Borrowing Costs, requires borrowing costs incurred in connection with the
acquisition or construction of a qualifying asset (principally property, plant and
equipment and intangible assets) to be capitalised and included within the cost of
the asset.
4.226 IAS 23 is interpreted such that entities must expense borrowing costs in respect of
qualifying assets measured at fair value (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards
and applicability to the DHSC group).
4.227 For qualifying assets measured at current value in existing use, IAS 23 applies
without interpretation, meaning borrowing costs must be capitalised.
4.228 Guidance for “interest on obligations under PFI contracts” is available in the 2009
document Accounting for PFI under IFRS, which is available on request from the
GAM shared inbox.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
125
Leased assets
4.229 The relevant standards are IAS 17, Leases, SIC 15, Operating Leases -
Incentives, SIC 27, Evaluation the Substance of Transactions Involving the Legal
Form of a Lease, and IFRIC 4, Determining whether an Arrangement contains a
Lease. HM Treasury has confirmed that IFRS 16, Leases, as interpreted and
adopted by the FReM is to be effective from 1 April 2022.
4.230 For group entities such as limited companies, that prepare statutory accounts
following UK adopted IFRS in accordance with the Companies Act 2006, IFRS 16
was effective from 1 April 2019.
4.231 The DHSC IFRS 16 guidance being developed for the 2022-23 GAM will be
consulted upon with the user community. The current draft has been published as
IFRS 16 implementation guidance.
4.232 HM Treasury has also published its IFRS 16 application guidance.
4.233 Under IAS 17, leases of property, plant and equipment are classified as either
finance leases or operating leases, according to their characteristics as set out in
paragraphs 10 and 11 of the Standard.
4.234 IFRIC 4 requires other contracts to be examined to determine whether or not they
contain a lease. For example, does a contract for services require the use of a
specific underlying asset to which the recipient has exclusive use?
4.235 Where such a lease is identified, the payments for it must be separated from the
rest of the contract (using estimation techniques if necessary) and then accounted
for as a finance or operating lease in accordance with IAS 17.
4.236 The assessment under IFRIC 4 must be made when the arrangement is first
entered into, and must be re-assessed when the contract terms change or when
the nature of the underlying asset changes.
4.237 A contingent rent is the portion of a lease payment that is not fixed in amount but
is based on the future amount of a factor that changes other than with the passage
of time, such as, percentage of future sales or future price indices.
Service concession arrangements and Public Private Partnerships
4.238 The relevant standards are IFRIC 12, Service Concession Arrangements and SIC
29, Service Concession Arrangements: Disclosures.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
126
4.239 IFRIC 12 describes the accounting treatment for operators of public-to-private
service concession arrangements. These arrangements are forms of Public
Private Partnerships (PPP) and include Private Finance Initiative (PFI) and NHS
Local Improvement Finance Trust (LIFT).
4.240 The FReM applies the mirror treatment of IFRIC 12 to grantors of service
concession arrangements.
4.241 Where a DHSC group body is the grantor of such an arrangement, it must
recognise a PFI asset and corresponding PFI liability.
4.242 More detailed guidance on PFI and LIFT is given in Chapter 4 Annex 5:
Accounting requirements for PFI/LIFT schemes.
Investment property (IAS 40)
4.243 The relevant standard is IAS 40, Investment Properties.
4.244 IAS 40 is interpreted to require all investment property to be accounted for under
the fair value model (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to
the DHSC group).
4.245 The option to adopt the cost model has been withdrawn. Changes in the fair value
of the property must be recognised as revenue gains or losses.
4.246 The Standard applies to properties held only for the purpose of earning rentals or
for capital appreciation or both.
4.247 Where properties are held to support service delivery objectives, they must be
accounted for in accordance with IAS 16.
4.248 Indications that a property is not an investment property might include, for
example, lessees being charged rentals at less than market value, or properties
being under-used without any plan to alter their use, dispose of them or otherwise
take steps to improve the return on the asset.
4.249 IAS 40 states that properties occupied by employees, whether or not they pay rent
at market rates, are not investment properties.
4.250 While few DHSC group bodies are likely to have investment properties, they may
be found in subsidiaries and can often be held by NHS charitable funds. Thus if,
and when, charitable funds are consolidated into the NHS body’s accounts, any
investment properties must be accounted for in accordance with IAS 40 in the
consolidated accounts.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
127
4.251 Paragraph 15 of the Standard requires that a property owned by an entity that is
leased to and occupied by that entity’s parent or subsidiary is not an investment
property from the group perspective. Applying IAS 16, such a property should be
regarded as owner-occupied from the group perspective.
4.252 However, that property may be an investment property in the entity’s individual
financial statements, provided it meets the recognition criteria applying IAS 40.
Non-current assets held for sale
4.253 The relevant standard is IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and
Discontinued Operations.
4.254 IFRS 5 is interpreted such that activities must cease completely to qualify as
discontinued operations (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability
to the DHSC group).
4.255 Responsibilities transferred from one part of the public sector to another are not
discontinued operations.
4.256 Discontinued operations can only occur, therefore, in respect of activities that
genuinely cease without transferring to another entity, or which transfer to an entity
outside the boundary of WGA, such as the private or voluntary sectors.
4.257 A “disposal group” is a group of assets to be disposed of (by sale or otherwise)
together as a group in a single transaction. Associated liabilities are liabilities
directly associated with those assets that will be transferred in the transaction.
Inventories
4.258 The relevant standard is IAS 2, Inventories.
4.259 IAS 2 is interpreted in respect of categories of inventory held by central
government for which the Standard does not adequately cover the accounting
treatment.
4.260 DHSC and Public Health England (PHE) hold inventories in the form of strategic
stockpiles of vaccines. These stockpiles must be accounted for as PPE in
accordance with IAS 16.
Accounting for pandemic response items as inventories
4.261 Prior to donation to trusts, the Department and in some instances PHE will be
holding centrally procured items such as ventilators and other medical equipment,
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
128
personal protective equipment, testing kits, medicines and vaccines as inventory
prior to distribution or donation to NHS bodies.
4.262 The treatment of centrally procured items such as personal protective equipment
as inventories is detailed in paragraph 4.127.
4.263 Draw down by trusts from the intensive care medicine stockpile should not be
accounted for as inventories locally where it is immaterial to do so. In instances in
which draw down from the intensive care stockpile is material the approach will
align to that for personal protective equipment as detailed in paragraph 4.127 and
NHSE and NHSI supporting guidance referenced in paragraph 4.129.
4.264 Stocks of COVID-19 vaccines distributed to NHS bodies should not be accounted
for as inventory of an NHS body. The vaccines are held for a short period of time
prior to use by NHS bodies and NHS bodies are directed by the Department as to
how the vaccines are used. NHS bodies are therefore agents in this scenario and
will not account for the inventory or its consumption, rather this is accounted for by
PHE who receive the vaccines for nil consideration from the Department for
Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy.
4.265 Other transactions associated with the vaccination programme (for example costs
incurred directly by trusts) should be accounted for based on the substance of the
transaction.
4.266 Similarly testing kits provided to NHS bodies for nil consideration are not to be
accounted for as inventory by NHS bodies. In alignment with vaccines, testing kits
are held for a short time by NHS bodies who are directed as to their use by the
Department who determines the policy over how tests are administered and to
whom, with NHS bodies reimbursed for associated costs. Consequently testing
kits are not directly consumed in the production process for NHS bodies i.e. the
treatment of patients, thus not giving rise to inventory.
Financial Instruments
4.267 The relevant standards are IFRS 9, Financial Instruments, IAS 32, Financial
Instruments: Presentation and IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures. (IAS
39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement remains relevant under
IFRS 9, with entities able to continue to apply IAS 39 requirements to qualifying
instruments in a hedging relationship. However as per paragraph 4.272 below,
HM Treasury has withdrawn this option.)
4.268 These Standards can be very complex in areas – in particular the very detailed
definitions that can be found throughout the Standards.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
129
4.269 Practitioners therefore should ensure they are thoroughly familiar with the
Standards and take care to ensure that their transactions are properly classified,
measured and disclosed.
4.270 IAS 32 is interpreted as follows:
• Public Dividend Capital (PDC) is not an equity instrument and must be presented as a
form of financing in the SoFP (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and
applicability to the DHSC group). Dividends on PDC must be presented as a form of
financing in the SoCNE / SoCI and with a payable or receivable recognised as
appropriate in the SoFP. PDC dividend expenditure forms part of an NHS provider’s
retained surplus/deficit for the year.
4.271 IAS 32 is adapted as follows:
• References to ‘contract’ and ‘contractual’ within IAS 32 include legislations and
regulations which give rise to arrangements that in all other respects would meet the
definition of a financial instrument under IAS 32.11 and, do not give rise to
transactions classified as a tax by the Office of National Statistics, except for revenue
from taxation, fines and penalties that is recognised due to the IFRS 15 adaptation to
the definition of a contract.
4.272 IFRS 9 is interpreted as follows:
• DHSC must report PDC at historical cost, less any impairment
• Where future cash flows are discounted to measure fair value, entities must use the
higher of the rate intrinsic to the financial instrument and the real financial instrument
discount rate set by HM Treasury (see Chapter 4 Annex 7 - Treasury Discount Rates)
as applied to the flows expressed in current prices.
• The accounting policy choice allowed under IFRS 9 for long term trade receivables,
contract assets that do contain a significant financing component (in accordance with
IFRS 15), and lease receivables within the scope of IAS 17 has been withdrawn and
entities must always recognise a loss allowance at an amount equal to lifetime
expected credit losses. DHSC group bodies must utilise IFRS 9’s simplified approach
to impairment for relevant assets.
• The accounting policy choice under IFRS 9 that allows entities either to continue to
apply the hedge accounting requirements of IAS 39 (until the macro hedging project is
finalised) or to apply IFRS 9 has been withdrawn. DHSC group bodies may only apply
IFRS 9 hedge accounting requirements.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
130
• Any financial instrument that is not held in furtherance of the entity’s objectives but is
held on behalf of government more generally must be accounted for in a separate
Trust Statement. In the event that this situation arises, entities must discuss with the
relevant national body or DHSC sponsor.
• Special or ‘golden’ shares, being those shares retained in businesses that have been
privatised but in which the department wishes to retain a regulatory interest or reserve
power, must not be recognised in the SoFP.
4.273 Additionally, IFRS 9 is adapted as follows:
• Balances with core central government departments (including their executive
agencies), the Government’s Exchequer Funds, and the Bank of England are
excluded from recognising stage-1 and stage-2 impairments. In addition, any
Government Exchequer Funds’ assets where repayment is ensured by primary
legislation are also excluded from recognising stage-1 and stage-2 impairments. ALBs
are excluded from the exemption unless they are explicitly covered by a guarantee
given by their parent department.
• Balances between a parent department and its executive agencies and ALBs are not
covered by the exception from recognising ECLs noted in the IFRS 9 adaptation
above.
• Liabilities with core central government departments (including their executive
agencies), the Government’s Exchequer Funds, and the Bank of England are
assessed as having zero ‘own credit risk’ by the entities holding these liabilities.
• The Government’s Exchequer Funds include: The National Loans Fund, all
Consolidated Funds, the Contingencies Fund, the Exchange Equalisation Account, the
Debt Management Account, the Public Works Loan Board, and Commissioners for the
Reduction of the National Debt.
4.274 Whilst the 3-stage impairment approach is covered in more detail in Chapter 4
Annex 6: Financial Instruments, this means that DHSC group bodies must not
recognise stage-1 (12 month expected credit losses) and stage-2 (lifetime
expected credit losses) impairments against other core government departments,
their executive agencies and any ALB’s covered by a similar guarantee.
4.275 DHSC provides a guarantee of last resort against the debts of DHSC group bodies
(excluding NHS charities).
4.276 DHSC group bodies should not normally recognise stage-3 impairments (objective
evidence of impairment) for receivables due from other DHSC group bodies, as
such amounts are not expected to be irrecoverable.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
131
4.277 If in doubt as to whether it is correct to recognise either an expected (stages 1 and
2) or an incurred (stage 3) loss allowance against a body, DHSC group bodies
should consult their national body or DHSC Finance.
4.278 IFRS 9 includes a number of alternative accounting treatments as is covered in
more detail in Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments.
4.279 Entities must discuss any significant choices to be made with the relevant national
body or DHSC sponsor to ensure that the budgeting implications have been
properly considered.
4.280 Under IFRS 9, loans payable should normally be measured at amortised cost,
using the effective interest method. This approach to valuing financial instruments
is intended to provide relevant and useful information to users for their
assessments of amounts, timing and uncertainty of the entity’s future cash flows.
4.281 In the case of DHSC loans the effective rate will consist of nominal rate charged
for the loan to be applied to the outstanding balance of the loan.
4.282 The overriding concern remains that loans are valued on a consistent basis across
the group to enable the reported balances to be eliminated on consolidation. It is
therefore critical that bodies maintain agreement over the loan balance and
interest rates being applied.
4.283 More detailed guidance on financial instruments is given in Chapter 4 Annex 6:
Financial Instruments and in HM Treasury's IFRS 9 application guidance.
Provisions
4.284 The relevant standard is IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent
Assets.
4.285 IAS 37 is interpreted to require that, where the cash flows to be discounted are
expressed in current prices, entities must use the real discount rates set by HM
Treasury (see Chapter 4 Annex 7 - Treasury Discount Rates).
4.286 Note that voluntary early retirement provisions under scheme terms are
discounted at the pensions rate rather than the general provisions rate.
4.287 HM Treasury also sets a separate discount rate for post-employment benefits,
including injury benefit liabilities.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
132
4.288 IAS 37 is also interpreted such that separate disclosure of information about a
particular contingency need not be made if the information has a security marking
(see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the DHSC group).
PDC dividends expense (NHS providers)
4.289 The Secretary of State requires that NHS providers pay a PDC dividend based on
a charge of 3.5% of actual average relevant net assets, including subsidiaries (but
not consolidated NHS charities), during the financial year as determined in the
draft/unaudited accounts submitted to NHSE and NHSI.
4.290 Any difference between the amount of PDC dividend paid, and dividend expense,
for the financial year must be recorded as a receivable or payable in the SoFP.
4.291 Once determined for the draft accounts, the PDC dividend expense is not
recalculated to take account of any changes in net assets that may be recognised
as a result of the audit of the accounts, or due to calculation errors subsequently
identified in respect of prior years.
4.292 The PDC dividend payable (or receivable) is only adjusted in audited accounts to
correct for errors in the calculation of the PDC dividend itself made in the draft
accounts for that reporting year.
4.293 The calculation of relevant net assets is as follows:
Total public dividend capital and reserves
X
Less: Net book value of donated and grant funded assets
(X)
Less: Charitable funds (before any consolidation adjustments for charitable funds)
(X)
Less: Net cash balances in GBS accounts (excluding cash balances in GBS accounts that relate to a short-term working capital facility)
(X)
Less: Outstanding PDC Dividend prepayments
(X)
Plus: Outstanding PDC Dividend payables
X
Less: Approved expenditure on COVID-19 capital assets
(X)
Less: Assets under construction for nationally directed schemes
(X)
Add: Cash support for revenue requirements PDC drawn in-year
X
Total Relevant Net Assets X
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
133
4.294 The adjustment to net relevant assets calculation in respect of the Government
Banking Service (GBS) must be calculated on the basis of average daily cleared
balances.
4.295 In practice therefore, GBS values are not deducted from 1 April and 31 March net
relevant assets calculations as spot values at those dates, rather, average net
relevant assets including GBS for the year is calculated, and then the average
daily cleared GBS balances deducted from that figure to arrive at the relevant net
assets amount for the calculation of the dividend.
4.296 National Loans Fund deposits are considered to be analogous to GBS balances
for the calculation of relevant net assets and must also be calculated on an
average daily basis.
4.297 The rationale behind the changes made to the PDC dividend expense calculation
relating to; debt conversion to PDC for 2020-21, COVID-19 assets, assets under
construction for nationally directed schemes (AUC relief) and revenue based PDC
requirements, are detailed in section 7 of the Secretary of State's Guidance under
section 42A of the National Health Service Act 2006.
4.298 Examples of the calculation are set out below.
Example calculation without AUC relief and revenue PDC dividend: £’000 Opening capital and reserves (including GBS and NLF balances and prior to consolidation of charitable funds)
123,000
Less: Opening donated and granted assets net book value Add: Opening adjustment to remove all interim debt Less: Opening adjustment to remove all relevant assets under construction NBV
(3,000) 50,000 0
Total Opening relevant net assets [A]
170,000
Closing capital and reserves (including GBS and NLF balances and prior to consolidation of charitable funds)
128,500
Less: Closing donated and granted assets NBV and PDC issued for COVID-19 assets Less: Relevant assets under construction NBV Add: Cash support for revenue requirements PDC drawn in-year
(15,000) 0 0
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
134
Total Closing relevant net assets [B]
113,500
Average relevant net assets (including GBS and NLF) [(A+B)/2]=[C]
141,750
Less: Average daily cleared/available GBS balances and NLF deposits over the year [D]
(7,500)
Average relevant net assets for PDC dividend calculation [C-D]=[E]
134,250
Total PDC dividend expense [E*3.5%]
4,699
Example calculation with AUC relief: £’000 Opening capital and reserves (including GBS and NLF balances and prior to consolidation of charitable funds)
123,000
Less: Opening donated and granted assets net book value Add: Opening adjustment to remove all interim debt Less: Opening adjustment to remove all relevant assets under construction NBV
(3,000) 50,000 (7,000)
Total Opening relevant net assets [A]
163,000
Closing capital and reserves (including GBS and NLF balances and prior to consolidation of charitable funds)
128,500
Less: Closing donated and granted assets NBV and PDC issued for COVID-19 assets Less: Relevant assets under construction NBV Add: Cash support for revenue requirements PDC drawn in-year
(15,000) (7,000) 0
Total Closing relevant net assets [B]
106,500
Average relevant net assets (including GBS and NLF) [(A+B)/2]=[C]
134,750
Less: Average daily cleared/available GBS balances and NLF deposits over the year [D]
(7,500)
Average relevant net assets for PDC dividend calculation [C-D]=[E]
127,250
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
135
Total PDC dividend expense [E*3.5%]
4,454
Example calculation with Revenue PDC dividend: £’000 Opening capital and reserves (including GBS and NLF balances and prior to consolidation of charitable funds)
123,000
Less: Opening donated and granted assets net book value Add: Opening adjustment to remove all interim debt Less: Opening adjustment to remove all relevant assets under construction NBV
(3,000) 50,000 0
Total Opening relevant net assets [A] 170,000 Closing capital and reserves (including GBS and NLF balances and prior to consolidation of charitable funds)
128,500
Less: Closing donated and granted assets NBV and PDC issued for COVID-19 assets Less: Relevant assets under construction NBV Add: Cash support for revenue requirements PDC drawn in-year
(15,000) 0 10,000
Total Closing relevant net assets [B]
123,500
Average relevant net assets (including GBS and NLF) [(A+B)/2]=[C]
146,750
Less: Average daily cleared/available GBS balances and NLF deposits over the year [D]
(7,500)
Average relevant net assets for PDC dividend calculation [C-D]=[E]
139,250
Total PDC dividend expense [E*3.5%]
4,874
4.299 Where a provider exists for only part of the financial year, the charge should be
pro-rated to reflect the number of months the provider was in existence.
4.300 Where a provider is formed on or after 1 April, opening net relevant assets should
be calculated after the transfer in of assets and liabilities from any predecessor
bodies.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
136
4.301 For providers ceasing to exist on or before 31 March, closing net relevant assets
should be calculated before the transfer of assets and liabilities to any successor
bodies.
4.302 Where an existing provider acquires the services and accompanying net
assets/liabilities of a demising provider towards the start or end of a financial year,
this may have a distorting effect on the PDC dividend calculation.
4.303 In such circumstances, closing net relevant assets should exclude the transferred
net assets/liabilities, to initially compute average relevant net assets for the
continuing provider without the effect of the acquisition.
4.304 The part year effect of the acquired net assets/liabilities should then be added to
the average relevant net assets, before calculating the 3.5% charge. For example,
where an acquisition occurred on 1 July 9/12 of the net relevant assets acquired
would be included.
4.305 In the subsequent financial year, opening net relevant assets should relate to the
full asset base of the enlarged provider.
4.306 Entities should note that any changes stemming from the publication of the cash
regime guidance and dividend policy will be reflected via a Q3 FAQ.
Group Accounting Standards
Consolidated Accounts
4.307 The following group accounting standards are relevant:
• IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements
• IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements
• IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
• IAS 27, Separate Financial Statements
• IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures.
4.308 As set out in paragraph 2.41, IFRS 10 is adapted for departments and agencies to
define the departmental accounting boundary according to control criteria used by
the Office for National Statistics (ONS) to determine the sector classification of the
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
137
relevant sponsored bodies (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and
applicability to the DHSC group).
4.309 This means that public bodies will only fall within the DHSC group if HM Treasury
has designated them for consolidation by DHSC in line with the ONS classification.
DHSC agencies must only consolidate subsidiaries that have been designated to
the DHSC group.
4.310 This adaption does not apply to NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs (excluding
agencies), which must apply group accounting standards without adaptation or
interpretation.
4.311 This raises the possibility, where investments in other entities are material at the
national level, that consolidation adjustments may be required between individual
accounts (which may consolidate bodies in accordance with IFRS 10 but which
are outside the DHSC group) and the consolidated account and budgets (which
must not consolidate any bodies not designated to the DHSC group).
4.312 Where the question of materiality at the national level arises, entities must discuss
with their sponsor division or relevant national body with a view to their agreeing
treatments with DHSC.
4.313 Similar adaptations apply to IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements and IAS 28,
Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures for departments and agencies only.
4.314 These require that departments account for investments in other public sector
bodies as subsidiaries under IFRS 10 where they have been designated to the
departmental group, or otherwise as investments under IFRS 9.
4.315 DHSC agencies must apply IFRS 11 and IAS 28 only to investments in public
sector bodies that are designated to the DHSC group, and otherwise must account
for them as investments under IFRS 9.
4.316 These adaptations do not apply to investments in bodies classified to the private
sector or rest of the world, and do not apply for NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs
(excluding agencies).
4.317 The table below summarises the requirements for DHSC Group bodies resulting
from these adaptations.
4.318 For the purpose of application of the consolidation standards, NHS trusts, NHS
foundation trusts and CCGs are considered to be ALBs as defined by the FReM
(4.4.6 to 4.4.7).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
138
4.319 In this context, ALB does not apply to executive agencies, which are deemed to
form part of the core-Department of Health and Social Care.
Investment DHSC and DHSC agencies accounting treatment
NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs (excl. agencies) accounting treatment
Entity has control over investee. IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements applies
If the subsidiary is designated to the DHSC boundary by virtue of a Statutory Instrument following Office of National Statistics (ONS) classification: Consolidate per IFRS 10 If subsidiary is a public sector body not designated or is classified as a public corporation: Treat as investment per IFRS 9, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement
Apply IFRS 10 in full and without adaptation in Statutory Accounts. Treatment in summarisation schedules: - NHS providers - submission must be consistent with the statutory accounts. NHSE and NHSI will adjust centrally where a material subsidiary is not designated for consolidation. - Other NHS bodies and ALBs - Summarisation schedules must be on a single entity basis, excluding subsidiaries not designated for consolidation, unless these are immaterial to the group. Contact the relevant DHSC sponsor division or national body to discuss where necessary.
Entity has investments in joint ventures or associates.
For joint ventures and associates designated to the DHSC boundary, DHSC must follow IFRS 10 and DHSC agencies must follow IAS 28. Otherwise: if the investment is in another public sector body or public corporation Treat as investment per IFRS 9, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, as above. if the investee is classified to the private sector and the rest
Apply IAS 28 in full and without adaptation in Statutory Accounts. Treatment in summarisation schedules: - NHS providers - submission must be consistent with the statutory accounts. NHSE and NHSI will adjust centrally where a material public sector joint ventures or associate is not designated for consolidation. - Other NHS bodies and ALBs - Summarisation schedules must treat non-designated public sector joint ventures and associates as investments,
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
139
of the world by ONS Apply IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures, and apply the equity method of accounting.
unless these are immaterial to the group. Contact the relevant DHSC sponsor division or national body to discuss where necessary.
A joint arrangement exists
For joint arrangements designated to the DHSC boundary, DHSC must follow IFRS 10 and DHSC agencies must follow IFRS 11. Otherwise: if the investment is in another public sector body or public corporation Treat as investment per IFRS 9, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, as above. If the investment is with a body classified to the private sector and rest of the world by the ONS Apply IFRS 11 without adaptation.
Apply IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements, in full and without adaptation in Statutory Accounts. Treatment in summarisation schedules: - NHS providers - submission must be consistent with the statutory accounts. NHSE and NHSI will adjust centrally where a material public sector joint venture or associate is not designated for consolidation. - Other NHS bodies and ALBs - Summarisation schedules must treat non-designated public sector joint arrangements as investments, unless these are immaterial to the group. Contact the relevant DHSC sponsor division or national body to discuss where necessary.
4.320 IAS 27 is adapted such that it is only applicable to investments in entities that have
not been designated to the DHSC group.
4.321 IFRS 12 is adapted such that it applies in full, subject to the adaptations to IFRS
10, IFRS 11, IAS 27 and IAS 28.
4.322 The following sections describe the application without adaptation of IFRS 10,
IFRS 11, IFRS 12 and IAS 28, and are relevant to NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs
(excluding agencies).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
140
Subsidiaries (IFRS 10)
4.323 Under IFRS 10, an entity controls an investee when it is exposed to, or has rights
to, variable returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to
affect those returns through its power over the investee.
4.324 Control should be assessed regardless of the nature of the body’s involvement
with the investee; i.e. there does not need to be a formal financial investment in
the entity.
4.325 Power over the investee occurs where the entity has existing rights that give it the
current ability to direct the relevant activities i.e. the activities that significantly
affect the returns the entity receives from the investee.
4.326 If the entity determines that another entity is a subsidiary, then it must consolidate
the subsidiary in accordance with IFRS 10.
4.327 The ARA of the entity then includes both the group accounts and individual
accounts of the entity.
NHS Charities: local consolidation by NHS bodies
4.328 Under IFRS 10, and where the criteria related to control of the charity applies, and
subject to materiality, charitable funds related to an NHS body must be
consolidated.
4.329 There is an additional requirement for DHSC to consolidate NHS Charities, which
have been classified by the Office of National Statistics (ONS) as within the public
sector, into the DHSC group accounts.
4.330 In this sense, ‘NHS Charities’ is defined by section 43 of the Charities Act 1993,
and includes those charities where trustees are appointed by NHSE and NHSI.
4.331 NHS bodies will therefore need to distinguish between:
• those charitable funds that fall to be consolidated in the NHS body’s own accounts
under IFRS 10, and
• funds classified to the public sector by ONS, which DHSC will separately consolidate
as required by its designation order.
4.332 Where the NHS charitable funds are consolidated by the NHS body, the SoFP
must present charitable unrestricted funds, restricted funds and endowments as a
single item of charitable reserves, with separate analysis and explanation of these
funds in a note to the accounts where applicable.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
141
4.333 To record any charitable income, additional line items are also likely to be needed
in the SoCI, SoCF, and within the supporting notes.
4.334 NHS bodies are reminded that charitable funds are prepared in line with the
Charities Statement of Recommended Practice (SORP).
4.335 As a consequence, consolidation adjustments may be required to align the
charitable funds results with those prepared by the trust under IFRS and the
FReM.
4.336 The preparation of statements of account by the charitable fund will also be
prepared to a different timetable, as issued by the Charities Commission.
4.337 The NHS body should therefore discuss with the fund how best to obtain the
charitable funds data for consolidation in time to meet the NHS body’s own
accounts timetable.
Associates (IAS 28)
4.338 An entity is an associate of another entity where that entity has significant
influence over it, and yet the entity is not a subsidiary or a joint arrangement (being
a joint operation or joint venture).
4.339 Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy
decisions of the entity, but is neither control nor joint control over the policies.
4.340 It is therefore sufficient merely to have the power to exercise significant influence
in order for the entity to be an associate, regardless of whether the power is
actually used in practice.
4.341 Where an associate exists, the entity exercising significant influence must
recognise its activities through the equity accounting method in accordance with
IAS 28.
4.342 The use of the equity method for associates is required even where an entity is not
already preparing consolidated accounts.
4.343 Where, however, an associate is classified as ’held for sale‘ in accordance with
IFRS 5, it must be accounted for in accordance with the requirements of that
Standard.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
142
Joint arrangements (IFRS 11)
4.344 A joint arrangement is an arrangement of which two or more parties have joint
control.
4.345 Joint control, in turn, is the contractually agreed sharing of control of an
arrangement, which exists only when decisions about the relevant activities
require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control.
4.346 A joint arrangement is either a joint operation or a joint venture.
4.347 More detailed guidance on pooled budgets and joint arrangements, including the
Better Care Fund, can be found in Chapter 4 Annex 8 – Accounting for Pooled
Budgets and Joint Arrangements.
4.348 The classification of a joint arrangement as either a joint operation or a joint
venture depends on the rights and obligations of the parties to the arrangement.
4.349 A joint operation exists where the parties sharing joint control have rights to the
assets and obligations for the liabilities relating to the arrangement.
4.350 Where an entity is a joint operator it must recognise its, or its share of, assets,
liabilities, income and expenses in its own accounts.
4.351 A joint venture exists where the parties sharing joint control have rights to the net
assets of the arrangement.
4.352 Where an entity has entered into a joint venture, it must recognise its investment in
its own group accounts through the equity method in IAS 28 (unless exempted
from doing so under that Standard). In its separate financial statements, the entity
must account for the joint venture in accordance with paragraph 10 of IAS 27.
Disclosure of interests in other entities (IFRS 12)
4.353 The Standard sets out disclosure requirements, including summarised financial
information, for investments in subsidiaries, joint arrangements and associates.
4.354 The disclosures relating to subsidiaries will also apply to the consolidation of NHS
charitable funds.
4.355 The Standard also requires disclosure of interests in unconsolidated structured
entities.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
143
4.356 Structured entities are those that have been designed so that voting or similar
rights are not the dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity, for example
where voting rights relate to administrative tasks only and the relevant activities
are directed instead by means of contractual arrangements.
4.357 While IFRS 12 applies in full, entities are expected to take a proportionate
approach to these disclosures and may wish to apply the aggregation principles
set out in paragraphs B2 to B6 of the Standard where an entity has a number of
interests to disclose, if applicable.
4.358 Entities must also include disclosures for related undertakings as required by the
section 409 of the Companies Act 2006 and regulation 7 and schedule 4 to SI
2008 No.410, The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts
and Reports) Regulations 2008.
Interests in entities not accounted for under IFRS 10 and IFRS 11
4.359 Where an entity has an interest in a subsidiary, joint arrangement or associate
which has not been accounted for under IFRS 10 or IFRS 11 (for example on the
grounds of materiality), it is a requirement of this manual that the name of the
entity, nature of the relationship and the basis for non-consolidation must be
disclosed in the accounting policies of the entity.
Business Combinations
4.360 The relevant standard is IFRS 3, Business Combinations.
Acquisition of a business from outside the WGA boundary
4.361 Where a DHSC group body acquires a business from outside of the Whole of
Government Accounts boundary, it must be accounted for in accordance with
IFRS 3.
4.362 Where IFRS 3 is applicable, the combination is accounted for at fair value at the
date of combination.
4.363 Goodwill arising from the transaction is accounted for as an asset: it is not
amortised but is subject to impairment testing as required by IAS 36, Impairment
of Assets.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
144
Acquisition/Transfer of a business from inside the WGA boundary
4.364 IFRS 3 excludes from its scope business combinations involving entities or
businesses under common control.
4.365 IFRS 3 is interpreted such that public sector bodies are deemed to be under
common control (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the
DHSC group).
4.366 Where a function transfers between a DHSC group body and another entity within
the Whole of Government Accounts boundary this represents a “machinery of
government change” regardless of the mechanism used to effect the combination,
for example statutory merger or purchase of the business.
4.367 For these purposes, a function is defined as “an identifiable business operation
with an integrated set of activities, staff and recognised assets and/or liabilities that
are capable of being conducted and managed to achieve the objectives of that
business operation”.
4.368 DHSC group bodies must account for transfers of function to/from another DHSC
group body or to/from a local government body as a ‘transfer by absorption’.
4.369 Where the transfer from the group body is to/from another central government
body within the WGA boundary (not within the DHSC group), the machinery of
government change would be accounted for as a “transfer by merger”. The FReM
describes the required accounting in such cases.
Transfer by absorption
4.370 Where a DHSC group body is the recipient in the transfer of a function, it
recognises the assets and liabilities received as at the date of transfer. The assets
and liabilities are not adjusted to fair value prior to recognition (i.e. the recipient
and exporter of the assets and liabilities recognise the same values).
4.371 The corresponding net credit / debit reflecting the gain / loss is recognised within
income / expenses, but outside of operating activities. The only exception to this
approach is detailed in paragraph 4.387.
4.372 The pre-transfer income, expenses, assets and liabilities of the group body are not
adjusted to include any pre-transfer activity of the function.
4.373 For property plant and equipment assets and intangible assets, the cost and
accumulated depreciation / amortisation amounts from the transferring entity’s
accounts are preserved when the assets are recognised in the body’s accounts.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
145
4.374 Where any assets received had an attributable revaluation reserve balance in the
transferring entity’s accounts, this is preserved in the group body’s accounts by it
transferring the relevant amount from its income and expenditure reserve to its
revaluation reserve
Example 1: During the financial year, an NHS foundation trust is the recipient of a transfer of a function from an NHS trust that meets the definition of a machinery of government change. The function is received on 1 February. The net assets received are £40m. These net assets have an associated revaluation reserve balance in the NHS trust’s accounts of £12m. On 1 February the NHS foundation trust recognises the £40m net assets in its SoFP. It also recognises a gain of £40m which it records as income. This income is material and therefore the trust decides to present it in the SoCI as a separate item below Finance Costs but within the overall surplus/deficit. The NHS foundation trust then transfers £12m from its income and expenditure reserve to its revaluation reserve, and reports this transfer in the statement of changes in taxpayers’ equity.
4.375 Transfers are recorded based on the book values of assets and liabilities
transferring.
4.376 Adjustments to values as a result of harmonising accounting policies are made
immediately after this initial transfer, and are adjusted directly in taxpayers’ equity.
It is recommended the DHSC group body explain the effects of these changes in a
note to its accounts.
4.377 Where, the DHSC group body is the body relinquishing the function, the opposite
accounting entries apply. It de-recognises the assets and liabilities as at the date
of transfer and recognises the corresponding net debit / credit as a loss / gain in
expenses / income but not within operating activities.
4.378 Any revaluation reserve balances attributable to the assets transferred are
removed from the revaluation reserve and transferred to the income and
expenditure reserve.
4.379 The pre-transfer activities of the function remain in the original body’s accounts.
The only adjustments made are in respect of the assets and liabilities actually
transferring, as described above.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
146
4.380 Where the divesting body is an NHS trust or NHS foundation trust, and its services
are transferred to one or more receiving bodies, Public Dividend Capital (PDC)
may also transfer and will be specified in the legal documentation. Where such
transfers occur entities need to engage the DHSC provider finance team to action
transfers of PDC balances.
4.381 Where this is the case, the total value of PDC transferring to receiving entities will
normally be the lower of net assets transferring (excluding consolidated charitable
fund net assets) and the existing PDC reserve balance in the divesting body.
4.382 Where net assets exceed the existing PDC balance, legal documentation will
determine the basis of the allocation of PDC between the multiple receiving
bodies, and the Secretary of State will subsequently determine the values of PDC
transferred. Where such transfers occur entities need to engage the DHSC
provider finance team to action transfers of PDC balances.
4.383 Where the value of PDC in the divesting body exceeds the value of net assets
transferring, the excess will be retained by the divesting trust in its closing balance
sheet and DHSC will usually then apply to HM Treasury for this excess to be
subsequently written off.
4.384 When a PDC balance is transferred to a receiving body, PDC will be recognised
by the receiving body by transferring the relevant amount from its income and
expenditure reserve to its PDC reserve (see example 2 below).
Example 2: During the financial year, two NHS foundation trusts merge such that all services and net assets from NHS Foundation Trust A are transferred to NHS Foundation Trust B. The transfer occurs on 1 June and the net assets received by NHS Foundation Trust B are £210m with an associated revaluation reserve of £30m. The PDC balance in NHS Foundation Trust A immediately prior to transfer is £250m. £210m of PDC is transferred to NHS Foundation Trust B. NHS Foundation Trust B first recognises the receipt of net assets and records the gain in non-operating income and expenditure. Dr Net assets £210m Cr I&E (absorption gain) £210m The revaluation reserve is then recreated in NHS Foundation Trust B. Dr I&E reserve £30m Cr Revaluation reserve £30m PDC is then recognised in NHS Foundation Trust B at £210m (the lower of net assets and the existing PDC balance as set out in the transfer order).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
147
Dr I&E reserve £210m Cr PDC reserve £210m NHS Foundation Trust A mirrors the transfer between PDC reserve and I&E reserve but retains the excess £40m PDC balance. The closing balance sheet of NHS Foundation Trust A reported in year-end summarisation schedules (after the 1 June transfer) will contain only PDC reserve of £40m and an I&E reserve of (£40m).
4.385 Where control of a charitable fund passes to an NHS body (i.e. a demising trust’s
charitable fund is transferred to another trust through a change of corporate
trustee) and this meets the definition of control, the local group accounts prepared
by the NHS body may need to record an absorption accounting gain or loss, with
no prior year restatement. This ensures that a consistent policy of absorption
accounting is applied within the group.
4.386 Where the funds of a demising charity are transferred into an existing charity, this
will be recorded as incoming resources (or charitable expenditure where net
liabilities transfer) in the underlying charity’s accounts before consolidation into the
local group accounts.
Modified Absorption Accounting
4.387 Transfers of former Primary Care Trust assets from NHS Property Services to
NHS providers under the Asset Transfer Policy announced in May 2019, will occur
via a modified absorption approach, in which the corresponding debit / credit to
reflect the gain / loss on transfer is recognised directly in reserves.
4.388 The modification relates only to the scoring of the corresponding debit and credit
to the reserves. The guidance on treatment of pre transfer activity, valuation,
accumulated depreciation and revaluation reserves as detailed in paragraphs
4.370 to 4.385 applies equally to the modified absorption approach.
4.389 The treatment mirrors the approach taken in transferring properties into NHS
Property Services in 2013/14. HM Treasury has approved the use of this
approach to effect symmetrical treatment on transfer out of NHS Property
Services.
4.390 All other transfers by absorption are required to follow the treatment as prescribed
from paragraph 4.370.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
148
Changes in Entity Status – Reporting Requirements
4.391 DHSC group bodies should familiarise themselves with the additional reporting
requirements arising from changes in their status during the financial year.
4.392 Multiple reports may be required in circumstances where group bodies are newly
created, undergo mergers, change status (such as NHS trust to NHS foundation
trust, or special health authority to non-departmental public body), or are dissolved
during the financial year.
4.393 In general, in situations where changes occur, the following additional
requirements will apply:
• Change in status from NHS trust to NHS foundation trust (i.e. upon authorisation as an
NHS foundation trust) will require two ARAs, one for the NHS trust to the date of the
change, and one for the foundation trust from the date of the change. The same
applies for changes in ALB status.
• Newly established entities will create an ARA from the date of their establishment.
This applies regardless of whether the establishment of the new entity occurred as a
result of two (or more) entities dissolving to form a new entity.
• Where entities are dissolved, they will need to produce an ARA up to the date of their
dissolution. This applies regardless of whether there was a successor body (for
example, as a result of two entities dissolving to form a brand new entity), or whether
the dissolution occurs as a result of a takeover of services by another entity.
4.394 Full reporting requirements are described in Chapter 4 Annex 9: Reporting
requirements on change of status.
Events after the reporting period
4.395 IAS 10, Events after the Reporting Period, requires the entity to consider whether
financial statements require adjustment as a result of events occurring after the
reporting date.
4.396 In accordance with the interpretation of IAS 10 (see Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS
Standards and applicability to the DHSC group) relating to Public Dividend Capital,
dividends paid after the reporting date but which are in respect of the reporting
period, must be accrued as a liability in the SoFP. Likewise, any overpayments of
dividend at the financial year-end must be recorded as an asset.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
149
4.397 The date of the Accounting Officer’s authorisation for issue of the financial
statements is normally the same as the date of the Certificate and Report of the
Comptroller and Auditor General or other auditor.
4.398 The date of authorisation for issue must be included in the Annual Report and
Accounts, but not on the title page.
Related party disclosures
4.399 The relevant standard is IAS 24, Related party disclosures. This Standard is
interpreted as set out in Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to
the DHSC group.
4.400 Further guidance on related party disclosures is given in Chapter 5 at paragraph
5.254.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
150
Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and
applicability to the DHSC group
4.401 The Treasury Financial Reporting Manual (FReM) and the DHSC Group
Accounting Manual (GAM) follow International Financial Reporting Standards
(IFRS) (as adopted by the United Kingdom) and interpretations to the extent that
they are meaningful and appropriate to public benefit entities.
4.402 The FReM often applies interpretations and adaptations to UK-adopted Standards.
The table below provides, for each IFRS Standard and Interpretation:
• its objective
• as dictated by the FReM, its applicability to the DHSC group, including any
interpretations and adaptations. Where the application of a standard has been
discussed in Chapter 4, the FReM interpretations and adaptations will have been
provided. For completeness they are replicated in the below annex
4.403 IFRS Standards can be obtained from the International Accounting Standards
Board (IASB) at www.ifrs.org.
Standard/Interpretation and its objective
Applicability to the DHSC group (as prescribed by the FReM)
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
IFRS 1 First-time Adoption of
International Financial Reporting
Standards
The objective of IFRS 1 is to ensure that the entity’s first IFRS financial statements contain high quality information that: ● is transparent for users and comparable over all periods presented ● provides a suitable starting point for accounting under IFRS, and ● can be generated at a cost that does not exceed the benefits to users.
Applies with the following interpretation: Financial statements to be prepared under the historical cost convention, modified by the revaluation of assets and liabilities to fair value as determined by the relevant accounting standard, and so the elections available in IAS 1, 16, 17 and 18 are not relevant.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
151
IFRS 2 Share-based Payment
The objective of IFRS 2 is to specify the financial reporting by an entity when it undertakes a share-based payment transaction under which the entity acquires or receives goods or services.
Not relevant.
IFRS 3 Business Combinations
IFRS 3 requires business combinations to be accounted for using the purchase method (also known as the acquisition method). Further details in the GAM: 4.360
Applies with the following interpretation: IFRS 3 excludes from its scope business combinations involving entities or businesses under common control. Public sector bodies are deemed to be under common control. Therefore IFRS 3 applies only to combinations involving DHSC group body with an entity outside the public sector.
IFRS 4 Insurance Contracts
The objective of IFRS 4 is to specify the financial reporting for insurance contracts by an entity that issues such contracts (the insurer).
Not relevant.
IFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for
Sale and Discontinued Operations
IFRS 5 sets out requirements for the classification, measurement and presentation of non-current assets held for sale. Further details in the GAM: 4.253, 4.162 to 4.182, 5.124 to 5.126 Also see: IAS 16: Property, Plant and Equipment IAS 36: Impairment of Assets IAS 38: Intangible Assets
Applies in full with the following interpretation: To qualify as ‘discontinued operations’, activities must cease completely. Responsibilities transferred from one part of the public sector to another are not discontinued operations. Discontinued operations can only occur, therefore, in respect of activities that genuinely cease without transferring to another entity, or which transfer to an entity outside the boundary of WGA, such as the private or voluntary sectors.
IFRS 6 Exploration for and Evaluation
of Mineral Resources
The objective of IFRS 6 is to specify the financial reporting for the exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources.
Not relevant.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
152
IFRS 7 Financial Instruments:
Disclosures
The objective of IFRS 7 is to require entities to provide disclosures in their financial statements that enable users to evaluate: the significance of financial instruments to the entity’s financial position and performances, and the nature and extent of risks from financial instruments and how the entity manages those risks. Further details in the GAM: 4.108 to 4.111, 4.267 to 4.283,Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments , 5.154 to 5.156 Also see: IFRS 9 Financial Instruments IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation
Applies in full.
IFRS 8 Operating Segments
The objective of IFRS 8 is to require an entity to disclose information to enable users of its financial statements to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the business activities in which it engages and the economic environment in which it operates. Further details in the GAM: 5.45 to 5.52
Applies in full.
IFRS 9 Financial Instruments
The objective of IFRS 9 is to establish principles for the financial reporting of financial assets and financial liabilities that will present relevant and useful information to users of financial statements for their assessment of the amounts, timing and uncertainty of an entity’s future cash flows. Please find HM Treasury’s application guidance at this link Further details in the GAM:
Applies in full with the following interpretations and adaptations: Interpretations DHSC must report public dividend capital at historical cost, less any impairment. Where future cash flows are discounted to measure fair value, entities must use the higher of the rate intrinsic to the financial instrument and the real discount rate set by HM Treasury, as applied to the flows expressed in current prices.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
153
4.267 to 4.283, Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments Also see: IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosure IFRIC 16 Hedges of a Net Investment in a Foreign Operation
The accounting policy choice allowed under IFRS 9 for long term trade receivables, contract assets that do contain a significant financing component (in accordance with IFRS 15), and lease receivables within the scope of IAS 17 has been withdrawn and entities must always recognise a loss allowance at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit losses. DHSC group bodies must utilise IFRS 9’s simplified approach to impairment for relevant assets. The accounting policy choice under IFRS 9 that allows entities either to continue to apply the hedge accounting requirements of IAS 39 (until the macro hedging project is finalised) or to apply IFRS 9 has been withdrawn. DHSC group bodies may only apply IFRS 9 hedge accounting requirements. The accounting policy choice under IFRS 9 that allows entities upon transition to restate prior periods if, and only if, it is possible without the use of hindsight has been withdrawn. DHSC group bodies must recognise any difference between the previous carrying amount and the carrying amount at the beginning of the 2018-19 annual reporting period in the opening retained earnings (or other component of equity, as appropriate) as at 1 April 2018. Any financial instrument that is not held in furtherance of the entity’s objectives, but is held on behalf of government more generally, must be accounted for in a separate Trust Statement. In the event that this situation arises, entities must discuss with the relevant national body or DHSC sponsor. Special or ‘golden’ shares, being those shares retained in businesses that have been privatised but in which the department wishes to retain a regulatory interest or reserve power, must not be recognised in the SoFP. Adaptations Balances with core central government departments (including their executive
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
154
agencies), the Government’s Exchequer Funds, and the Bank of England are excluded from recognising stage-1 and stage-2 impairments. In addition, any Government Exchequer Funds’ assets where repayment is ensured by primary legislation are also excluded from recognising stage-1 and stage-2 impairments. ALBs are excluded from the exemption unless they are explicitly covered by a guarantee given by their parent department. Balances between a parent department and its executive agencies and ALBs are not covered by the exception from recognising ECLs noted in the IFRS 9 adaptation above. Liabilities with core central government departments (including their executive agencies), the Government’s Exchequer Funds, and the Bank of England are assessed as having zero ‘own credit risk’ by the entities holding these liabilities
IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial
Statements
The objective of this Standard is to establish principles for the presentation and preparation of consolidated financial statements when an entity controls one or more other entities. Further details in the GAM: 4.307 to 4.334, 4.359, 5.131
Applies subject to the following adaptations: The departmental boundary is similar to the concept of a group under generally accepted accounting practice, but is based on control criteria used by the Office for National Statistics to determine the sector classification of the relevant sponsored bodies. DHSC will account for subsidiaries under IFRS 10 only if they are designated for consolidation by order of HM Treasury under statutory instrument, which will reflect the ONS’s classification of an entity to the central government sector. DHSC agencies must follow the requirements of IFRS 10 only if the subsidiaries are within DHSC’s consolidation boundary. NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs (excluding agencies) must apply IFRS 10 in full, without adaptation.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
155
IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements
The objective of this Standard is to establish principles for financial reporting by entities that have an interest in arrangements that are controlled jointly (i.e. joint arrangements). Further details in the GAM: 4.307 to 4.313, 4.344 to 4.351, Chapter 4 Annex 8 – Accounting for Pooled Budgets and Joint Arrangements
Applies subject to the following adaptations: In accordance with the principles set out in Managing Public Money, executive non-departmental and similar public bodies classified to central government by the Office for National Statistics will normally be controlled for accountability purposes by only one department in accordance with IFRS 10, and not as a joint arrangement under IFRS 11. Where DHSC has an investment in another public sector entity that has not been designated for consolidation, it must be reported following the requirements of IFRS 9. This includes all interest in bodies classified as public corporations by the ONS, which are within the scope of Managing Public Money principles. DHSC agencies must follow the requirements of IFRS 11 with respect to public sector entities only if the entities are within DHSC’s consolidation boundary. DHSC and DHSC agencies must apply IFRS 11 without adaptation to bodies classified to the private sector and rest of the world by ONS. NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs (excluding agencies) must apply IFRS 11 without adaptation.
IFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in
Other Entities
The objective of this Standard is to require an entity to disclose information that enables users of its financial statements to evaluate: the nature of, and risks associated with, its interests in other entities, and the effects of those interests on its financial position, financial performance and cash flows. Further details in the GAM: 4.307 to 4.321, 4.353
Disclosure of interests in other entities is subject to the adaptations for DHSC and DHSC agencies to IFRS 10, IFRS 11, IAS 27 and IAS 28. For NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs (excluding agencies), the Standard is applied in full.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
156
IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement
IFRS 13: defines fair value sets out in a single IFRS a framework for measuring fair value, and requires disclosures about fair value measurements. Further details in the GAM: 4.161
Applies in full, although IAS 16 and IAS 38 have been adapted and interpreted for the public sector context to limit the circumstances in which a valuation is prepared under IFRS 13.
IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with
Customers
The objective of IFRS 15 is to establish the principles that an entity shall apply to report useful information to users of financial statements about the nature, amount, timing and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows arising from a contract with a customer. Please find HM Treasury’s application guidance at this link Further details in the GAM: 4.70 Also see: IAS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance SIC 27 Evaluating the Substance of Transactions involving the Legal Form of a Lease
Applies in full, with the following interpretations and adaptations: Adaptations The definition of a contract is expanded to include legislation and regulations which enables an entity to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity that is not classified as a tax by ONS. The costs of preparing the legislation or regulations do not amount to assets under IFRS 15 (91-94). Where, by statute or approval from HM Treasury, an entity is permitted to retain the revenue from taxation, fines and penalties, this revenue shall be accounted for under IFRS 15 paragraph15a. However, where entities receive revenue through taxation, fines and penalties which is wholly non-refundable and leads to no obligations, entities are not required to wait until all, or substantially all, of the promised revenue has been received to recognise the revenue. In these instances, entities should recognise revenue when an equivalent to a taxable event has occurred, the revenue can be measured reliably, and it is probable that the assisted economic benefits from the taxable event will flow to the collecting entity. All these elements are required to be satisfied Interpretations Upon transition, the option to restate using IAS 8 has been withdrawn. Entities must recognise the difference between the previous carrying amount and the carrying amount at the beginning on the annual
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
157
reporting period that includes the date of initial application in the opening general fund within taxpayers’ equity (or other component of equity, as appropriate). The practical expedient only to assess open contracts must be exercised.
IFRS 16 Leases
The objective of IFRS 16 is to report
information that faithfully represents lease
transactions and provide a basis for users
of financial statements to assess the
amount, timing and uncertainty of cash
flows arising from leases. To meet that
objective, a lessee should recognise
assets and liabilities arising from a lease.
IFRS 16 Leases is being applied by HM Treasury in the Government Financial Reporting Manual (FReM) from 1 April 2022.
International Accounting Standards (IAS)
IAS 1 Presentation of Financial
Statements
IAS 1 prescribes the basis for presentation of general purpose financial statements to ensure comparability with the entity’s financial statements of previous periods and with the financial statements of other entities. The Standard sets out overall requirements for the presentation of financial statements, guidelines for their structure and minimum requirements for their content. Further details in the GAM: 4.18, 5.9, 5.29, 5.71, 5.127, 5.186
Applies in full with the following interpretations: References in IAS 1 to ‘present fairly’ and ‘fair presentation’ should be read to mean ‘give a true and fair view’ and ‘truthful and fair presentation’ to comply with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. In addition to naming the legislative authority for producing the accounts, the notes to the accounts must disclose the basis of preparation of the financial statements as being in accordance with the GAM. The following provide the interpretations of going concern for the public sector context: For entities that are not trading funds, the anticipated continuation of the provision of a service in the future, as evidenced by inclusion of financial provision for that service in published documents, is normally sufficient evidence of going concern. However, a trading entity needs to consider whether it is appropriate to
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
158
continue to prepare its financial statements on a going concern basis where it is being, or is likely to be, wound up. Entities whose SoFPs show net liabilities must prepare financial statements on the going concern basis unless DHSC considers the going concern basis inappropriate. Where an entity ceases to exist, it must consider whether or not its services will continue to be provided (using the same assets, by another public sector entity) in determining whether to use the concept of going concern for the final set of financial statements. DHSC group bodies (other than NHS providers) must prepare a SoCNE, except that DHSC ALBs may prepare a SoCI if more appropriate. NHS providers must prepare a SoCI. The financing of public sector entities is ultimately tax-based and an IAS 1 based notion of capital does not apply to many of them. Capital disclosures (IAS 1.79-80A and 134-136A) are therefore not required. The flexibility to select the order of presentation of line items in the SoFP and to present on a liquidity basis is withdrawn. DHSC group bodies must prepare their SoFP in accordance with this manual and their respective pro forma accounts. For consistency across the DHSC group, the option under IAS 1 to present the information as two statements has been withdrawn.
IAS 2 Inventories
The objective of IAS 2 is to prescribe the accounting treatment for inventories. It provides guidance on the determination of cost and its subsequent recognition as an expense, including any write-down to net realisable value. Further details in the GAM: 5.149
Applies with the following interpretation: In addition to the types of inventories identified in IAS 2, central government has categories of inventories for which IAS 2 may not adequately cover the accounting treatment. Where DHSC and PHE hold inventories considered to be “strategic” in the context of stockpiling for national emergencies, they must be treated as non-current assets.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
159
IAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows
The objective of IAS 7 is to require the provision of information about the historical changes in cash and cash equivalents of an entity by means of a SoCF that classifies cash flows during the period from operating, investing and financing activities. Further details in the GAM: 5.155, 5.188
Applies in full for the DHSC group. Applies with interpretation for core DHSC to include disclosure of cash flows with the Consolidated Fund.
IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in
Accounting Estimates and Errors
The objective of IAS 8 is to prescribe the criteria for selecting and changing accounting policies, and the accounting treatment and disclosure of changes in accounting policies, accounting estimates and corrections of errors. Further details in the GAM: 4.42, 4.48, 5.34
Applies in full.
IAS 10 Events after the Reporting
Period
This Standard prescribes when an entity should adjust its financial statements for events after the reporting period and the disclosures required. Further details in the GAM: 4.395, 5.251
Applies in full with the following interpretations: Public Dividend Capital is not a financial instrument within the meaning of IAS 32. Unpaid dividends in respect of PDC shall continue to be recognised as liabilities for the reporting period. Where entities’ accounts are certified by the Comptroller and Auditor General (C & AG), the date of the Accounting Officer’s authorisation for issue of the financial statements is normally the same as the date of the Certificate and Report of the C & AG. The date of authorisation for issue must be included in the Annual Report and Accounts, but not on the title page.
IAS 12 Income Taxes
The objectives of IAS 12 are to specify the accounting for current and deferred tax.
Applies in full where tax liabilities on income are required.
IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment Applies in full with the following interpretations and adaptations:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
160
The objective of IAS 16 is to prescribe the accounting treatment for property, plant and equipment so that users of the financial statements can discern information about an entity’s investment in its property, plant and equipment and the changes in such investment. Further details in the GAM: 4.161, Chapter 4 Annex 4 - Valuation Issues, 5.220 Also, see: IAS 23 Borrowing Costs IAS 36 Impairment of Assets IFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. IFRIC 1 Changes in Existing Decommissioning, Restoration & Similar Liabilities IFRIC 12 Service Concession Arrangements
Adaptations: Assets which are held for their service potential (i.e. operational assets) and are in use must be measured at current value in existing use. For non-specialised assets current value in existing use should be interpreted as market value for existing use. In the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors (RICS) Red Book, this is defined as Existing Use Value (EUV). For specialised assets current value in existing use should be interpreted as the present value of the asset’s remaining service potential, which can be assumed to be at least equal to the cost of replacing that service potential. Assets which were most recently held for their service potential but are surplus must be valued at current value in existing use as above if there are restrictions on the entity or the asset which would prevent access to the market at the reporting date. If the entity could access the market then the surplus asset must be valued at fair value using IFRS 13. Assets which are not held for their service potential must be valued in accordance with IFRS 5 or IAS 40 depending on whether the asset is actively held for sale. Where such assets are surplus and do not fall within the scope of IFRS 5 or IAS 40, they must be valued at fair value applying IFRS 13. Interpretations: All tangible non-current assets shall be carried at either current value in existing use or fair value at the reporting date. The option in IAS 16 to measure at cost is withdrawn, as is the option to value only certain classes of assets. It is not necessary to disclose the historical cost carrying amounts.
IAS 17 Leases
The objective of IAS 17 is to prescribe, for lessees and lessors, the appropriate
Applies in full.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
161
accounting policies and disclosures to apply in relation to leases. Further details in the GAM: 4.108, 4.229, 5.223 Also see: SIC 15 Operating Leases – Incentives SIC 27 Evaluating the Substance of Transactions Involving the Legal Form of a Lease IFRIC 4 Determining whether an Arrangement contains a Lease IFRIC 12 Service Concession Arrangements
IAS 19 Employee benefits
IAS 19 prescribes the accounting and disclosures for all types of employee benefits: short-term benefits, for example salaries and wages, social security contributions, paid leave and non-monetary benefits post-employment benefits that result from employment, for example retirement benefits other long-term benefits, for example long service or sabbatical leave termination benefits, that is, that arise directly from termination rather than from employment. It requires an entity to recognise the cost of providing employee benefits in the period in which the benefit is earned rather than when paid or payable Further details in the GAM: 4.133, 5.54, 5.66, 5.176 Also see IFRIC 14: IAS 19 – The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction
Applies with the following interpretations: DHSC group bodies shall account for the NHS Superannuation Scheme, the Principal Civil Service Pension Scheme and the Civil Servant and Other Pension Scheme (known as ‘alpha’) as defined contribution plans. For defined benefit obligations, IAS 19’s requirements on current valuations are interpreted to mean that the period between formal actuarial valuations should be four years, with approximate valuations in intervening years. DHSC group bodies with staff who are in funded schemes, for instance the local government scheme, must use the discount rate determined in accordance with IAS 19, as advised by the scheme's actuary. Voluntary terminations with agreed terms under a pension scheme must be treated as post-employment benefits and so discounted using the rate applicable to pensions of that scheme. Involuntary terminations and voluntary terminations whose terms are available for a short time only must be treated as termination benefits and so discounted using the rate for provisions.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
162
IAS 20 Accounting for Government
Grants and Disclosure of Government
Assistance
The objective of IAS 20 is to prescribe the accounting treatment for government grants and the disclosures about other government assistance. Further details in the GAM: 4.112 Also see SIC 10 Government Assistance – No Specific Relation to Operating Activities IFRIC 12 Service Concession Arrangements
Applies in full with the following interpretations: The option provided in IAS 20 to offset a grant for acquisitions of an asset against the cost of the asset has been withdrawn. The option provided in IAS 20 to defer grant income relating to an asset is restricted to income where the funder imposes a condition. Where assets are financed by government grant (not a grant from a sponsoring department to an NDPB) or donation (including lottery funding), the funding element is recognised as income and taken through the SoCNE / SoCI. To defer this income, a condition imposed by the funder must be: a requirement that the future economic benefits embodied in the grant/donation are consumed as specified by the grantor/donor or must be returned to them (for example, a grant that is conditional on the construction of an asset). Trading Funds, where they have the consent of the relevant authority, need not apply this interpretation. A grant, contribution or donated asset may be received subject to a condition that it be returned to the transferor if a specified future event does or does not occur (for example, a grant may need to be returned if the entity ceases to use the asset purchased with that grant for a purpose specified by the transferor). In these cases, a return obligation does not arise until such time as it is expected that the condition will be breached, and a liability is not recognised until that time. Such conditions do not prevent the grant, contribution or donated asset being recognised as income in the SoCNE / SoCI. Grant-in-aid is provided to match the recipient’s cash needs and is to be accounted for on a cash basis. Any exceptions to this treatment must be agreed with DHSC and HM Treasury.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
163
IAS 21 The Effects of Changes in
Foreign Exchange Rates
The objective of IAS 21 is to prescribe how to include foreign currency transactions and foreign operations in the financial statements of an entity and how to translate financial statements into a presentational currency. Further details in the GAM: 5.188 Also see: SIC 7 Introduction of the Euro IFRIC 16 Hedges of a Net Investment in a Foreign Operation
Applies in full with the following interpretation: The presentational currency will be the same as the functional currency i.e. pounds sterling.
IAS 23 Borrowing Costs
The objective of IAS 23 is to prescribe the accounting for borrowing costs. Further details in the GAM: 4.225 Also see: IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment IAS 17 Leases IFRS 9 Financial Instruments IFRIC 1 Changes in Existing Decommissioning, Restoration and Similar Liabilities
Applies in full with the following interpretation: Borrowing costs in respect of qualifying assets held at fair value shall be expensed.
IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures
The objective of IAS 24 is to ensure that an entity’s financial statements contain the disclosures necessary to draw attention to the possibility that its financial position and profit or loss may have been affected by the existence of related parties and by transactions and outstanding balances, including commitments, with such parties.
Applies in full with the following interpretations: For the purposes of IAS 24 paragraph 9(a), the related party will be the chair, chief executive or members of the board of directors, as named in the directors’/members’ report (see paragraph 3.51). DHSC group bodies must disclose the Department of Health and Social Care as the parent department; a note of the main
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
164
Further details in the GAM: 5.254
entities within the public sector with which the body has had dealings (no information needs to be given about these transactions), and details of material transactions between the body and individuals who are regarded as related parties. The requirement to disclose the compensation paid to management, expense allowances and similar items paid in the ordinary course of an entity’s operations will be satisfied by the disclosures made in the notes to the accounts and in the remuneration report. In considering materiality, regard should be had to the definition in IAS 1, which requires materiality to be judged ‘in the surrounding circumstances’. As a result, materiality should thus be judged from the viewpoint of both the entity and the related party, whether it is an individual or a corporate body.
IAS 26 Accounting and Reporting by
Retirement Benefit Plans
The objective of IAS 26 is to provide guidance on the form and content of the financial statements prepared by retirement benefit plans.
Not relevant.
IAS 27 Separate Financial Statements
IAS 27 requires parent undertakings to provide information about the economic activities of their group as a single economic entity in consolidated financial statements. Further details in the GAM: 4.320 Also see: SIC 12 Consolidation – Special Purpose Entities
Applies with the following adaptation: The presentation of separate, non-consolidated financial statements will only be applied in full if the investment has not been designated for consolidation by order of the relevant authority under statutory instrument.
IAS 28 Investments in Associates and
Joint Ventures
Applies with the following adaptations: In accordance with the principles set out in Managing Public Money, executive non-
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
165
The objective of IAS 28 is to reflect the effect of investments in associates and joint ventures where the reporting entity is partly accountable for the associate’s activities. Further details in the GAM: 4.307, 4.338, 5.200
departmental and similar public bodies classified to central government by the Office for National Statistics will normally be controlled for accountability purposes by only one department. Therefore, the public sector entity will be included in one department’s consolidation order and will be consolidated by that department in accordance with IFRS 10. Where DHSC has an investment in another public sector entity that has not been designated for consolidation, it must be reported following the requirements of IFRS 9. This includes all interest in bodies classified as public corporations by the ONS, which are within the scope of Managing Public Money principles. DHSC agencies must follow the requirements of IAS 28 with respect to public sector entities only if the entities are within DHSC’s consolidation boundary. DHSC and DHSC agencies must apply IAS 28 without adaptation to bodies classified to the private sector and rest of the world by ONS. NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs (excluding agencies) must apply IAS 28 without adaptation.
IAS 29 Financial Reporting in
Hyperinflationary Economies
IAS 29 requires the financial statements of an entity whose functional currency is that of a hyperinflationary economy to be stated in terms of the measuring unit current at the end of the reporting period.
Applies in full with the following interpretation: As all DHSC group bodies have a functional currency of pounds sterling, HM Treasury (via DHSC) will notify classification of the economy as hyperinflationary if appropriate.
IAS 32 Financial Instruments:
Disclosure and Presentation
IAS 32 establishes principles for presenting financial instruments as liabilities or equities and for offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities.
Applies in full with the following interpretation: Public dividend capital (PDC) is not an equity instrument as defined by the IAS. It must be presented as a form of financing in the SoFP. Dividends on PDC must be presented as a form of financing in the SoCNE / SoCI and accounted for where appropriate in the SoFP.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
166
Further details in the GAM: 4.267, Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments Also see: IFRS 9 Financial Instruments FRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures
IAS 32 is adapted as follows References to ‘contract’ and ‘contractual’ within IAS 32 include legislations and regulations which give rise to arrangements that in all other respects would meet the definition of a financial instrument under IAS 32.11 and, do not give rise to transactions classified as a tax by the Office of National Statistics, except for revenue from taxation, fines and penalties that is recognised due to the IFRS 15 adaptation to the definition of a contract.
IAS 33 Earnings per Share
The objective of IAS 33 is to prescribe principles for the determination and presentation of earnings per share to improve performance comparisons.
Not relevant.
IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting
IAS 34 prescribes the minimum content of an interim financial report and the principles for recognition and measurement for an interim period. Also see: IFRIC 10: Interim Financial Reporting and Impairment.
DHSC group bodies are not required to publish interim financial reports at present. Applies in full to a body that elects to do so.
IAS 36 Impairment of Assets
The objective of IAS 36 is to ensure that assets are carried at no more than their recoverable amount. Further details in the GAM: 4.210 Also see: IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment IAS 38 Intangible Assets IFRIC 1 Changes in Existing Decommissioning, Restoration and Similar Liabilities IFRIC 10 Interim Financial Reporting and Impairment
Applies in full with the following adaptations and interpretations: Adaptations References in IAS 36 to the recognition of an impairment loss of a revalued asset being treated as a revaluation decrease to the extent that that impairment does not exceed the amount in the revaluation surplus for the same asset, are adapted such that only those impairment losses that do not result from a clear consumption of economic benefit or reduction of service potential (including as a result of loss or damage resulting from normal business operations) must be taken to the revaluation reserve. Impairment losses
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
167
IFRIC 12 Service Concession Arrangements
that arise from a clear consumption of economic benefit must be taken to the SoCNE / SoCI. Interpretations Where an asset is not held for the purpose of generating cash flows, value in use is assumed to equal the cost of replacing the service potential provided by the asset, unless there has been a reduction in service potential.
IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent
Liabilities and Contingent Assets
The objective of IAS 37 is to ensure that provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets are appropriately recognised and measured, and that sufficient information is disclosed in the notes to the financial statements to enable users to understand their nature, timing and amount. Further details in the GAM: Chapter 4 Annex 7 - Treasury Discount Rates, 5.168, 5.247 Also see: IFRIC 1 Changes in Existing Decommissioning, Restoration and Similar Liabilities IFRIC 14 IAS 19 – The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction
Applies in full with the following interpretation: Where the cash flows to be discounted are expressed in current prices, entities must use the real discount rates set by Treasury. Separate disclosure of information about a particular contingency need not be made if the information has a security marking.
IAS 38 Intangible Assets
IAS 38 prescribes the measurement and accounting for intangible assets that are not specifically dealt with in another IFRS Standard. It requires an entity to recognise an intangible asset if, and only if, specific criteria are met. The Standard also specifies how to measure the carrying amount of intangible assets and requires specific disclosures about intangible assets.
Applies in full with the following adaptation: Following the initial recognition of an intangible asset, for subsequent measurement IAS 38 permits the use of either the cost or revaluation model for each class of intangible asset. Where an active (homogeneous) market exists, intangible assets other than those that are held for sale must be carried at current value in existing use at the reporting period date – that is, the cost option given in IAS 38 has been withdrawn
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
168
Further details in the GAM: 4.204 Also see: IAS 36 Impairment of Assets SIC 32 Intangible Assets – Web Site Costs
and the current value must be based on the market value in existing use. Where no active market exists, entities must revalue the asset, using indices or some suitable model, to the lower of depreciated replacement cost and value in use where the asset is income generating. Where there is no value in use, the asset must be valued using depreciated replacement cost.
IAS 39 Financial Instruments:
Recognition and Measurement
IAS 39 has been superseded by IFRS 9 Financial Instruments. IFRS 9 permits an entity to continue to apply the requirements of IAS 39 to a qualifying financial instrument that is part of a hedging relationship. The relevant sections of IAS 39 have therefore been retained. Further details in the GAM: 4.267, Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments Also see: IFRS 9 Financial Instruments IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures IFRIC 16 Hedges of a Net Investment in a Foreign Operation
HM Treasury has withdrawn the option under IFRS 9 to apply the requirements of IAS 39 to qualifying financial instruments in a hedging relationship. DHSC group bodies therefore may not apply IAS 39.
IAS 40 Investment Property
The objective of IAS 40 is to prescribe the accounting treatment for investment property and related disclosure requirements. Further details in the GAM: 4.244
Applies in full with the following interpretations: All investment property must be accounted for under the fair value model – that is, the option given in IAS 40 to adopt the cost model has been withdrawn. IAS 40 applies in full to all DHSC group bodies that hold (or are constructing or developing) properties only for the purpose of earning rentals or for capital appreciation or both. If earning rentals were an outcome of a regeneration policy, for example, the properties concerned would be accounted for under IAS 16 and note IAS 40.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
169
IAS 41 Agriculture
The objective of IAS 41 is to prescribe the accounting treatment and disclosures related to agricultural activity, which is the management of the biological transformation of biological assets for sale, into agricultural produce, or into additional biological assets.
Not relevant.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
170
IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) Interpretations
IFRIC 1 Changes in Existing
Decommissioning, Restoration and
Similar Liabilities
IFRIC 1 prescribes the accounting for changes in the measurement of an existing decommissioning, restoration and similar liability that result from changes in the estimated timing or amount of the outflow of resources, or a change in the discount rate.
The circumstances are unlikely to arise. If they do, applies in full.
IFRIC 2 Members’ Shares in Co-operative
Entities and Similar Instruments
The entity must consider all the terms and conditions of the financial instrument in determining its classification as a financial liability or equity.
Not relevant.
IFRIC 4 Determining whether an
Arrangement contains a Lease
Determining whether an arrangement is, or contains, a lease shall be based on the substance of the arrangement and requires an assessment of whether: fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use of a specific asset or assets, and the arrangement conveys a right to use the asset. Further details in the GAM: 4.108, 4.229, 5.223. See also:
IAS 17 Leases.
Applies in full.
IFRIC 5 Rights to Interests arising from
Decommissioning, Restoration and
Environmental Rehabilitation Funds
The contributor to a fund shall recognise its obligation to pay decommissioning costs as a
Not relevant.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
171
liability and recognise its interest in the fund separately unless the contributor is not liable to pay decommissioning costs even if the fund fails to pay.
IFRIC 6 Liabilities arising from
Participating in a Specific Market – Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment
A liability for waste management costs for historical household equipment does not arise as the products are manufactured or sold. There is no obligation unless and until a market share exists during the measurement period.
Not relevant.
IFRIC 7 Applying the Restatement
Approach under IAS 29 Financial
Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies
In the reporting period in which the entity first adopts IAS 29, the entity shall apply the requirements of IAS 29 as if the economy had always been hyperinflationary. Also see: IAS 29: Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies
Unlikely to be relevant.
IFRIC 10 Interim Financial Reporting and
Impairment
An entity shall not reverse an impairment loss recognised in a previous interim period in respect of goodwill or an investment in either an equity instrument or a financial asset carried at cost. See also: IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting.
DHSC group bodies are not required to publish interim financial reports at present. Applies in full to a body that elects to do so.
IFRIC 12 Service Concession
Arrangements
IFRIC 12 deals primarily with public-to-private service concession arrangements for the delivery of public services. It applies only to concession agreements where the use of the infrastructure is controlled by the grantor.
The FReM interprets IFRIC 12 to apply ‘mirror accounting’ arrangements to infrastructure service concession arrangements. In practice this means that the assets of most PFI schemes and many NHS LIFT schemes will be accounted for as Property, Plant and Equipment. The application of this interpretation is complex.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
172
Further details in the GAM: Chapter 4 Annex 5: Accounting requirements for PFI/LIFT schemes Also see: SIC 29 Service Concession Arrangements: Disclosures
DHSC group bodies should refer to both Treasury’s guidance ‘Accounting for PPP arrangements including PFI contracts under IFRS’ in chapter 10 of the FReM. The DHSC guidance on accounting for PFI and NHS LIFT under IFRS is available on request from the GAM shared mailbox
IFRIC 14 IAS 19 – The Limit on a Defined
Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding
Requirements and their Interaction
An entity shall determine the availability of a refund or a reduction in future contributions in accordance with the terms and conditions of the plan and any statutory requirements in the jurisdiction of the plan. An entity shall analyse any minimum funding requirement at a given date into contributions that are required to cover (a) any existing shortfall for past service on the minimum funding basis and (b) the future accrual of benefits. If an entity has an obligation under a minimum funding requirement to pay contributions to cover an existing shortfall on the minimum funding basis in respect of services already received, the entity shall determine whether the contributions payable will be available as a refund or reduction in future contributions after they are paid into the plan. Also see: IAS 19 Employee Benefits IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
Potentially relevant where DHSC group bodies have pension assets and liabilities for staff who remain in a Local Government Pension Scheme. The FReM Chapter 6 lists the adaptations and interpretations of IAS 19 relevant to the public sector.
IFRIC 16 Hedges of a Net Investment in a
Foreign Operation
Hedge accounting may be applied only to the foreign exchange differences arising between the functional currency of the foreign operation and the parent entity’s functional currency. Also see: IFRS 9 Financial Instruments IAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates
Unlikely to be relevant.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
173
IFRIC 17 Distributions of Non-cash Assets
to Owners
This Interpretation clarifies how an entity should measure distributions of assets, other than cash, when it pays dividends to its owners.
Applies in full.
IFRIC 19 Extinguishing Financial
Liabilities with Equity Instruments
Unlikely to be relevant.
IFRIC 20 Stripping Costs in the
Production Phase of a Surface Mine
Not relevant.
IFRIC 21 Levies Applies in full.
IFRIC 22 Foreign Currency Transactions
and Advance Consideration
This Interpretation addresses how to determine the date of the transaction for the purpose of determining the exchange rate to use on initial recognition of the related asset, expense or income on the derecognition of a non-monetary asset or liability arising from the payment or receipt of advance consideration in a foreign currency.
Applies in full.
IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax
Treatments
This Interpretation clarifies the accounting treatment when there is uncertainty about income tax treatments under IAS 12. It addresses; when an entity should consider treatments separately, the assumptions to be made about the examination of tax treatments, determination of tax profit, bases, credits and rates and, approach to change in circumstances Also see: IAS 12, Income Taxes
Applies in full.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
174
Standards Interpretation Committee (SIC) Interpretations
SIC 7 Introduction of the Euro
The requirements of IAS 21 regarding the translation of foreign currency transactions and financial statements of foreign operations should be strictly applied to the changeover to the Euro.
Not relevant.
SIC 10 Government Assistance – No
Specific Relation to Operating Activities
Government assistance to entities meets the definition of government grants in IAS 20 even if there are no conditions specifically relating to the operating activities of the entity other than the requirement to operate in certain regions or industry sectors. Such grants shall not be credited directly to equity. Also see: IAS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance
Applies in full with the following interpretations: Parliamentary Supply does not fall within the meaning of government grants. Entities receiving a grant to fund the purchase of a specific asset must credit that grant to the revenue account, unless such conditions are attached to the grant that it cannot be recognised immediately (in which case the value of the receipt will be credited to deferred income).
SIC 15 Operating Leases – Incentives
All incentives for the agreement of a new or renewed operating lease shall be recognised as an integral part of the net consideration agreed for the use of the leased asset, irrespective of the nature of the incentive or the timing of payments. Further details in the GAM: 4.229 Also see: IAS 17 Leases
Applies in full.
SIC 25 Income Taxes – Changes in the
Tax Status of an Entity or its
Shareholders
A change in tax status does not give rise to increases or decreases in amounts recognised directly in equity unless the consequences relate to transactions and events that result in a direct charge or credit to equity.
Not relevant.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
175
SIC 27 Evaluating the Substance of
Transactions Involving the Legal Form of
a Lease
A series of transactions that involve the legal form of a lease is linked and shall be accounted for as one transaction when the overall economic effect cannot be understood without reference to the series of transactions as a whole. Further details in the GAM: 4.229 Also see: IAS 17 Leases
IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with
Customers
Applies in full.
SIC 29 Service Concession
Arrangements: Disclosures
SIC 29 lists the disclosure requirements for service concession arrangements. Further details in the GAM: Chapter 4 Annex 5: Accounting requirements for PFI/LIFT schemes Also see: IFRIC 12 Service Concession Arrangements.
The disclosures must be provided for all PFI and LIFT schemes where they are accounted for as service concession arrangements.
SIC 32 Intangible Assets – Web Site Costs
SIC 32 lays down the conditions for an entity to recognise internal web site development costs as an intangible asset Further details in the GAM: 4.204 Also see: IAS 38 Intangible assets
Applies in full.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
176
Chapter 4 Annex 2: IFRS Standards and
amendments issued but not yet adopted
in the FReM
4.404 The following table presents a list of recently issued IFRS Standards and
amendments that have not yet been adopted within the FReM, and are therefore
not applicable to DHSC group accounts in 2021-22.
Standards issued or amended but not yet adopted in FReM
IFRS 14 Regulatory Deferral Accounts Not UK-endorsed. Applies to first time adopters of IFRS after 1 January 2016. Therefore, not applicable to DHSC group bodies.
IFRS 16 Leases Standard, as interpreted and adapted by the FReM, is to be effective from 1 April 2022.
IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts Application required for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2021. Standard is not yet adopted by the FReM which is expected to be from April 2023: early adoption is not permitted.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
177
Chapter 4 Annex 3: Departures from the
FReM
4.405 HM Treasury accepts that the following are fundamental differences within the
DHSC group leading to some agreed departures from the FReM.
FReM Requirement Departure Applicable to
Companies Act 2006 disclosures on directors’ benefits and remuneration
The information on directors’ other benefits required by section 413 of the Companies Act 2006 (set out in paragraphs 5.71 to 5.72) must be disclosed in a note to the accounts, separate from the directors’ remuneration report. The requirements for the directors’ remuneration report are to be presented separately as part of the annual report, as guided by the FT ARM. The table in Chapter 2 Annex 1 lists the parts of the Companies Act that apply and where guidance can be found in the FT ARM.
NHS foundation trusts only
Public Dividend Capital Public Dividend Capital issued by the department on the creation of new NHS trusts, or written off on the dissolution of NHS trusts, is debited/credited to the General Fund rather than the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Net Expenditure.
Department of Health and Social Care only
FReM 1.2.1: “…all entities (‘reporting entities’), and to funds, flows of income and expenditure and any other accounts (referred to collectively as ‘reportable activities’) that are prepared on an accruals basis and consolidated within Whole of Government Accounts (with the exception of the accounts of any reportable activities that are not covered by an Accounts Direction)”;
Receipts of National Insurance Contributions from the National Insurance Fund are recognised on a cash, rather than accruals, basis.
Department of Health and Social Care only
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
178
Chapter 4 Annex 4 - Valuation Issues
4.406 In considering how best to apply the valuation requirements of IAS 16, Property,
Plant and Equipment, to ensure that the SoFP gives a true and fair view of the
value of the assets at the reporting period, DHSC group bodies should consider
the following guidance (together with extant Treasury guidance).
4.407 Assets which are held for their service potential (i.e. operational assets used to
deliver either front line services or back office functions) must be measured at their
current value in existing use.
4.408 For “in use” non-specialised property assets current value in existing use should
be interpreted as market value for existing use. In the Royal Institution of
Chartered Surveyors; (RICS) “Red Book” (RICS Appraisal and Valuation
Standards), this is defined as Existing Use Value (EUV).
Modern Equivalent Asset (MEA) valuations
4.409 For specialised properties (i.e. those for which no active market exists),
depreciated replacement cost is considered to be a satisfactory approximation of
current value in existing use.
4.410 Within that methodology, the MEA concept is applied: the “replacement cost” is
based on the cost of a modern replacement asset that has the same productive
capacity as the property being valued.
Recognition and measurement
4.411 There is no pre-determined frequency with which assets must be re-valued.
4.412 Instead the Standard requires that asset values should be kept up to date and that
the frequency of revaluation will need to reflect the volatility of asset values.
4.413 Where assets are subject to significant volatility, then annual revaluations may be
required. Conversely, where changes in asset values are insignificant then a
revaluation may be necessary only every 3 or 5 years.
4.414 DHSC group bodies must value their property using the most appropriate valuation
methodology. Such methods might include:
• a quinquennial valuation supplemented by annual indexation and no interim
professional valuation
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
179
• annual valuations, or
• a rolling programme of valuations of properties (whether specialised or non-
specialised).
4.415 It is for valuers, using the RICS Red Book, and following discussions with the
entity, to determine the most appropriate methodology for obtaining either a
current value in existing use or a fair value.
4.416 Where a valuer, following discussion with the entity, determined that depreciated
replacement cost (DRC) is the most appropriate measure of current value in
existing use, entities and their valuers should have regard to the RICS Valuation
Information Paper No. 10. VIP extracts Other detailed valuation guidance has
been published by HM Treasury.
4.417 Where DRC is used as the valuation methodology, entities should normally value
a modern equivalent asset in line with the Red Book.
4.418 Any plans to value a reproduction of the existing asset instead must be discussed
with the relevant national body or DHSC sponsor to determine whether such an
approach is appropriate to the entity’s circumstances.
4.419 Where DRC is used as the valuation methodology, entities must use the “instant
build” approach.
4.420 Generally, the valuation should be gross of VAT, however circumstances may
arise where the asset would be more appropriately valued net of VAT. For
instance, entities may recover VAT on payments for certain contracted-out
services, including the provision of a fully managed and serviced building under a
PFI.
4.421 When revaluing assets arising from a PFI project, entities may take the view that
this should be based on a value excluding recoverable VAT, reflecting the cost at
which the service potential would be replaced by the PFI operator.
4.422 PFI assets must only be revalued exclusive of recoverable VAT where there is
clear evidence that this is appropriate, which must be to the satisfaction of local
auditors. Where an asset was not previously acquired through a route that permits
VAT to be recoverable, and there is no clear indication that VAT would be
recoverable on any replacement, the asset must be valued inclusive of VAT.
4.423 Where DRC is used as the valuation methodology, the choice of an alternative site
will normally hinge on the policy in respect of the locational requirements of the
service that is being provided.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
180
4.424 Where the practical requirements of healthcare delivery, for example, require that
a hospital is located on the same geographical site it now occupies, the valuation
must be based on that site and not an alternative.
4.425 A valuation on an alternative site basis may however be appropriate where it is
clear that the alternative would offer advantages in serving the target population.
4.426 Valuation is ultimately a matter for local valuation experts.
4.427 The cost of enhancements to existing assets (such as building of a new wing
within an existing hospital) must be capitalised during the construction phase as
an asset under construction.
4.428 At the first valuation after the asset is brought into use, any write down of cost
must be treated as an impairment and charged to the revenue account.
Disclosure
4.429 Paragraph 10.1.12 of the FReM requires entities to:
• disclose in the accounting policies note the fact that in use assets are carried at
current value in existing use. Entities must also provide information about the
approach to valuing their estates, including a statement (where applicable) that
alternative sites have been used in DRC valuations
• disclose in the notes on property, plant and equipment the date of the last valuations
of those property assets that are subject to revaluation, and the names and
qualifications of the valuer, and
• discuss in the performance report, where they hold extensive estates: their estate
management strategy, the indicative alternative use values provided by the valuer as
part of the routine valuation work, and what those alternative use values mean in
terms of their estate management policy.
Equipment
4.430 The accounting policy remains that equipment is carried at current value in
existing use. The main consideration is that no material difference should arise in
the financial statements as a consequence of the use of depreciated historical cost
in preference to other possible measures of current cost, including indexation.
4.431 Disclosure must be made in the accounting policies note that assets which are
held for their service potential (i.e. operational assets) and are in use, are
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
181
measured at current value in existing use. For non-specialised assets current
value in existing use is interpreted as market value for existing use.
4.432 Information must also be given about any significant estimation techniques, if
applicable.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
182
Chapter 4 Annex 5: Accounting
requirements for PFI/LIFT schemes
PFI and LIFT
4.433 The relevant standards are IFRIC 12, Service Concession Arrangements, SIC 29,
Service Concession Arrangements: Disclosures, and IPSAS 32, Service
Concession Arrangements: Grantor.
4.434 To determine the appropriate accounting treatment of a PFI scheme, the DHSC
group bodies must, in the first instance, determine whether the scheme falls within
the scope of IFRIC 12.
4.435 A scheme will be within the IFRIC’s scope where an infrastructure asset is
constructed or acquired for the scheme, or is a pre-existing asset of the entity or of
the operator and:
• the entity controls or regulates what services the operator must provide with the
property, to whom it must provide them and at what price, and
• the entity controls – through beneficial entitlement or otherwise – any significant
residual interest in the infrastructure at the end of the term of the arrangement (in
accordance with paragraph 6 of the IFRIC, where the residual interest is not significant
because the property has been used for its entire useful life during the scheme, this
second criteria should be ignored).
4.436 Practitioners should note that although IFRIC 12 only applies to service
concession arrangements which involve a public service obligation, the FReM
includes an interpretation which extends the scope of infrastructure assets to also
include ‘permanent installations for military etc. operations and non-current assets
used for administrative purposes in delivering services to the public’.
4.437 The FReM also extends the scope of the IFRIC to include assets that were
previously owned by the operator. This manual follows the FReM and also adopts
these interpretations.
4.438 Where a scheme falls within the scope of IFRIC 12, the grantor must recognise an
asset of the infrastructure and a corresponding liability in accordance with 10.1.61
of the FReM.
4.439 Paragraph 10.1.55 of the FReM requires the asset and liability to be recognised
when (a) it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
183
infrastructure asset will flow to the entity and (b) the cost of the asset can be
measured reliably.
4.440 Subsequently the infrastructure asset is accounted for as property, plant and
equipment and/or an intangible asset.
4.441 The annual Unitary Payment must be separated between an amount for services
and an amount for the property.
4.442 The services element must be recognised in operating expenses to reflect the
services received.
4.443 The property element must be split between repayment of the financial liability and
an annual finance charge calculated using the implicit interest rate in the scheme
in accordance with 10.1.58 of the FReM.
4.444 If the scheme does not fall within the scope of IFRIC 12, then the entity should
consider whether the scheme is a lease in accordance with IAS 17 or is an
arrangement which contains a lease as defined in IFRIC 4.
4.445 Discounting: where a discount rate implicit in the transaction cannot be
established, the Treasury discount rate used for investment appraisal and arriving
at current asset/liability values is used. HM Treasury’s 'The Green Book: appraisal
and evaluation in central government' refers to this.
4.446 DHSC group bodies must apply Treasury’s guidance Accounting for PPP
arrangements, including PFI contracts, under IFRS, in chapter 10 (10.1.49 et seq.)
of the FReM.
Recognition of assets under PPP or PFI arrangements
4.447 The FReM notes that the grantor (under a service concession arrangement)
should recognise the infrastructure as a non-current asset and value it in the same
way as other non-current assets of that generic type.
4.448 The asset will be recognised when:
• it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the asset will flow to the
organisation, and
• the cost of the asset can be measured reliably.
4.449 The grantor must consider the asset recognition criteria, together with the specific
terms and conditions of the binding arrangement, when determining whether to
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
184
recognise the service concession asset during the period in which the asset is
constructed or developed.
4.450 If the asset recognition criteria have been met, a work-in-progress service
concession asset and associated liability must be recognised. If not and the
grantor makes contributions to the operator in advance of the asset coming into
use, the grantor must account for those payments as prepayments and then set
against the liability established when the asset is recognised.
4.451 Any embedded derivatives in the arrangement and any guarantees to the operator
must be accounted for under financial instrument standards (IAS 32 and IFRS 9).
4.452 Guidance on financial instruments is provided in Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial
Instruments.
4.453 Enhancements/additions to on-SoFP PFI assets that are financed through the
unitary charge must be recognised when they are provided.
4.454 Those financed by the DHSC group body must be recognised as its own asset.
Disclosures
4.455 The disclosure requirements for Public Private Partnerships are set out from
paragraph 5.234.
Service concession arrangements in budgets
4.456 HM Treasury’s budget regime reflects the treatment of economic activity in
National Accounts.
4.457 In many cases, the treatment of PFI, LIFT and other service concessions will differ
from IFRS treatment.
4.458 Under national frameworks and guidance, the contracts will be treated as ‘off-
balance sheet’.
4.459 Assets are recorded ‘off-balance sheet’ if both of the following conditions are met:
• the private partner bears the construction risk, and
• the private partner bears at least one of either availability or demand risk, as designed
in the contract.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
185
4.460 The risks are defined as follows:
(a) Construction risk covers events related to difficulties faced during construction
and to the state of the involved asset(s) at the commencement of services. In
practice it is related to events such as late delivery, non-respect of specified
standards, significant additional costs, legal and environmental issues,
technical deficiency and external negative events (including environmental
risk) triggering compensation payments to third parties.
(b) Availability risk covers cases where, during the operation of the asset, the
responsibility of the partner is called upon because of insufficient management
(“bad performance”), resulting in a volume of services lower than what was
contractually agreed, or in services not meeting the quality standard specified
in the contract.
(c) Demand risk covers the variability of demand (higher or lower than expected
when the contract was signed) irrespective of the performance of the private
partner. In other words, a shift of demand cannot be directly linked to an
inadequate quality of services provided by the partner. However, the
quantitative and qualitative shortfalls have an impact on the effective use of
the service and in some cases exert an eviction effect, but this primarily results
from a bad management of the availability risk. Instead, it should result from
other factors such as the business cycle, new market trends, a change in final
users’ preferences or technological obsolescence. This is part of a usual
“economic risk” borne by private entities in a market economy. Normally the
demand risk is not applicable for contracts where the final user has no free
choice as regards the asset-dependent service provided to them by the
partner.
4.461 There are also other mechanisms, where government re-assumes the majority of
risks of the project, which determine that the asset is recorded on the
government’s balance sheet, independent of the risks above and these should be
considered. These are:
• termination
• majority financing, where the government body finances the majority of the capital
cost, and
• government guarantees.
4.462 For contracts that predate the adoption of IFRS, treatment under national
frameworks and guidance may coincide with that that previously applied under UK
GAAP.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
186
4.463 For the purpose of assessing the budget treatment of ongoing contracts, entities
must always refer to national guidance.
Budget adjustment in summarisation schedules
4.464 Entities are required to complete a note in summarisation schedules quantifying
the differences between IFRIC 12 and national frameworks and guidance
treatments.
4.465 The effect of this note is to calculate an adjustment to budget outturn to reflect the
different treatment of service concession arrangements under national
frameworks.
4.466 This comprises the following elements:
(a) additions and disposals of service concession arrangement assets excluded
from capital outturn
(b) depreciation/impairment and other revenue charges arising from service
concession arrangement assets excluded from resource outturn
(c) revenue charges arising from payments in respect of ‘off-balance sheet’
assets (per national frameworks) included in resource outturn, and
(d) increases in reversionary interest (also known as residual interest) relating to
‘off-balance sheet’ assets (per national frameworks) included in capital outturn.
4.467 The tables in summarisation schedules have been designed to make the
distinction between the two reporting regimes clear. This is described in more
detail in forms completion guidance.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
187
Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments
Introduction
4.468 This annex provides an overview of the accounting requirements for financial
instruments and guidance on how to apply them.
4.469 It describes the applicable IFRS Standards and how they are adapted and
interpreted in the HM Treasury’s Financial Reporting Manual (FReM) and in this
manual.
4.470 IFRS 9, Financial Instruments was published in its completed version in July 2014,
with the intention of replacing the existing Standard, IAS 39, Financial Instruments:
Recognition and Measurement.
4.471 It introduced a new approach to the classification and measurement of financial
instruments, a new ‘expected losses’ model of impairment, and a less restrictive
approach to hedge accounting.
4.472 Additionally, it made extensive amendments to IFRS 7, Financial Instruments:
Disclosures.
4.473 The financial instruments standards are complex and this annex is limited to those
requirements most likely to affect DHSC group bodies.
IFRS Standards
4.474 The relevant standards are:
• IFRS 9, Financial Instruments
• IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation
• IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures.
• IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (where not governed by
the FReM interpretation of hedging arrangements as per paragraph 4.272)
4.475 The accounting for some financial instruments is already covered by specific IFRS
Standards, and these therefore fall outside the scope of the above Standards (with
certain exceptions). These include:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
188
• those interests in subsidiaries, associates or joint ventures that are accounted for in
accordance with IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements, IAS 27, Separate
Financial Statements or IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures (except
where those Standards require or permit an entity to follow IFRS 9)
• rights and obligations under leases to which IAS 17, Leases applies (except for some
derecognition and impairment requirements of IFRS 9, and derivatives embedded in a
lease)
• employers’ rights and obligations under employee benefit plans, to which IAS 19,
Employee Benefits applies
• provisions recognised in accordance with IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities
and Contingent Assets, and rights to payments in reimbursement of expenditure to
settle these
• rights and obligations within the scope of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with
Customers that are financial instruments (except those for which IFRS 15 specifies
that IFRS 9 applies).
4.476 Additionally, the FReM specifies the accounting for public sector entities granting
service concession arrangements within the scope of IFRIC 12, Service
Concession Arrangements, and these are therefore outside the scope of the
financial instruments standards.
4.477 Please see chapter 2 of IFRS 9 for full details regarding the scope of the Standard.
HM Treasury interpretations and adaptations
4.478 HM Treasury has interpreted and adapted IFRS 9 and IAS 32 as set out in the
FReM and adopted in this manual at paragraphs 4.270 and 4.272.
Definition of financial instruments
4.479 IAS 32 defines a financial instrument as “any contract that gives rise to a financial
asset of one entity and a financial liability or equity instrument of another entity.”
4.480 The full definitions for financial assets and liabilities are set out in IAS 32
paragraph 11. For DHSC group bodies, financial assets will usually be:
• cash
• an equity instrument (for instance, a shareholding) of another entity
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
189
• a contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity, or
• a contractual right to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity
under conditions that are potentially favourable to the entity
and financial liabilities will usually be:
• a contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity, or
• a contractual obligation to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another
entity under conditions that are potentially unfavourable to the entity.
4.481 An equity instrument is “any contract that evidences a residual interest in the
assets of an entity after deducting all of its liabilities.”
4.482 Note the applicability of HM Treasury’s adaptation of IAS 32. This expands the
definitions of contract and contractual within IAS 32 to include legislation and
regulation which gives rise to arrangements that in all other respects would meet
the definition of a financial instrument under IAS 32.11, but do not give rise to
transactions classified as a tax.
4.483 The following items are viewed as outside the scope of IFRS 9 and the IFRS 15
contract adaptation:
• Public Dividend Capital
• European Union Emissions Trading Scheme allowances
• early retirement liabilities (with NHS Business Services Authority)
• injury benefit liabilities (with NHS Business Services Authority)
• HMRC payables and receivables (such as VAT).
4.484 Additionally, prepayments are not financial assets because they are contractual
rights to receive goods or services, rather than to receive cash or another financial
asset.
4.485 The following are, or could be, financial assets:
• cash at bank and in hand
• contract and other receivables
• loans receivable
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
190
• investments
• interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures (in the limited situations in
which it is per paragraph 2(a) of the Standard detailing the scope of IFRS 9 and in
application of the FReM's adaptation of group accounting standards for certain ALBs
per paragraph 4.317).
4.486 The following are, or could be, financial liabilities:
• other payables
• loans payable
• provisions (where these arise under contract)
• finance leases
• PFI and LIFT liabilities
Recognition and de-recognition
4.487 Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised when the body becomes a
party to the contractual provisions of the instrument, subject to IFRS 9 paragraphs
B3.1.1 and B3.1.2.
4.488 In particular, entities do not generally recognise assets or liabilities in relation to a
firm commitment to purchase or sell goods or services, until these have been
shipped, delivered or rendered.
4.489 Detailed derecognition requirements for financial assets are set out in IFRS 9
section 3.2. In general, financial assets must be derecognised when:
• the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset have expired, or
• the financial asset has been transferred (for example, sold) in accordance with IFRS 9
paragraphs 3.2.4 and 3.2.5, and substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership
have transferred or control of the asset has otherwise been lost (see IFRS 9
paragraph 3.2.6).
4.490 Financial liabilities must be derecognised when the liability has been extinguished,
that is when the obligation specified in the contract has been discharged or
cancelled or has expired.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
191
Classification and measurement
4.491 IFRS 9 requires entities to classify financial assets and financial liabilities in
accordance with how they are subsequently measured.
Classification of financial assets
4.492 Financial assets must be classified as subsequently measured at:
• amortised cost
• fair value through other comprehensive income, or
• fair value through profit or loss.
4.493 To determine which category applies, entities must consider:
• the business model for managing the financial assets (‘the business model test’), and
• the contractual cash flow characteristics of the financial asset (‘the cash flow test’).
4.494 The business model test requires an entity to consider whether a financial asset is
held within:
4.495 a business model whose objective is to hold financial assets in order to collect
contractual cash flows
• a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash
flows and selling financial assets, or
• any other business model (including one whose objective is achieved primarily by
selling financial assets).
4.496 The cash flow test requires an entity to consider whether the contractual terms of
the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are solely
payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
4.497 The combination of these two tests determines the classification of financial
instruments as set out in the following table:
Business model Solely payments of principal and interest?
Yes No
Collect contractual cash flows
Amortised cost Fair value through profit or loss
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
192
Collect contractual cash flows and sell
Fair value through other comprehensive income
Any other model Fair value through profit or loss
4.498 Additionally, for equity instruments that would otherwise be measured at fair value
through profit or loss, and that are neither held for trading nor contingent
consideration recognised by an acquirer in a business combination to which IFRS
3 applies, an entity may make an irrevocable election at initial recognition to
present subsequent changes in fair value in other comprehensive income.
4.499 An entity may, at initial recognition, irrevocably designate a financial asset as
measured at fair value through profit or loss if doing so eliminates or significantly
reduces a measurement or recognition inconsistency.
4.500 This may apply where a related financial asset and financial liability might
otherwise be measured on different bases. See IFRS 9 paragraphs B4.1.29 to
B4.1.32 for more information.
4.501 Under the above classification criteria, simple debt instruments such as trade
receivables and loans, where these are held in order to collect the amount owing
and any interest charge, will be classified as subsequently measured at amortised
cost.
4.502 Complex instruments, such as derivatives, are likely to fail the cash flow test and
be classified as subsequently measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Classification of financial liabilities
4.503 Financial liabilities must all be classified as subsequently measured at amortised
cost, with the following exceptions (explained in more detail in IFRS 9 paragraph
4.2.1):
• financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
• financial liabilities that arise when a transfer of a financial asset does not qualify for
derecognition or when the continuing involvement approach applies
• financial guarantee contracts
• commitments to provide a loan at a below-market interest rate
• contingent consideration recognised by an acquirer in a business combination to which
IFRS 3 applies.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
193
4.504 Additionally, an entity may, at initial recognition, irrevocably designate a financial
liability as measured at fair value through profit or loss where:
• the liability forms part of a hybrid contract containing one or more embedded
derivatives (see paragraph 4.567) and the host is not an asset within the scope of
IFRS 9, in which case the entire hybrid contract may be designated as at fair value
through profit or loss (see IFRS 9 paragraph 4.3.5)
• doing so eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition
inconsistency (see IFRS 9 paragraphs B4.1.29 to B4.1.32), or
• doing so provides more relevant information for a group of financial liabilities or
financial assets and financial liabilities, which is managed and its performance
evaluated on a fair value basis (see IFRS 9 paragraph 4.2.2(b)).
Initial measurement
4.505 Most financial assets and financial liabilities are measured on initial recognition at
fair value, plus or minus directly attributable transaction costs for financial assets
and financial liabilities not at fair value through profit or loss.
4.506 The fair value of a financial instrument at initial recognition is normally the
transaction price (i.e. the fair value of the consideration given or received). See
IFRS 9 paragraph B5.1.2A where this is not the case.
4.507 Trade receivables must initially be measured at their transaction price, as defined
in IFRS 15, unless they contain a significant financing component and the entity
consequently adjusts the promised amount of consideration for the time value of
money.
4.508 Where future cash flows are discounted to measure fair value, entities must use
the higher of the rate intrinsic to the financial instrument and the real financial
instrument discount rate set by HM Treasury (see Chapter 4 Annex 7 - Treasury
Discount Rates) as applied to the flows expressed in current prices.
Subsequent measurement
4.509 The subsequent measurement of financial assets and financial liabilities is
determined by their classification.
Amortised cost measurement
4.510 Amortised cost measurement applies to simple debt instruments held to collect
contractual cash flows and to most financial liabilities.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
194
4.511 The amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability is the amount at which it
is measured at initial recognition minus the principal repayments, plus or minus the
cumulative amortisation using the effective interest method of any difference
between that initial amount and the maturity amount.
4.512 For financial assets, this must be adjusted for any loss allowance.
4.513 The effective interest method is a method of allocating interest revenue or interest
expense in profit or loss over the relevant period, using the effective interest rate.
4.514 The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash
payments or receipts through the expected life of the financial asset or financial
liability to the gross carrying amount of a financial asset (i.e. before adjusting for
any loss allowance) or to the amortised cost of a financial liability.
4.515 The effect of this is to spread overall returns to calculate a uniform rate of return
over the life of the instrument.
4.516 As an example, consider a loan receivable with a nominal value of £100, which an
entity purchases for £90. Interest is paid to the entity at a rate of 5% over a five-
year term, with the principal repayable at the end of this term. In simple cash
terms, the value of the loan over time is as follows:
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Nominal loan value b/f
100 100 100 100 100
Interest @ 5% 5 5 5 5 5
Repayments received
(5) (5) (5) (5) (105)
Nominal loan value c/f
100 100 100 100 0
4.517 By a process of iteration, the effective interest rate that exactly discounts the
above repayments to the purchase price of £90 can be calculated to be 7.47%.
4.518 The carrying amount of the loan at amortised cost is calculated as the initial
carrying amount increased each year by the effective interest rate and reduced by
each year’s repayments.
4.519 This results in the following amounts recognised as financial assets and interest
revenue:
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
195
Loan carrying value b/f
90.00 91.72 93.57 95.56 97.70
Interest @ 7.47% 6.72 6.85 6.99 7.14 7.30
Repayments received
(5.00) (5.00) (5.00) (5.00) (105.00)
Loan carrying value c/f
91.72 93.57 95.56 97.70 0.00
4.520 This calculation reflects the fact that 5% is not the true rate of interest from the
entity’s perspective, since it acquired the loan for less than its nominal value and
gains an extra benefit when the full nominal value is repaid. This benefit is spread
(i.e. amortised) over the term of the loan.
4.521 Where the only return on an instrument is the nominal interest, this will be the
effective interest rate. If there is no interest or other returns, the effective interest
rate will be nil.
4.522 Taking a simple instance in which a provider is repaying a loan to DHSC, the
effective interest rate would be equal to the nominal rate. As such the loan carried
forward amount would be the value brought forward, less payment of principal and
interest in year.
4.523 IFRS 9 paragraphs B5.4.1 to B5.4.7 describe the effective interest rate further.
See also paragraphs 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 for the application of the effective interest
rate to financial assets that are credit-impaired on purchase or origination, or that
become credit-impaired.
Fair value through other comprehensive income
4.524 Financial assets are measured at fair value through other comprehensive income
if they are simple debt instruments held both to collect contractual cash flows and
to be sold, or if they are equity instruments designated at fair value through other
comprehensive income on initial recognition.
4.525 Gains and losses arising from changes in fair value of financial assets ordinarily
measured at fair value through other comprehensive income are taken to reserves
and reported in the Statement of Comprehensive Income / Statement of
Comprehensive Net Expenditure as part of Other Comprehensive Income / Other
Comprehensive Net Expenditure.
4.526 Exceptions to this are impairment gains or losses and foreign exchange gains or
losses, which are recognised in profit or loss. Amounts taken to reserves in
respect of these assets are reclassified to profit or loss on derecognition of the
financial asset, in accordance with IAS 1.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
196
Irrevocable Election of Equity Instruments
4.527 The Standard enables an irrevocable election to be made at initial recognition, to
measure equity instruments not held for investment nor contingent on
considerations recognised by an acquirer in a business combination under IFRS 3,
at fair value through other comprehensive income.
4.528 The election should be considered on an instrument by instrument basis, as per
paragraph B5.7.1 of the Standard.
4.529 Through using the business model and cashflow tests described in 4.493, the
default approach for equity instruments would be measurement at fair value
through profit or loss.
4.530 An entity may consider there to be a number of advantages in making the
irrevocable election and moving away from the IFRS 9 ‘default approach’ for equity
instruments.
4.531 The election will enable a similar ‘other comprehensive income approach’ for
equity instruments to persist as under IAS 39, such instruments would be held in
the residual ‘available for sale’ category.
4.532 In making the election it should be noted however that a more constrained set of
realised gains or losses will impact on profit or loss, than those described in 4.525.
4.533 Unlike financial assets ordinarily measured as fair value through other
comprehensive income, it is only dividends not representing recovery of part or all
of the cost of the investment, that will be realised in profit or loss in making this
election.
4.534 Gains and losses from changes in the fair value of equity instruments designated
at fair value through other comprehensive income are taken to reserves, but are
not subsequently reclassified to profit or loss also.
4.535 The Standard only allows for the cumulative gain or loss to be transferred within
equity when the election is made.
4.536 As such making the election could reduce the extent to which there is a significant
change in approach on adoption of IFRS 9, whilst also constraining the instances
in which realised gains or losses will impact profit or loss.
4.537 As the election is irrevocable entities should carefully consider the merits of
making the election and bear in mind that an instrument by instrument approach to
the election is permissible under the Standard.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
197
Fair value through profit or loss
4.538 Any financial instruments that are not measured at amortised cost or fair value
through other comprehensive income are measured at fair value through profit or
loss.
4.539 This includes financial assets and financial liabilities designated at fair value
through profit or loss on initial recognition.
4.540 Gains and losses arising from changes in fair value of such financial instruments
are recognised in profit or loss.
Impairment
4.541 IFRS 9 requires the recognition of impairments on an expected losses basis for
financial assets that are debt instruments measured at amortised cost or at fair
value through other comprehensive income.
4.542 The impairment requirements of IFRS 9 additionally apply to lease receivables,
contract assets (as defined in IFRS 15), and certain loan commitments and
financial guarantee contracts (see IFRS 9 paragraph 5.5.1).
4.543 IFRS 9 sets out a three-stage model for impairment, known as the ‘general
approach’.
4.544 An alternative ‘simplified approach’ for trade receivables, contract assets and
lease receivables is also described, and HM Treasury has interpreted IFRS 9 to
mandate the use of the simplified approach, further detail behind which is given
from paragraph 4.555.
General Approach
4.545 Under the general approach, entities must at each stage of the model recognise a
loss allowance for expected credit losses against any of the financial instruments
described in paragraph 4.541.
4.546 Expected credit losses are defined as the weighted average of credit losses, with
the respective risks of a default occurring as the weights. The method of
calculating losses is detailed below from paragraph 4.562.
4.547 At each reporting date, entities must consider whether the credit risk on a financial
instrument has increased significantly since initial recognition (see IFRS 9
paragraphs 5.5.9 to 5.5.11). If it has not, then a loss allowance equal to 12-month
expected credit losses is recognised. This is known as a ‘stage 1’ impairment.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
198
4.548 It is important to note that such a loss allowance is based on an estimate of future
losses and is applicable regardless of whether there is objective evidence of an
actual impairment event.
4.549 If the credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition, then a loss
allowance equal to lifetime expected credit losses is recognised. This is known as
a ‘stage 2’ impairment.
4.550 If the credit risk subsequently improves, then it is possible for a financial
instrument to revert to ‘stage 1’ with a consequent reduction in the loss allowance.
4.551 A ‘stage 3’ impairment occurs when there is evidence that an impairment event
has occurred, and a loss allowance equal to lifetime expected credit losses is
recognised. A financial asset, or part of a financial asset, is written off and
derecognised when the entity has no reasonable expectation of recovering it.
4.552 Note that in relation to interest bearing assets, interest income must be recognised
on the net carrying amount (including any impairment) for an asset undergoing a
‘stage 3’ impairment.
4.553 This differs to interest bearing assets undergoing a ‘stage 2’ impairment, for which
interest income should be recognised on the gross carrying amount, thus
excluding any impairment.
4.554 The difference in treatment reflects the difference as to the permanence of the loss
being incurred.
Simplified Approach
4.555 Under the simplified approach entities may separately opt in some instances and
are mandated in others, to measure the loss allowance at lifetime expected credit
losses at initial recognition.
4.556 This approach therefore removes the need to consider stage 1 impairments.
4.557 Under IFRS 9 entities may opt to employ the simplified approach for;
• all trade receivables that contain a significant financing component in accordance with
IFRS 15
• all contract assets that contain a significant financing component in accordance with
IFRS 15
• all lease receivables in the scope of IAS 17, but this may be applied separately
between finance and operating leases
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
199
4.558 The approach is mandated under IFRS 9 for contract assets and receivables that
do not contain a significant financing component in accordance with IFRS 15.
4.559 The accounting policy choice regarding application of the simplified approach
described in 4.555, has been withdrawn for long term trade receivables, lease
receivables within scope of IAS 17 and contract assets that do contain a significant
financing component (in accordance with IFRS 15) as part of the HM Treasury
interpretation of IFRS 9.
4.560 As such DHSC group bodies must apply the simplified approach to all relevant
financial assets.
4.561 It should be noted that whilst the simplified approach removes the need to
consider whether the credit quality of relevant financial assets has deteriorated
significantly since initial recognition, it may result in a more sizeable loss
allowance being recognisable on initial recognition of the asset than under the
general approach.
Calculation of expected credit losses
4.562 Expected credit losses are the probability weighted losses expected from credit
loss events occurring within a defined period.
4.563 For instance, 12-month expected credit losses are the total losses expected from
any event occurring in the next twelve months, whilst lifetime expected credit
losses are the total losses expected from any event occurring within the lifetime of
the financial asset.
4.564 For financial assets with a term of less than twelve months, these are clearly the
same thing.
4.565 As an example, consider a financial asset valued at £100 that, within the next
twelve months, has a 10% probability of the whole amount becoming
irrecoverable, a 20% probability of half of this amount becoming irrecoverable, and
a 70% probability of full recovery. The 12-month expected credit losses (ECL) are
calculated as:
Calculation of Expected Credit Losses
Value
10% x £100 £10
20% x £50 £10
70% x £0 £0
Total Expected Credit Losses £20
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
200
4.566 The calculation of lifetime expected credit losses follows the same approach, but
using probabilities of default applicable to the whole term of the financial asset.
Embedded derivatives
4.567 A derivative is a financial instrument, or other contract within the scope of IFRS 9,
that has all three of the following characteristics:
• its value changes in response to a change in a specified variable (for example, interest
rate, financial instrument price, commodity price foreign exchange rate, index of prices
or rates, credit rating or credit index)
• it requires no initial investment or a smaller initial investment than for other types of
contracts that would be expected to respond similarly to changes in market factors,
and
• it is settled at a future date.
4.568 An embedded derivative is a component of a hybrid contract with a non-derivative
host that causes some of the cash flows of the combined instrument to vary in a
way similar to a standalone derivative.
4.569 Such a component is only an embedded derivative if it is not contractually
transferable independently of the host. A derivative that does not meet this
requirement is a separate financial instrument.
4.570 Embedded derivatives can arise inadvertently through market practices or through
common contracting arrangements. Examples of host contracts that could have
embedded derivatives include:
• purchase and sale agreements
• debt instruments
• leases
• PFI contracts.
4.571 Contracts rarely make explicit reference to a derivative. Instead they may refer,
for example, to:
• pricing based on a formula
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
201
• right to purchase/sell additional units
• indexed to/adjusted by
• limits
• rights to cancel/extend/repurchase.
Separation of embedded derivatives
4.572 In some circumstances, IFRS 9 requires embedded derivatives to be accounted
for separately from the host contract. In other circumstances, the entire hybrid
contract is accounted for as a single financial instrument.
4.573 An embedded derivative is not separated from the host if:
• the host is an asset within the scope of IFRS 9, or
• the hybrid contract is a financial liability measured at fair value through profit or loss.
4.574 In these circumstances, IFRS 9 is applied to the entire hybrid contract.
4.575 If neither of the above requirements are met, then the embedded derivative is
separated from the host if:
• the economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative and of the host are
not closely related, and
• a separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded derivative would meet
the definition of a derivative.
4.576 In these circumstances, IFRS 9 is applied separately to the embedded derivative,
which is measured at fair value through profit or loss, whilst the host is accounted
for in accordance with whichever IFRS Standards are relevant.
4.577 If the embedded derivative cannot be measured separately, then the entire hybrid
contract is measured at fair value through profit or loss.
4.578 If an embedded derivative is not separated because the conditions in paragraph
4.575 are not met, then the entire hybrid contract is accounted for in accordance
with whichever IFRS Standards are relevant.
4.579 An example of an embedded derivative with characteristics closely related to those
of the host is a lease contract containing an RPI-linked component, where the
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
202
lease is not leveraged and the index relates to inflation in the entity’s own
economic environment. Variations in the index reflect variations in the costs
associated with providing the leased asset and can be considered to be related.
4.580 However, a lease for a photocopier, where part of the price of the contract varies
with the price of paper, is an example of an embedded derivative that is not closely
related. The cost of paper does not have the same economic characteristics or
risks as the lease of the machine. In this case, the embedded derivative would be
accounted for separately from the lease.
Hedge accounting
4.581 Hedging is the use of financial instruments to manage exposure to risk by
offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of another transaction. Hedge
accounting refers to the representation of this risk management in the financial
statements.
4.582 Typically, a relationship is designated between the hedged item, which is exposed
to the specified risk, and a hedging instrument, which varies so as to offset
changes in the hedged item.
4.583 Depending on the nature of the hedge, gains and losses arising from this
relationship are taken either to profit or loss or to a hedging reserve.
4.584 Only qualifying instruments may be designated as a hedging instrument.
4.585 The requirements for this under IFRS 9 are less restrictive than previously existed
under IAS 39, and hedge accounting may therefore be applied in a wider range of
circumstances.
4.586 Nevertheless, it is unlikely that DHSC group bodies will make use of hedge
instruments, and hedging is not described in detail in this annex.
4.587 Where they do enter into hedging arrangements, DHSC group bodies must follow
the guidance in IFRS 9 chapter 6.
Disclosures
4.588 Disclosure requirements for financial instruments are set out in IFRS 7.
4.589 This Standard applies in full, but DHSC group bodies must consider the extent to
which they are exposed to material financial instrument risk and make relevant
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
203
disclosures accordingly, with particular emphasis on significant credit risk from
receivables.
4.590 The following paragraphs outline the main disclosures required by IFRS 7.
Statement of Financial Position
4.591 DHSC group bodies must disclose, either in the Statement of Financial Position or
in the notes, the carrying amounts of financial assets and financial liabilities in
each of the following categories (where relevant):
• Financial assets at amortised cost
• Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (distinguishing between those
mandatorily measured as such and those designated as such on initial recognition)
• Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (distinguishing
between those mandatorily measured as such and equity instruments designated as
such on initial recognition)
• Financial liabilities at amortised cost
• Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss (showing separately any
designated as such and any that meet the definition of held for trading)
4.592 IFRS 7 paragraphs 9 to 11B set out additional disclosures for financial assets and
financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss and equity
instruments designated at fair value through other comprehensive income.
4.593 IFRS 7 paragraphs 12B to 12D set out additional disclosures relevant to
reclassification of financial assets.
Statement of Comprehensive Income (SoCI) / Statement of
Comprehensive Net Expenditure (SoCNE)
4.594 DHSC group bodies must disclose the following, either in the Statement of
Comprehensive Income / Statement of Comprehensive Net Expenditure or in the
notes (where relevant):
• Net gains or losses on each of the categories of financial assets and financial liabilities
set out in paragraph 4.591, including those based on designation. See paragraph 5.43
for further information on the presentation of items in other comprehensive income.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
204
• Total interest revenue and total interest expense for financial assets at amortised cost,
financial assets mandatorily measured at fair value through other comprehensive
income, and financial liabilities not measured at fair value through profit or loss.
• Fee income and expense arising from financial assets and financial liabilities not
measured at fair value through profit or loss.
4.595 Additionally, IFRS 7 paragraph 20A requires an analysis of gains and losses
arising from the derecognition of financial assets at amortised cost, including
reasons for derecognition (such as sale or write off).
Nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments
4.596 IFRS 7 paragraphs 31 to 42 set out disclosures required to enable users of the
financial statements to evaluate the nature and extent of risks arising from
financial instruments to which an entity is exposed. DHSC group bodies should
consider the extent to which these are relevant and provide useful information.
4.597 The disclosures address three main areas of risk:
• Credit risk – the risk that one party to a financial instrument will cause a financial loss
for the other party by failing to discharge an obligation
• Liquidity risk – the risk that an entity will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations
associated with financial liabilities that are settled by delivering cash or another
financial asset
• Market risk – the risk that fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market price (comprising currency risk, interest rate
risk and other price risk)
4.598 Entities must provide various qualitative and quantitative disclosures where these
risks are significant.
4.599 Credit risk is likely to be of greatest significance for DHSC group bodies,
particularly where they hold high values of receivables.
4.600 Disclosures to consider include details of the entity’s exposure to credit risk, its
credit risk management practices, how it determines expected loss allowances,
and reconciliations of movements in loss allowances.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
205
Other disclosures
4.601 IFRS 7 paragraphs 25 to 30 set out additional disclosures required where carrying
amounts may differ from fair value.
4.602 IFRS 7 paragraphs 42A to 42h set out additional disclosures required where
financial assets have been transferred.
Other guidance
4.603 HM Treasury has provided application guidance for IFRS 9.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
206
Chapter 4 Annex 7 - Treasury Discount
Rates
4.604 HM Treasury’s FReM describes the use of discount rates to value general
provisions, leases, post-employment benefit provisions and financial instruments.
HM Treasury sets the standard discount rates each year by means of a Public
Expenditure System (PES) paper.
4.605 For the reporting period ending 31 March 2022, the PES paper is expected to be
released in December 2021. The various rates promulgated via the PES will be
reflected in this annex of the GAM via a Q3 FAQ.
4.606 Cumulative combined inflation and discount rates for up to 50 years are provided
in paragraph 4.621. This table will also be updated on receipt of the revised
discount rates in December 2021.
Summary of discount rates to be applied as at 31 March 2022
4.607 The discount rates to be applied as at 31 March 2021 for general provisions, post-
employment benefits and financial instruments are summarised below.
Rate Type Rate Prior Year Rate
Nominal General Provision Discount Rates
Short-term Minus 0.02%
Medium-term 0.18%
Long-term 1.99%
Very long-term 1.99%
General Provisions Inflation Rates
Year 1 1.2%
Year 2 1.6%
Into perpetuity 2.0%
Post-Employment Benefits Discount Rates
Real Rate Minus 0.95%
Nominal Rate 1.25%
RPI Inflation until February 2030
3.22%
RPI Inflation from February 2030
2.32%
CPI Inflation 2.22%
Financial Instrument Discount Rates
Real Rate 0.7%
Nominal Rate 3.7%
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
207
4.608 The following detail is provided to assist preparers in utilising the various discount
rates.
General provisions
4.609 General provisions discount rates are used to discount future cash flows related to
provisions recognised in accordance with IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities
and Contingent Assets.
4.610 Treasury gives rates for short, medium, long-term and very long-term general
provisions. These are defined as follows:
• Short-term rate: A nominal discount rate to be applied to the cash flows of general
provisions in a time boundary between 0 and up to and including 5 years from the
Statement of Financial Position date.
• Medium-term rate: A nominal discount rate to be applied to the cash flows of general
provisions in a time boundary of after 5 and up to and including 10 years from the
Statement of Financial Position date.
• Long-term rate: A nominal discount rate to be applied to the cash flows of general
provisions in a time boundary of after 10 years and up to and including 40 years from
the Statement of Financial Position date.
• Very long-term rate: A nominal discount rate to be applied to the cash flows of general
provisions in a time boundary exceeding 40 years from the Statement of Financial
Position date.
4.611 Note – it is the timing of the expected cash flow that governs the discount rate
used – the PES papers make no reference to setting discount rates according to
the overall term of the arrangement.
4.612 To arrive at the SoFP balance for a provision with expected cash flows occurring
in each year for 60 years, cash flow should first be inflated, then each of the four
discount rates will need to be applied.
4.613 It would not be appropriate to discount cash flows at the very long-term rate in the
first 40 years simply because the liability is not expected to be wholly discharged
until year 60
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
208
Inflation assumptions
4.614 The central inflation assumptions offered on below paragraph 4.607 have been
provided by HM Treasury.
4.615 They are based on what is judged to be the most statistically reliable measure of
inflation (the Office of Budget Responsibility Consumer Price Index (OBR CPI)
forecasts).
4.616 The OBR CPI inflation rates should be applied across the following time frames:
• Year 1: applied on cash flows up to and including 1 year from the date of the
Statement of Financial Position.
• Year 2: applied on cash flows from after 1 and up to and including 2 years from the
date of the Statement of Financial Position.
• Into perpetuity: applied on cash flows from after 2 years from the date of the Statement
of Financial Position.
4.617 HM Treasury consider the presumption to use OBR CPI inflation rebuttable only in
certain instances.
4.618 It is for each entity to assure itself over the reasonableness of the judgements
made against the following criteria provided by HM Treasury as to when it is
considered acceptable to rebut the presumption of inflating cashflows using OBR
CPI.
4.619 Where no legal or other requirement prohibits the application of OBR CPI inflation,
entities must satisfy themselves that;
• There is a logical basis for not applying OBR CPI inflation rates, in that the proposed
alternative inflation rates would be clearly more applicable to the underlying nature of
the cash flows;
• The proposed alternative inflation rates must be free from management bias. An
indication of this may be an independent or professional assessment of the proposed
alternative inflation rates, such as by a committee, third party or other experts; and,
• The inflation rates instead applied should be based on logical and relevant calculations
and reasonable underlying assumptions. For example, they may be comparable to
existing financial indices or based on historical trends.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
209
4.620 Where a legal requirement exists prohibiting the application of the OBR CPI rates
or requires an adjustment to the rate applied;
• An inflation rate specified by statute or by the courts can be applied instead of OBR
CPI inflation;
• OBR CPI can be adjusted where this is required by statute or by the courts; for
example, in the case of legally enforceable public pension caps; and,
• Where OBR CPI cannot be applied by statute or by the courts, but an alternative rate
or adjustment is not prescribed, a comparative inflation rate must instead be applied
and must fulfil conditions as set out above
4.621 The below table is an excerpt from Annex C of PES (2020) 12 Revised which
provides combined OBR CPI inflation and discount rates for up to 50 years after
the Statement of Financial Position date as at 31 March 2021.
4.622 Annex C offers combined rates for up to and including 200 years. The rates will be
updated in line with the PES published by HM Treasury. This annex is available on
request from the GAM inbox.
Year Inflation rate
Inflation cumulative
Discount rate
Cumulative Combined rate
(a) (b) (c) (d) d=b*c^a
1 1.2% 101.2% 0.0% 101.2209%
2 1.6% 102.8% 0.0% 102.8617%
3 2.0% 104.9% 0.0% 104.9406%
4 2.0% 107.0% 0.0% 107.0616%
5 2.0% 109.1% 0.0% 109.2254%
6 2.0% 111.3% 0.2% 110.0922%
7 2.0% 113.5% 0.2% 112.0909%
8 2.0% 115.8% 0.2% 114.1259%
9 2.0% 118.1% 0.2% 116.1978%
10 2.0% 120.5% 0.2% 118.3073%
11 2.0% 122.9% 2.0% 98.8839%
12 2.0% 125.3% 2.0% 98.8892%
13 2.0% 127.8% 2.0% 98.8944%
14 2.0% 130.4% 2.0% 98.8996%
15 2.0% 133.0% 2.0% 98.9048%
16 2.0% 135.7% 2.0% 98.9100%
17 2.0% 138.4% 2.0% 98.9152%
18 2.0% 141.1% 2.0% 98.9204%
19 2.0% 144.0% 2.0% 98.9257%
20 2.0% 146.9% 2.0% 98.9309%
21 2.0% 149.8% 2.0% 98.9361%
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
210
22 2.0% 152.8% 2.0% 98.9413%
23 2.0% 155.8% 2.0% 98.9465%
24 2.0% 159.0% 2.0% 98.9517%
25 2.0% 162.1% 2.0% 98.9570%
26 2.0% 165.4% 2.0% 98.9622%
27 2.0% 168.7% 2.0% 98.9674%
28 2.0% 172.1% 2.0% 98.9726%
29 2.0% 175.5% 2.0% 98.9778%
30 2.0% 179.0% 2.0% 98.9831%
31 2.0% 182.6% 2.0% 98.9883%
32 2.0% 186.2% 2.0% 98.9935%
33 2.0% 190.0% 2.0% 98.9987%
34 2.0% 193.8% 2.0% 99.0039%
35 2.0% 197.6% 2.0% 99.0091%
36 2.0% 201.6% 2.0% 99.0144%
37 2.0% 205.6% 2.0% 99.0196%
38 2.0% 209.7% 2.0% 99.0248%
39 2.0% 213.9% 2.0% 99.0300%
40 2.0% 218.2% 2.0% 99.0353%
41 2.0% 222.6% 2.0% 99.0405%
42 2.0% 227.0% 2.0% 99.0457%
43 2.0% 231.6% 2.0% 99.0509%
44 2.0% 236.2% 2.0% 99.0561%
45 2.0% 240.9% 2.0% 99.0614%
46 2.0% 245.7% 2.0% 99.0666%
47 2.0% 250.7% 2.0% 99.0718%
48 2.0% 255.7% 2.0% 99.0770%
49 2.0% 260.8% 2.0% 99.0823%
50 2.0% 266.0% 2.0% 99.0875%
Post-Employment Benefits Provisions
4.623 The real discount rate applicable on 31 March 2022 is 0.xx% (the previous year’s
rate was minus 0.95%).
4.624 The rate is applicable for all provisions for continuing obligations arising from
previous employment service.
Financial instruments
4.625 The financial instrument discount rate is used for some financial instruments in
accordance with the requirements of the FReM.
4.626 The FReM states (Table 8.2):
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
211
"Where future cash flows are discounted to measure fair value, entities
must use the higher of the rate intrinsic to the financial instrument and the
real financial instrument discount rate set by HM Treasury (promulgated in
PES papers) as applied to the flows expressed in current prices."
4.627 The real financial instrument discount rate to be applied at 31 March 2022 is 0.x%
(previously 0.7%). The rate as applied to flows expressed in current prices is RPI
+ 0.7%, where the financial instrument is index linked to RPI. Where the financial
instrument is not linked to an inflationary index, and a nominal rate is required,
3.7% may be used.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
212
Chapter 4 Annex 8 – Accounting for
Pooled Budgets and Joint Arrangements
Introduction
4.628 CCGs and NHS providers are increasingly experiencing a wide variety of
healthcare commissioning arrangements.
4.629 To date, such arrangements typically involve two or more CCGs, or combinations
of CCGs and local authorities in co-commissioning arrangements, lead
commissioning and pooled budgets.
4.630 Since 2015, many of these arrangements have been established as part of the
Better Care Fund initiative.
4.631 In accounting for such arrangements, entities must follow the relevant accounting
standards, subject to any adaptations and interpretations set out in this manual.
4.632 This annex provides supplementary guidance, outlining typical arrangements that
exist in the NHS and illustrating how the relevant accounting principles apply.
4.633 This guidance is needed to ensure that all parties to these arrangements have a
clear understanding of their own and their counterparties’ accounting and reporting
requirements and are implementing these consistently.
4.634 This will aid in agreement of balances exercises and successful elimination of
intra-group transactions and balances.
The Better Care Fund (BCF)
4.635 The Better Care Fund initiative was announced in the 2013 Spending Review, and
required CCGs and local authorities to pool funding for the delivery of integrated
health and social care.
4.636 As a result, partnerships of CCGs and local authorities entered into agreements
under section 75 of the NHS Act 2006, overseen by local Health and Wellbeing
Boards.
4.637 These agreements established pooled budgets to enable integrated
commissioning of care from NHS providers. These budgets have been in place
since 2015-16.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
213
4.638 Where CCGs receive ring-fenced BCF allocations, it is a requirement that they
enter into pooled budgets with local authorities, set up under section 75
arrangements.
4.639 NHSE and NHSI has statutory powers to retain or recover funds that are not
applied in accordance with approved plans and through a section 75 pooled
budget agreement.
4.640 Additional information and operating guidance on BCF is available on the NHSE
and NHSI website. This includes a template section 75 agreement and advice on
the drafting of such agreements.
4.641 Whilst BCF is arguably the highest profile example of joint commissioning of
healthcare, it is not unique and its accounting treatment and disclosures do not
differ in principle from other pooled budgets and similar arrangements.
Relevant accounting standards and guidance
4.642 A joint commissioning arrangement or pooled budget may constitute a joint
arrangement, as defined in IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements.
4.643 A joint arrangement exists where two or more parties have joint control of the
arrangement. The concept of control is defined in IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial
Statements.
4.644 Where IFRS 11 indicates that a joint arrangement is a joint venture, the accounting
treatment is set out in IAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures.
4.645 The disclosure requirements for parties with joint control of a joint arrangement are
set out in IFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities.
4.646 Where an entity acquires an interest in a joint operation in which the activity
constitutes a business, IFRS 3 Business Combinations is relevant.
4.647 Where a joint arrangement does not exist, a host to a pooled budget may need to
consider whether it is acting as an agent or principal when it receives funds from
other parties to the pool.
4.648 This is addressed in IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers paragraphs
B34 to B38.
4.649 Regulations for arrangements between NHS bodies and local authorities are set
out in the NHS Act 2006 section 75 and SI 2000 No. 617, NHS Bodies and Local
Authorities Partnership Arrangements Regulations 2000.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
214
Detailed guidance
Overview of pooled budgets
4.650 A pooled budget occurs where a number of partners agree to set aside funds for a
specific purpose that they will pursue jointly, usually because it addresses
common objectives or results in benefits from working together. This implies an
element of joint decision making over how the funds are used.
4.651 In such a pooled budget arrangement, one of the members typically acts as ‘host’.
This usually involves the other members making cash contributions into the pooled
budget, which the host then uses to commission services on behalf of the
contributors.
4.652 All parties to the arrangement will account for a share of the commissioning costs.
The precise accounting will be determined by the terms of the agreement between
these parties.
4.653 However, there is no requirement to physically transfer cash in order to have a
pooled budget arrangement. The statute requires that a memorandum pooled
budget account is maintained by the host but makes no mention of cash transfers.
4.654 The memorandum accounts can be funded by cash that remains with each of the
members, as long as there is a clear understanding set out in the section 75
agreement that members have committed that amount of cash for the purposes of
the pooled budget.
4.655 It is important to remember that a pooled budget is simply an aggregation of
balances that belong to the pooled budget members, rather than an entity in its
own right.
4.656 In considering how to account for pooled budget transactions, members will need
to consider the nature of their relationship with other members of the pool and with
providers of services to the pool. This is discussed in greater detail below.
4.657 Members must not record transactions with the pool as though it were a separate
entity.
4.658 Pooled budget agreements must therefore provide that the hosting body will
supply members and providers on a timely basis with all the financial data needed
to allow them to analyse and report their transactions.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
215
4.659 In particular, pool members and providers must be given on at least a quarterly
basis, and soon enough to be useful, statements that detail their underlying
transactions with the appropriate pool member counterparty.
4.660 Cash contributions to the pooled budget do not constitute expenditure. Members
must apply the usual accruals concept to the recognition of expenditure for
services delivered, and should not confuse this with the movement of cash.
Identifying joint arrangements and agency relationships
4.661 Members will need to consider the precise nature of the contractual terms
contained in section 75 and other agreements to determine the appropriate
accounting treatment for a pooled budget or collaborative working arrangement.
4.662 While the joint nature of such agreements may suggest a joint arrangement, as
defined in IFRS 11, the detail of each agreement might point to a different
approach.
4.663 Given that a pooled budget might contain distinct funding streams for a variety of
commissioning arrangements, it is possible that different accounting treatments
will apply to different elements. Each must therefore be considered separately.
4.664 As a first stage, members will need to understand what rights, obligations and
powers are conferred on members through the contractual arrangements.
Crucially, it is necessary to determine where control of the operation lies.
Control
4.665 IFRS 11 defines a joint arrangement as ‘an arrangement of which two or more
parties have joint control’. To establish whether joint control exists, it is first
necessary to determine whether all of the parties, or a group of them, collectively
control the arrangement.
4.666 IFRS 10 states that an investor controls an investee if and only if it has all the
following:
• power over the investee
• exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee, and
• the ability to use its power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor’s
returns.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
216
4.667 Power arises from the rights of the investor, and exists where the investor has
existing rights that give it the current ability to direct the relevant activities, that is
the activities that significantly affect the investee’s returns.
4.668 If a single entity controls the arrangement under these criteria, then that entity
would consolidate the arrangement. This is unlikely to be the case in a genuine
instance of collaborative working.
4.669 If two or more entities control the arrangement collectively, then a joint
arrangement may exist. For this to be the case, the entities must exercise joint
control.
4.670 Joint control exists only when decisions about the relevant activities require the
unanimous consent of the parties that collectively control the arrangement.
4.671 The accounting does not automatically follow the legal provisions contained in the
pooled budget agreement. Members must consider the underlying substance of
the arrangement and agree whether joint control exists.
4.672 If joint control does not exist, because unanimous consent is not required, then a
joint arrangement does not exist. In this case, it is necessary to refer to IFRS 15
to consider whether the parties are in an agency relationship.
4.673 This approach to categorising collaborative working arrangements is summarised
in figure 1 below.
Joint arrangements
4.674 There are two types of joint arrangements: ‘joint operations’ and ‘joint ventures’.
4.675 A joint operation is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control
have rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, relating to the
arrangement.
4.676 This applies to all joint arrangements not structured through a separate vehicle,
which is likely to be the case for a pooled budget. Even where a separate vehicle
is involved, the arrangement may still be a joint operation.
4.677 Joint operators will need to account for the assets, liabilities, revenues and
expenses relating to their interest in the joint operation in accordance with the
applicable accounting standards.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
217
4.678 A joint venture is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control
have rights to the net assets of the arrangement. This must involve a separate
vehicle, but this alone does not ensure the arrangement is a joint venture.
4.679 Joint venturers will need to account for their interest in a joint venture as an
investment, in accordance with IAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint
Ventures.
Agency relationships
4.680 Where a collaborative working arrangement does not constitute a joint
arrangement, the participants will need to consider whether they are in an agency
relationship.
4.681 The host of a cash pool will be in receipt of contributions from other members of
the pool. The host must therefore consider whether these receipts constitute
revenue. This is addressed in IFRS 15, which defines the roles of principal and
agent.
4.682 An entity is acting as a principal when it makes a performance obligation to
provide specified goods or services to a customer, for which it must control the
specified good or service before it is transferred to the customer.
4.683 Where the nature of the performance obligation is to arrange for goods or services
to be provided by another party, the entity is acting as an agent on behalf of the
principal.
4.684 Participants of a pooled budget must therefore agree whether the host is acting as
an agent or principal.
4.685 This is particularly important for the purposes of agreement of balances and
elimination of intra-group transactions.
4.686 The ultimate provider of services must also understand this relationship, as it will
determine whom they consider to be their customer.
4.687 Indicators that the host is acting as an agent include:
• the members having agreed that each has the power to veto the engagement with any
given provider
• the members jointly having the power to hold end-providers to account for delivery,
cost, timeliness and quality, or
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
218
• all the risks associated with any given contract being borne equally by the members,
for instance increases in the charges payable for services delivered by the provider.
4.688 In an agency relationship, the host does not treat amounts collected on behalf of
the principal as revenue. These amounts simply pass through the agent, and are
accounted for on a net basis.
4.689 Indicators that the host is acting as a principal include:
• the members having contracted with the host in terms that make the host solely
responsible for the delivery of services
• the members having agreed to delegate authority to the host to select end-providers
and to manage the contract delivery with minimal or no reference to other members, or
• the host being subject to a greater degree of risk in respect of the contract
performance than the other members, for instance having to absorb increases in the
charges payable to end-providers.
4.690 Where the host acts as principal, it treats amounts collected from other parties to
the pool as revenue. It accounts for these amounts, and payments to the ultimate
provider, on a gross basis.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
219
Figure 1 – Categorisation of collaborative working relationships
Accounting for joint arrangements and pooled budgets
4.691 Once the nature of an entity’s interest in a collaborative working arrangement has
been established, following the approach set out above, the relevant accounting
guidance below must be applied.
Joint ventures
4.692 A joint venture must involve a separate vehicle. As pooled budgets and co-
commissioning are unlikely to operate on this basis, this guidance does not
address joint ventures in detail.
4.693 Where a joint venture exists, NHS bodies and DHSC ALBs (other than DHSC
agencies) must account for their interest as an investment using the equity
method, as set out in IAS 28.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
220
4.694 Core DHSC and DHSC agencies must apply IAS 28 in accordance with the
adaptation set out in Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the
DHSC group.
Joint operations
4.695 The accounting treatment for an interest in a joint operation is set out in IFRS 11
paragraphs 20-23. Specifically, a joint operator must recognise:
(a) its assets, including its share of any assets held jointly
(b) its liabilities, including its share of any liabilities incurred jointly
(c) its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint
operation
(d) its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation, and
(e) its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly.
4.696 An entity’s share of the assets, liabilities, revenue and expenditure of the joint
operation will be determined by the agreement establishing the arrangement.
4.697 Where the joint operation does not involve a separate vehicle, parties to the joint
operation will not transact with it as an entity in its own right. Transactions are
therefore with the entities that interact with the joint operation.
4.698 The effect of this is essentially the same as for net accounting arrangements, as
described below.
4.699 Each joint operator will recognise its share of any expenditure with providers as
well as any payable or receivable balances. It will treat this expenditure as being
with the providers, not the host.
4.700 Although the host may be responsible for making payments to providers, it will
only recognise expenditure for its own share of these payments and will net the
amounts it pays on behalf of other members against the contributions it receives
from them.
4.701 However, for agreement of balances purposes, joint operators and providers will
treat the host as the counterparty for payables and receivables, in recognition of its
role in settling these, and the host will recognise corresponding payables and
receivables.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
221
Other pooled budgets – net accounting
4.702 As described above, where joint control does not exist and the host of a pooled
budget is acting as an agent, net accounting applies.
4.703 This means that the receipts the host receives from other members of the pool are
not recognised as income and are effectively netted off against the payments it
makes on their behalf.
4.704 Each entity must account for its share of the transactions as though it were
transacting directly with the ultimate counterparty.
4.705 This applies to expenditure and revenue (although a typical co-commissioning
arrangement will not generate revenue) with providers (including for agreement of
balances purposes).
4.706 Members of the pool will treat the host as the counterparty for payables or
receivables, in recognition of its role in settling these, and the host will recognise
corresponding payables and receivables with them.
4.707 Cash contributions to the pool are considered to be transactions with the host.
Members must record a receivable from the host for any such amounts paid, until
such time as the cash is used to pay providers. Likewise, the host must record
corresponding payable amounts.
Example - Net accounting in agency relationship
Consider a pooled budget arrangement between a CCG and a local authority, where the
local authority acts as host on an agency basis. The CCG contributes cash of £4m, whilst
the local authority contributes cash of £6m. It is assumed that the activity of the pooled
budget is shared in direct proportion to these amounts, although it is possible for an
agreement to specify a more complex split.
The first transaction is the payment of £4m from the CCG to the local authority. Initially,
the CCG recognises this as an amount receivable from the local authority. It does not
recognise any expenditure at this stage. The local authority, likewise, recognises a
payable to the CCG. Together with its own £6m contribution, the local authority now holds
a cash pot of £10m.
The pooled budget members then commission services from providers (of which there
may be examples in more than one sector). The local authority settles invoices worth £3m
from the pool for services delivered. Under net accounting, it only recognises its own
share of £1.8m as expenditure with providers. The remaining £1.2m relating to the CCGs
share is treated as reducing the local authority’s payable back to the CCG. The CCG,
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
222
meanwhile, recognises £1.2m expenditure with providers and reduces its receivable from
the local authority. The providers recognise a total of £3m income, split between the local
authority and CCG as customers.
At the end of the reporting period, it is agreed that a further £1m of services have been
delivered that have yet to be invoiced. The local authority and CCG accrue a further
£0.6m and £0.4m expenditure with providers respectively. Additionally, the CCG
recognises an accruals payable to the local authority. The local authority recognises a
corresponding receivable from the CCG, and an accruals payable for the full £1m with the
providers. The providers accrue corresponding income with the relevant counterparties,
but recognise an accruals receivable from the local authority only.
When the local authority eventually settles the accrued amount in cash, it offsets its
receivable from the CCG against the payable it raised upon receipt of cash into the pooled
budget, reflecting the fact that this cash has now been used. The CCG mirrors this
offsetting in its own accounts.
These transactions are illustrated in figure 2 below.
4.708 For agreement of balances purposes, it is important to note that the counterparty
for income and expenditure may not be the direct source or recipient of a payment.
4.709 Entities must consider the substance of each element of the arrangement and note
the identity of the ultimate commissioner or provider.
4.710 For this reason, it is essential that there is effective sharing of information to
ensure entities can identify when to recognise a transaction and against which
counterparty. Counterparties for payables and receivables will reflect the
expected source and destination of cash payments.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
223
Figure 2 – Illustration of net accounting in agency relationship
Other pooled budgets – gross accounting
4.711 Where joint control does not exist and the host of a pooled budget is acting as a
principal, gross accounting applies.
4.712 This means that the receipts the host receives from other members of the pool are
treated as revenue and not netted off against the payments it makes to ultimate
providers.
4.713 Each entity must account for its direct dealings with other parties to the pool as
though no other party is involved.
4.714 This effectively means that the host acts as provider to the other commissioners,
whilst the ultimate providers consider only the host to be their customer.
4.715 Consider the same example as above, with the local authority now acting as
principal. The first transaction is still the contribution by the CCG of £4m to the
pooled budget, which it still treats as a receivable from the local authority –
effectively a prepayment.
4.716 The local authority commissions services from providers in order, in turn, to
provide services to the CCG. When it settles invoices worth £3m for services
delivered, it recognises the whole amount as expenditure with providers. At the
same time, it recognises £1.2m income from the CCG and reduces its payable to
the CCG. The providers recognise all of their £3m income as being from the local
authority.
4.717 When a further £1m of accrued services are identified, the local authority again
recognises the whole amount as expenditure with providers, and also recognises a
CCG contributes cash to pooled budget (hosted by LA)
CCG LA
Dr Receivable from LA 4.0 Cr Payable to CCG 4.0
Cr Cash 4.0 Dr Cash 4.0
LA contributes cash to pooled budget
No accounting entries.
LA settles invoices for services from providers
CCG LA
Dr Services from providers 1.2 Dr Services from providers 1.8
Cr Receivable from LA 1.2 Dr Payable to CCG 1.2
Cr Cash 3.0
Accrual for uninvoiced services from providers
CCG LA
Dr Services from providers 0.4 Dr Services from providers 0.6
Cr Accruals with LA 0.4 Dr Receivable from CCG 0.4 Balances at end of reporting period
Cr Accruals with provider 1.0
LA2.4m Expense - Providers
(2.8m) Payable - CCG0.4m Receivable - CCG(1.0m) Accrual - Providers
1.0m Cash movement
CCG1.6m Expense - Providers
2.8m Receivable - LA(0.4m) Accrual - LA(4.0m) Cash movement
Pooled budget7m
6m
Provider(1.6m) Income - CCG
(2.4m) Income - LA1.0m Receivable - LA3.0m Cash movement
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
224
£1m accrual with providers. It then recognises £0.4m income from the CCG and
reduces its payable to the CCG accordingly.
4.718 The CCG will then have recognised a total of £1.6m expenditure with the local
authority, and will have reduced its receivable from them to £2.4m. It does not
recognise any balances with the ultimate providers.
4.719 These transactions are illustrated in figure 3 below.
4.720 This approach reduces the need for information sharing, as each entity only
recognises amounts in relation to the entities with which it deals directly.
4.721 The timing of expenditure recognition by the CCG is still determined by the actual
delivery of services by the ultimate provider.
4.722 Where a gross accounting arrangement exists, this may have the effect of
grossing up transactions in the DHSC group account.
4.723 This will occur, for instance, where a CCG recognises expenditure with a local
authority for services that are ultimately delivered by an NHS provider.
4.724 In this case, the group account will include both the expenditure and income
arising from this, without any elimination.
4.725 This is not an error, and simply reflects separate transactions with entities outside
the group.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
225
Figure 3 – Illustration of gross accounting where host acts as principal
Cash management
4.726 The principles set out in HM Treasury’s Managing Public Money apply to cash
management of pooled budgets.
4.727 The following sections of the guidance are particularly important:
"A5.6.2 Public sector organisations should where possible hold their cash
balances with the Government Banking Service (GBS). This makes it
possible to sweep the contents of these accounts to high level Exchequer
accounts so that at the end of each working day the Debt Management
Office (DMO) can assess the government’s cash position overall.
A5.6.4 Good cash management means having the right amount of cash
available when needed, without inefficient unused surpluses. Each public
sector organisation should plan its own cash management efficiently."
4.728 CCGs operate on the Government Banking Service platform, whereas local
authorities have separate banking arrangements.
4.729 Therefore, where a local authority is host to a pooled budget, CCGs must not
transfer cash to the local authority in any month which precedes the operational
requirement to expend the cash with service providers.
CCG contributes cash to pooled budget (hosted by LA)
CCG LA
Dr Receivable from LA 4.0 Cr Payable to CCG 4.0
Cr Cash 4.0 Dr Cash 4.0
LA contributes cash to pooled budget
No accounting entries.
LA settles invoices for services from providers
LA
Dr Services from providers 3.0
Cr Cash 3.0
LA recognises income from CCG
CCG LA
Dr Services from LA 1.2 Cr Income from CCG 1.2
Cr Receivable from LA 1.2 Dr Payable to CCG 1.2
Balances at end of reporting period
Accrual for uninvoiced services from providers
LA
Dr Services from providers 1.0
Cr Accruals with provider 1.0
LA recognises income from CCG
CCG LA
Dr Services from LA 0.4 Cr Income from CCG 0.4
Cr Receivable from LA 0.4 Dr Payable to CCG 0.4
LA4.0m Expense - Providers
(1.6m) Income - CCG(2.4m) Payable - CCG(1.0m) Accrual - Providers
1.0m Cash movement
CCG1.6m Expense - LA
2.4m Receivable - LA(4.0m) Cash movement
Pooled budget7m
6m
Provider(4.0m) Income - LA
1.0m Receivable - LA3.0m Cash movement
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
226
4.730 Any other payment arrangement, such as quarterly transfer, will not be
appropriate.
4.731 Therefore, when transferring cash, the CCG must ensure that the host has
provided verifiable evidence of the requirement to expend the cash with service
providers in the month of transfer.
4.732 Where a CCG is hosting a pooled budget the existing Government Banking
Service account must be used for all BCF receipts and payments.
4.733 A CCG must not use any other banking facility for BCF related transactions.
4.734 HM Treasury’s prohibition of drawing down cash in advance of need is particularly
relevant to the management of pooled budgets.
4.735 While a host entity, quite reasonably, might wish to maintain a cash float such that
it is not compelled to use its own supplies of cash to fund pooled budget
expenditure, the balance must be kept to the minimum required to ensure smooth
operation of the arrangement.
4.736 Pooled budget agreements should mandate appropriate information requirements
so that the pooled budget manager is able to monitor contract spend, accurately
profile future expenditure and cash requirements, and ensure that cash balances
held in the pool are minimal.
4.737 Pooled budget members will need to maintain their own memorandum accounts
that show day-to-day cash funding of the pool. These do not form part of entities’
own statutory accounts.
BCF Cash Forecasting/Drawdown – Guidance for CCGs
4.738 The monthly CCG cash forecast/drawdown elements that relate to BCF will require
separate disclosure on the CFF1 forms.
4.739 The following totals will require disclosure as part of the monthly CFF1
submission:
• total annual BCF cash plan with monthly phasing
• drawdown request for cash transfer to BCF pooled budgets hosted by local authorities
• drawdown request for payment to providers under CCG hosted BCF pooled budget.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
227
Drawdown request for BCF cash payments not under pooled budget
arrangements
4.740 CCG monthly BCF annual cash drawdown requests will be reviewed centrally and
via regional teams against Revenue Resource Limits and challenged where
necessary.
4.741 This will help ensure that BCF drawdown requests are not in advance of monthly
operational need to pay providers.
Other reporting requirements
4.742 A party to a pooled budget may include details of the arrangement in its financial
statements, including a note of its share of the income and expenditure and
balances of the pooled budget.
4.743 The extent of any disclosure required will depend on materiality and on the
accounting standards applied.
4.744 Working papers will be needed to support accounts entries that result from pooled
budget activities.
4.745 Under section 75 and associated regulations (SI 2000 No. 617, NHS Bodies and
Local Authorities Partnership Arrangements Regulations 2000), a pooled budget
manager is required to submit quarterly and annual reports to other members to
cover the income to, and expenditure from, the pooled fund, and other information
by which the members can monitor the effectiveness of the arrangements.
4.746 This minimum requirement will not be sufficient to meet the needs of NHS pooled
budget members and providers, as:
• timeframes are not specified
• financial reporting requirements of CCGs far exceed the headline reporting of income
and expenditure, and
• the regulations are silent on the data requirements of NHS providers, which mirror
those of NHS members.
4.747 CCGs need to fulfil cash management requirements, and so will need reports from
host bodies on a monthly basis.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
228
4.748 NHS providers will need statements from the pooled budget host to ensure that
providers can identify their correct counterparties and transactions and balances
with them.
4.749 These statements will be required on at least a quarterly basis and in time to meet
deadlines for agreement of balances exercises and submission of accounts.
4.750 Parties to a pooled budget must therefore agree appropriate reporting
arrangements.
New Models of Care
4.751 Under New Models of Care proposals, some NHS bodies will enter into
arrangements to provide integrated care on a ‘whole population’ basis. This is
likely to involve collaborative working agreements that may constitute joint
arrangements and may involve separate vehicles.
4.752 Until the organisational forms of providers under these arrangements become
clear, it is not possible to provide detailed accounting guidance. However, it is to
be expected that the accounting will follow the principles set out in this annex.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
229
Chapter 4 Annex 9: Reporting
requirements on change of status
4.753 This annex provides information to all users on the reporting requirements arising
from a change in entity status.
4.754 Entities should consult the subsection relevant to their circumstances. Not all of
the guidance included in this annex will apply to every entity.
4.755 Information on the accounting treatment of such changes in status can be found in
paragraphs 4.391
NHS trusts attaining NHS foundation trust status
Action for NHS trusts
4.756 The trust is responsible for reporting its financial position for the period it was an
NHS trust both prior to and post its authorisation as an NHS foundation trust in
accordance with the national timetable issued by NHSE and NHSI.
4.757 It is important that all trusts (including those subject to mid-year transactions)
adhere to the national timetable.
4.758 The trust must ensure that there are adequate resources available post
authorisation to continue to provide NHSE and NHSI with robust monitoring
information until the financial year end in accordance with the national timetable.
4.759 The trust must also ensure that there are robust arrangements in place to respond
promptly to any queries arising as a result of the reporting requirements or ad hoc
queries in respect of the period prior to authorisation.
4.760 Further guidance regarding the completion of summarisation schedules and
practical issues on change of status is obtainable by contacting NHSE and NHSI,
who will advise trusts on the course of action most appropriate to the
circumstances.
4.761 For the equivalent requirements on transition to foundation trust status, see
paragraph 4.762 below.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
230
Action for NHS foundation trusts
4.762 When an NHS trust is authorised as an NHS foundation trust, an ARA must still be
published for the final period of the NHS trust’s existence.
4.763 This may cover a full financial year where the change in status occurs on 1 April or
a shorter period where the change in status occurs during the financial year.
4.764 NHS foundation trusts will be required to prepare the final accounts and
summarisation schedules for the predecessor NHS trust and meet the deadlines
set by NHSE and NHSI.
4.765 NHS foundation trusts should be aware that auditors may require the NHS trust
accounts to be prepared in accordance with the NHS foundation trust deadline,
where earlier, in order for the auditor to issue their report on the NHS foundation
trust accounts as the opening balances of the foundation trust are provided by the
closing balances in the NHS trust accounts.
4.766 A public meeting must be held by 30 September following the end of the financial
year in which the NHS foundation trust was authorised at which the predecessor
NHS trust’s ARA for the final period of NHS trust status must be presented.
4.767 The ARA and summarisation schedules for the final period of NHS trust status
must be prepared in accordance with this manual.
4.768 Two separate sets of ARAs for the final NHS trust period and first period as an
NHS foundation trust must be prepared.
4.769 Where an NHS foundation trust is authorised from 1 April, there is no requirement
to include prior year comparatives for the Statement of Comprehensive Income
(SoCI), Statement of Changes in Taxpayers’ Equity (SoCTE) and Statement of
Cash Flows (SoCF).
4.770 However, the opening Statement of Financial Position (SoFP) must be included in
the accounts and some supporting notes will have to include an opening balance.
4.771 The note for mid-year authorised NHS foundation trusts in the summarisation
schedules, issued by NHSE and NHSI, is also required to be completed.
4.772 These must be drawn up in accordance with the provisions of this manual.
4.773 Where an NHS foundation trust is authorised part way through a financial year,
two part-year sets of accounts are required.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
231
4.774 The first part-year accounts in respect of the predecessor NHS trust must be
prepared in accordance with this manual as applicable to NHS trusts.
4.775 The second part-year accounts in respect of the NHS foundation trust must be
prepared in accordance with this manual as applicable to NHS foundation trusts.
4.776 Opening balances for the SoFP and related notes as at the date of the NHS
foundation trust’s establishment must be disclosed but no other comparatives are
required.
4.777 These must be drawn up in accordance with the provisions of this manual.
4.778 An NHS foundation trust which is authorised part way through a financial year will
show only part year comparatives against its full year results in its second year of
operation.
4.779 The difference in accounting periods must be explained in a narrative note to the
accounts.
New NHS trusts and foundation trusts in their first period of
operation
4.780 This section does not apply where an NHS trust is authorised as an NHS
foundation trust, covered in the separate section outlined in paragraph 4.756
onwards.
4.781 An NHS trust or foundation trust may be created directly as a new body, rather
than, for instance, an NHS trust attaining foundation trust status.
4.782 Where such a body takes over the functions of previous bodies, related assets and
liabilities will transfer to the new body through transfer by absorption, as described
from paragraph 4.368.
4.783 The new provider will therefore begin with a nil opening balances and will record
inward absorption transfers immediately following its creation.
4.784 It is not required to disclose a nil comparative SoFP and nil opening positions for
related notes. Instead the new provider must disclose a comparative SoFP and
related notes as at the date of authorisation after recording the initial transfer(s) by
absorption from predecessor organisations.
4.785 The SoCTE must separately identify the equity transferring as a result of the
opening absorption transfers.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
232
4.786 The first row in the SoCTE will be ‘opening transfers by absorption’, recording the
effect of the absorption gain or loss on the income and expenditure reserve, with a
further row showing transfers between reserves for the absorption transactions if
necessary.
4.787 The row for ‘surplus/deficit for the year’ must be renamed to exclude the effect of
the opening transfer by absorption on surplus/deficit.
4.788 Any separate transfer by absorption (not part of the opening position of the entity)
must be shown in subsequent rows as normal.
NHS trusts and foundation trusts in their final period of
operation
4.789 This section does not apply where an NHS trust is authorised as an NHS
foundation trust, covered in the separate section outlined in paragraph 4.756
onwards.
Preparation of annual report and accounts
4.790 Where an NHS provider ceases to exist during or at the end of a financial year, the
ARA must be prepared for that period in accordance with this manual.
4.791 The ARA must be prepared for the period from 1 April up to the date that the NHS
provider ceased to exist.
4.792 This date may be considered to be the day before the date cited in a transfer order
and/or legislation which transfers assets and liabilities to other bodies and
dissolves the trust at midnight on that date.
4.793 For example if the trust is dissolved on 1 October (at midnight), it is reasonable to
prepare for the final period accounts as at 30 September, immediately prior to the
outward transfers.
4.794 Where 31 March is used to reference the end of the reporting period elsewhere in
this manual, it must be replaced with the date at which the accounts are being
prepared.
4.795 The final period ARA must be submitted in line with the DHSC Group Annual
Report and Accounts Plan 2021-22.
4.796 When an NHS provider ceases to exist and its services, assets and liabilities are
transferring to one or more NHS bodies or the Secretary of State, one of the
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
233
receiving bodies will assume responsibility for the preparation of the final period
ARA.
4.797 Where the transfer and closure occur significantly earlier than 31 March, the
receiving body may wish to prepare the final period accounts in advance of the
deadlines described in the DHSC Group Annual Report and Accounts Plan 2021-
22.
4.798 The ARA can only be finalised once the post-consultation FT ARM and/or GAM for
that year has been issued.
4.799 The receiving body will also be asked to provide a later “Events after the Reporting
Period” confirmation to NHSE and NHSI for the purposes of the consolidated trust
or foundation trust accounts and the whole of government accounts.
4.800 The chief executive of the nominated receiving body referred to in paragraph
4.796 will be required to take on the role of accounting officer for this final period
ARA.
4.801 The chief executive must ensure he or she is able to obtain the necessary
assurances to enable them to make the required declarations.
4.802 NHS providers are reminded to refer to paragraphs 4.18 to 4.27, which set out
how the going concern concept is adapted for the public sector. This definition will
continue to apply to the final period ARA.
4.803 Where an NHS provider in special administration has ceased to provide services
and its provider licence has been revoked during the year but the entity continued
to exist at the end of the financial year, it remains that provider’s responsibility to
prepare an ARA for the year and have it audited.
4.804 The ARA will be prepared for the full financial year and must be prepared in
accordance with the requirements of this manual.
4.805 It is likely that such a shell organisation will have arrangements in place with
another entity (probably a receiving body for its former services) to prepare the
ARA on its behalf, but it is the accounting officer of the now unlicensed provider
who will certify the ARA.
Practical arrangements for annual reports and accounts
4.806 The National Health Service Act 2006 sets out a requirement that an NHS provider
must present its ARA to the board, in the case of an NHS trust (Schedule 15), or to
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
234
the council of governors, in the case of a foundation trust (paragraph 28, Schedule
7).
4.807 This requirement does not apply to the final period ARA, because the board or
council of governors for that provider will no longer exist when the final period ARA
is prepared.
4.808 NHS trusts only: A public meeting must be held by the successor body by 30
September following the end of the financial year in which the NHS trust ceased to
exist. The NHS trust's ARA for its final period of operation must be presented.
4.809 NHS foundation trusts only: The requirement in paragraph 25(4a), Schedule 7 of
the National Health Service Act 2006 that an NHS foundation trust’s ARA must be
laid before Parliament will continue to apply.
4.810 This responsibility will fall to the receiving body referred to in paragraphs 4.796.
Where the foundation trust continues to exist but is unlicensed at the end of the
financial year, that foundation trust is responsible for ensuring the ARA is laid
before Parliament, although this may be performed with the support of another
organisation as envisaged by paragraph 4.803.
Content of accounts and summarisation schedules: for an NHS provider that
ceased to exist during the year
4.811 The transfer of assets and liabilities to receiving NHS bodies will be accounted for
under absorption accounting as set out from paragraph 4.368.
4.812 The date at which the final period accounts are prepared may be immediately prior
to the outward transfer, as envisaged by paragraph 4.790. In this case the
outward transfer has not yet happened and so will not be reflected in the accounts,
except as an event after the reporting period.
4.813 In the final period accounts the SoFP will record the final balances prior to outward
transfers (i.e. will not be nil).
4.814 The NHS provider summarisation schedules will still be prepared as at 31 March
(and 31 December).
4.815 If the summarisation schedules are prepared as at a date after the outward
transfer and the closure of the trust, the summarisation schedules will have a nil
SoFP, with the closing balances written out as a transfer by absorption.
4.816 Paragraphs 4.368 to 4.391 set out the disclosure requirements for transfers by
absorption. In addition to these requirements, in the final period accounts the NHS
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
235
provider must disclose details of the outward transfers and dissolution of the NHS
provider as part of its disclosure of events after the reporting period.
4.817 This disclosure must include summary information showing to which receiving
bodies the assets and liabilities in the SoFP have been transferred. Totals of non-
current assets, current assets, current liabilities, non-current liabilities and net
assets must be presented as a minimum. For example, this may be presented as
follows:
Analysis of balances transferred to successor organisations (£000)
Summarised final statement of financial position [this must agree to the SoFP]
Amounts transferred to:
[name of receiving body 1]
[name of receiving body 2]
Total
Non-current assets XX YY ZZ XX
Current assets XX YY ZZ XX
Current liabilities (XX) (YY) (ZZ) (XX)
Non-current liabilities (XX) (YY) (ZZ) (XX)
Net assets/(liabilities) XXX YYY ZZZ XXX
Content of accounts and summarisation schedules: for an NHS provider that
ceased to provide services during the year but continued to exist at the end of
the year
4.818 The transfer of assets and liabilities to receiving NHS bodies will be accounted for
under absorption accounting as set out from paragraph 4.368.
4.819 In the final period accounts the SoFP will record nil balances at the year-end (Or
small balances relating to any residual assets and liabilities which remain in the
provider. This guidance assumes that the residual balances will be nil for ease of
exposition).
4.820 Notes to the SoFP will record the balances as being divested by transfers in both
the accounts and the summarisation schedules. In the accounts it is
recommended that this line in the SoFP movements notes is presented at the
bottom of each relevant note immediately before the total (which will be nil) to
make this clearer to the reader of the accounts.
4.821 This will not apply to SoFP notes such as receivables and payables where a
movements note is not usually presented.
4.822 Paragraphs 4.368 to 4.380 set out the disclosure requirements for transfers by
absorption. In addition to these requirements, in the final period accounts the NHS
provider must disclose in a note to the accounts:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
236
• A clear statement of the date on which services ceased to be provided by the provider,
the fact that the accounts are being prepared as at 31 March, and the reasons for this.
• The SoFP (without notes, although the NHS provider may provide further information if
desired) immediately prior to the outward transfer(s) when services ceased to be
provided. This SoFP will therefore represent the total amounts being transferred out
(plus, exceptionally, any balances remaining in the provider).
• Summary information showing to which receiving bodies the assets and liabilities in
the SoFP have been transferred. Totals of non-current assets, current assets, current
liabilities, non-current liabilities and net assets must be presented as a minimum. For
example, this may be presented as follows:
Analysis of balances transferred to successor organisations (£000)
Summarised statement of financial position as at [date] [this must agree to the full final SoFP provided in the note above]
Amounts transferred to:
[name of receiving body 1]
[name of receiving body 2]
Total
Non-current assets XX YY ZZ XX
Current assets XX YY ZZ XX
Current liabilities (XX) (YY) (ZZ) (XX)
Non-current liabilities (XX) (YY) (ZZ) (XX)
Net assets/(liabilities) XXX YYY ZZZ XXX
Other establishment, merger and dissolution guidance
4.823 For further information regarding the requirements for NHS providers involved in
proposed dissolutions and mergers, including requirements for disclosure of
management information and completion of accounts summarisation schedules,
refer to additional guidance issued by NHSE and NHSI.
Changes to Clinical Commissioning Groups
4.824 CCGs must follow the guidance Procedures for clinical commissioning groups to
apply for constitution change, merger or dissolution which can be found on the
NHSE and NHSI website. When a new CCG entity is formed, it must disclose a
comparative SoFP and related notes as at the date of authorisation after the initial
transfer(s) by absorption from predecessor organisations.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
237
Changes to DHSC ALBs
Creation of new arm’s length body
4.825 Newly established DHSC ALBs are required to complete an accounts
summarisation schedule, to be submitted to the Department of Health and Social
Care for consolidation into the DHSC group accounts.
4.826 DHSC ALBs must also complete an ARA as described in Chapter 3 of this manual,
to be laid before Parliament within the indicated timeframe.
4.827 Where a DHSC ALB is established after the beginning of the financial year, it must
complete an ARA up to a reporting period end of 31 March, unless the establishing
legislation specifies otherwise.
4.828 There is still a requirement to complete summarisation schedules with the
accounting details for the standard financial year of up to 31 March. Where the
annual report differs (for example with a 15-month account), the amended
reporting period must be made clear.
4.829 Where the establishment of a DHSC ALB has arisen from a transfer of functions
from an existing DHSC ALB within the DHSC group, and there is an associated
transfer of assets, the new ALB must ensure that the disclosure requirements for
transfers by absorption accounting are followed, as set out from paragraph 4.368.
4.830 This especially applies to the summarisation schedules as any transfers must
eliminate across the DHSC group.
Changes in status
4.831 The reporting requirements are no different should an DHSC ALB change status
(for example, from special health authority to a DHSC NDPB) at the beginning of
the financial year.
4.832 The entity will still be required to submit accounts summarisation schedules and
publish an ARA in line with this manual.
4.833 There may be an additional requirement to complete an accounts summarisation
schedule to clear out the closing balance from the previous financial year,
although discussion should take place with DHSC as to whether this will be
completed by the ALB, or can be done by DHSC.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
238
4.834 Where the change in status occurs during the financial year, the DHSC ALB must
be prepared to complete two summarisation schedules at each submission period,
one showing the activity of the ALB up to the point of the change in status, and
one showing the activity of the ALB from the date the status changed up to the
reporting date.
4.835 There will still be a requirement to complete an ARA to be laid before Parliament,
as outlined in Chapter 3 of this manual.
4.836 ALBs must discuss the reporting requirements with DHSC as, depending on the
change of status, there may be a requirement to complete two annual reports or
use an extended first period of reporting after the change in status.
4.837 Should the change in status of a DHSC ALB be accompanied by a transfer of
functions/assets from another body, the ALB must ensure the requirements of
transfer by absorption are followed, as set out from paragraph 4.368.
4.838 This is especially important when completing summarisation schedules to ensure
that any transfers occurring within the DHSC group eliminate on consolidation.
Dissolution of DHSC ALBs
4.839 Where a DHSC ALB is due to be dissolved after the end of the financial year, the
ALB must follow the accounting and annual reporting requirements set out in this
manual, as it will be in existence at the reporting date.
4.840 Arrangements must therefore be put into place to ensure that the reporting
deadlines falling after dissolution can still be met.
4.841 DHSC will need to complete an accounts summarisation schedule in the next
financial year to ensure the SoFP is cleared to zero, and any transfers of assets
and functions are recorded correctly.
4.842 The ALB must ensure that a record of balances that are transferring within the
WGA boundary are made available so that DHSC can ensure that any transfers by
absorption within the DHSC group can be eliminated on consolidation.
4.843 If dissolution is to occur during the financial year, arrangements must be made to
enable subsequent summarisation schedules to be completed up to the reporting
year end.
4.844 As described in paragraph 4.841 above, a record must be kept of any
functions/assets being transferred within the WGA boundary to allow the accurate
elimination of transfers by absorption within the DHSC group.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
240
Chapter 4 Annex 10: Accounting for
Maternity Pathways
4.846 This annex provides guidance on how to apply accounting considerations under
IFRS 15 to Maternity Pathways, to replace guidance that was accessible through
via a link in the GAM in previous financial years.
Scope of IFRS 15
4.847 On the adoption of IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers, adapted and
interpreted by HM Treasury for application in the public sector, entities will need to
consider how any revised approaches to revenue recognition will impact on
current practices.
4.848 It is viewed that maternity pathways falls within the scope of IFRS 15. This is
because;
• Pathways aligns to the qualifying criteria of the Standard, which are as follows;
• the parties to the contract have approved the contract (in writing, orally or in
accordance with other customary business practices) and are committed to
perform their respective obligations;
• the entity can identify each party’s rights regarding the goods or services to be
transferred;
• the entity can identify the payment terms for the goods or services to be
transferred;
• the contract has commercial substance (i.e. the risk, timing or amount of the
entity’s future cash flows is expected to change as a result of the contract); and
• it is probable that the entity will collect the consideration to which it will be entitled
in exchange for the goods or services that will be transferred to the customer.
• To avoid doubt regarding the public sector relevance of IFRS 15, the definition of a
contract has been expanded, via a HM Treasury adaptation, to include legislation and
regulations which enable an entity to obtain revenue not classified as a tax by ONS.
4.849 As such pathways either falls into scope of IFRS 15 from a conventional
interpretation of IFRS 15, in meeting all of the criteria established, or via HM
Treasury’s adaptation.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
241
4.850 The below provides a summarised view of the IFRS 15 compliant considerations
that will need to be made regarding maternity pathways from both a commissioner
and provider perspective.
CCG perspective
4.851 The PbR rules regarding maternity pathways changed in 2013-14. The key aspect
is as set out in the NHS PbR Guidance 2013-14, para 648:
"Commissioners should make one payment per pregnancy for all antenatal
care included in the scope (although payments for the delivery or postnatal
modules of the pathway may be paid to different providers). The provider
receiving this payment will be known as the lead provider."
4.852 The commissioner is therefore obliged to make one payment covering the whole of
the maternity pathway at the point at which the woman first presents for treatment.
4.853 The guidance is then clear that should the care be split between different
providers, it is the responsibility of the lead provider to pay for this, and the
separate providers to work together to determine the appropriate transaction price
for the performance obligations to be satisfied by each provider which will
determine the revenue and appropriate contract liabilities to be apportioned.
4.854 From the CCG’s perspective therefore, this is a contractual payment in line with
the terms of the pathway. It is considered that the good or service being
transferred to the CCG through its commissioning, is the patient receiving
‘treatment’. Nevertheless, as a customer there remain important considerations
for the CCG to follow.
4.855 Where activity to satisfy the performance obligations under the contract is not
complete at year end, the relation between performance and payment under the
contract must be recognised on the statement of financial position (as per
paragraph 106 of the Standard).
4.856 It is expected that the commissioner will reflect the economic substance of the
transaction as a prepayment in its accounts. This reflects the principles of IFRS
15, which more directly apply to the income for the provider as covered below.
4.857 The value of this prepayment should normally reflect the deferred income, or
contract liability, recorded in the lead provider’s accounts.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
242
4.858 The Standard requires the provider to measure the progress made towards
complete satisfaction of the performance obligation at the end of each reporting
period, as per paragraph 39.
4.859 More detail in regards to this process is provided in the provider perspective
below. This will form part of the accruals statement for the agreement of balances
exercise.
Provider perspective
4.860 As determined in the scoping section, there is a need to consider the requirements
of IFRS 15 for this revenue stream.
4.861 Having identified there is a contract in existence, it is necessary to identify the
performance obligations within the contract and to determine and allocate the
transaction price to the obligations. This will enable an IFRS 15 compliant model
of revenue recognition to be adopted.
4.862 The most appropriate classification of the contract and performance obligations
underneath maternity pathways is as a single contract in which only a single
performance obligation exists, that is satisfied and thus revenue is likewise,
recognisable over time. The rationale behind this judgement is detailed in the
below section.
Rationale behind Revenue Classification
4.863 Regarding the single contract element of the above judgement, as per paragraph
22 of the Standard, an entity is required to assess the amount of distinct goods or
the series of distinct goods that exist in a contract with a customer, to identify the
performance obligation/s that exist.
4.864 Goods are judged to be distinct if; the customer can benefit from the good or
service on its own or together with other resources readily available, and the
promise to transfer a specific service is separately identifiable from other
promises/ obligations in the contract.
4.865 Paragraph 29 of the Standard provides factors which may indicate when services
are not separately identifiable.
4.866 The first and third factors appear relevant for the maternity pathway. The first
suggests that promises are not separate when an entity is using the services
provided as inputs to deliver a combined output specified by the customer, which
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
243
may contain more than one phase. The third notes that a service is not separate if
it is highly interdependent or interrelated with other services in the contract,
therefore, being significantly affected by one or more other services in the
contract.
4.867 Where this is the case the entity is required to combine goods or services until a
bundle becomes distinct. It is interpreted that the pathways good or services need
to be bundled to the extent that goods or services only become distinct, when
viewed as a single performance obligation in its entirety.
4.868 Regarding the point at which the obligation in the contract is satisfied, obligations
are viewed as being satisfied over time if any of the three criteria in paragraph 35
of the Standard are met.
4.869 Maternity pathways could be seen as meeting the first of these in that the
customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits provided by the
entity’s performance as they are performed.
4.870 IFRS 15 paragraph B4 states that customers receive and consume benefits when
another entity would not need to substantially re-perform the work completed to
date if fulfilling the remaining obligations.
4.871 The utilisation of the Maternity Minimum Data Set, accessible for Commissioners
and Providers, to help avoid double booking and cross-provider charging that
would be incurred in substantially re-performing the service, appears to satisfy this
condition.
4.872 Maternity pathways could also be viewed as satisfying the third criteria in
paragraph 35 of the Standard, as the service is not creating an asset with
alternative use.
4.873 This is due to the fact that the asset is not largely interchangeable (see IFRS 15
paragraph B7) and the provider has an enforceable right to payment for
performance completed to date as per paragraph 678 of the PbR guidance, which
identifies that Commissioners should pay for all three modules in the pathway.
4.874 Given the above there is strong rationale to the satisfied over a period of time
classification of the performance obligation.
4.875 To enable providers to identify the appropriate level of revenue to recognise based
on the above considerations, there is a need to determine the appropriate
transaction price and the appropriate method of measuring progress to satisfaction
of the performance obligation under maternity pathways.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
244
4.876 The below provides detail as to how a provider can arrive at the appropriate price
to allocate to the performance obligation and how to measure progress towards
satisfaction of the obligation.
4.877 In determining the transaction price providers will need to take note of the various
elements that can have effect on the price as per paragraph 48 of the Standard.
4.878 In particular it will be key to take note of any variable considerations that may
increase or reduce the transaction price (discounts or performance bonuses for
instance), but only to the extent that it is not highly probable a significant reversal
in revenue recognised would occur when uncertainty around the variable
consideration is resolved.
4.879 Paragraphs 56 to 59 of the Standard provide guidance regarding this assessment.
4.880 There is a need to make an assessment to measure the provider’s progress
towards satisfaction of the obligation under maternity pathways.
4.881 This assessment is critical as an entity is only allowed to recognise revenue over
time if the entity can reasonably measure its progress under paragraph 44 of the
Standard.
4.882 It is noted that whatever method is adopted (various types of input or output
methods are described in paragraphs B14 to B19) it needs to be applied
consistently in similar circumstances.
4.883 Providers may wish to note the practical expedient offered for output methods in
paragraph B16 of the Standard which enables the entity to recognise revenue
corresponding to the amount it has a right to invoice for, if the right exists to
consideration based directly on performance completed to date.
4.884 The overarching objective of this process is to depict a provider’s performance in
satisfying the performance obligation under the contract.
4.885 Whichever method is viewed as most appropriate for the provider to utilise, the
standard makes clear that the method needs to be backed up by reliable
information.
4.886 With the interpretations of IFRS 15 being taken as above, consideration as to
revenue recognition at period end can now be made. In reality with the
interpretations taken above there will be little change from the previous IAS 18
treatment of the revenue received by providers.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
245
Revenue Recognition
4.887 Whilst payment is made upfront by the CCG at the point at which the woman first
presents for treatment, revenue can only be recognised to the extent to which the
performance obligation has been satisfied.
4.888 As per the CCG perspective, where activity to satisfy the performance obligations
under the contract is not complete at year end, the relation between performance
and payment under the contract must be recognised on the statement of financial
position.
4.889 Therefore, as per paragraph 106 of the Standard, if a customer pays consideration
before the entity (provider) transfers a good or service, the entity shall present the
contract as a contract liability. A contract liability is an entity’s obligation to transfer
goods or services to a customer for which the entity has received consideration
from the customer.
4.890 As such revenue should be recognised to the extent that the progress had been
made in satisfying the obligation and were payment goes above this, the revenue
should be deferred and recorded as a contract liability, to be released as
appropriate on further progression towards completion of the obligation.
Lead Provider – secondary transactions
4.891 As mentioned in the CCG perspective there are scenarios in which some of the
services will be provided by alternative providers and thus the lead provider will
need to pay the alternative provider.
4.892 IFRS 15 requires a determination to be made for each distinct good service as to
whether a provider would be a principal or agent.
4.893 Note that from the above rationale articulated for providers, it was viewed that the
entire pathway was the distinct service provided. The determination as to principal
or agent relates to control.
4.894 IFRS 15 paragraph B35 indicates that an entity ‘is a principal if it controls the
specified good or service that is transferred to a customer’.
4.895 B37 identifies a number of indicators of control and providers should take
particular note of the indicator given in B37 (a) which confirms, ‘the entity is
primarily responsible for fulfilling the promise to provide the specified good or
service. This typically includes responsibility for the acceptability of the specified
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
246
good or service (for example, primary responsibility for the good or service
meeting customer specifications)’.
4.896 The existence of principal based control mechanism appears to be met in the PbR
regulations, where it is noted in paragraph 650 that if ‘a woman chooses to use a
provider other than the lead provider for part of her care (e.g. a scan, an
investigation or appointment etc) or where the woman is referred to a different
pathway provider for any reason, it is the responsibility of the lead provider to pay
the other organisation. They remain accountable for the care however, and should
have contracts in place for this activity.’
4.897 As such it is expected that the lead provider will be acting as a principal in this
transaction and is not merely acting as an agent on behalf of the commissioner or
other providers.
4.898 As such the lead provider should account for its income gross and separately for
expenditure where it has passed on monies to alternative providers. (The
secondary provider will also be acting as a principal in the provision of the services
to the patients).
Conclusion
4.899 The determinations made by the above analysis are as follows;
• Maternity pathways are in scope of IFRS 15 as adopted and interpreted for the public
sector context by HMT.
• Maternity Pathways is most appropriately viewed as single contract in which a single
performance obligation exists that is satisfied over a period of time,
• Therefore, revenue should be recognised over time and only to the extent to which
performance has been satisfied, with any payment beyond this being recognised as a
contract liability.
• Entities will need to consider the most appropriate method of assessing progress
towards satisfaction of the performance obligation.
• The lead provider embodies control and thus is viewed as the principal.
• Secondary providers act as a principal in the provision of services to patients
4.900 Given the above determinations accounting treatment differs little to the approach
taken under IAS 18.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
247
5. Form and content of the Financial
Statements
Introduction
5.1 This chapter provides guidance on the mandatory elements of financial statements
for DHSC group bodies, based on the requirements of the underlying financial
reporting framework, group-wide accounting policies, and the requirement for
consistent reporting to facilitate the consolidation of the group account.
5.2 Where required headings for financial statements and notes are specified,
alternative phrasing with the same meaning is permissible (for instance, ‘employee
benefits’ or ‘staff costs’).
Annual Accounts Format
Primary financial statements
5.3 The annual accounts must include a set of primary financial statements. The
format of these statements must be followed precisely, as communicated by this
manual and the relevant national bodies, and include all headings except where
the value of both current and comparative prior year is nil.
5.4 DHSC group bodies must include the following primary statements:
• Statement of Comprehensive Net Expenditure (SoCNE) (NHS providers must instead
include a Statement of Comprehensive Income (SoCI). DHSC ALBs may also include
a SoCI where appropriate to their business.)
• Statement of Financial Position (SoFP)
• Statement of Changes in Taxpayers’ Equity (SoCTE)
• Statement of Cash Flows (SoCF).
Notes relevant to the financial statements
5.5 An entity has discretion over the presentation of the notes to the accounts. In
applying discretion, the entity must be mindful of materiality, and of where this
manual sets out specific disclosure requirements that must be followed.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
248
5.6 Entities may merge or exclude headings specified in this manual where they are
irrelevant or immaterial.
5.7 Although entities may apply discretion in presenting their disclosures, they must
continue to ensure consistency between the accounts and the summarisation
schedules.
5.8 For NHS providers, disclosures entitled ‘note’ in the summarisation schedules
must be included in the accounts, but entities have discretion over their precise
format, and they may be omitted if immaterial.
Comparative amounts
5.9 Unless otherwise relieved by the provisions of an individual IFRS Standard, IAS 1
requires the disclosure of comparative information for all primary statements and
notes to the accounts.
Group accounts
5.10 The principles of IFRS 10 will be applied to all other entities in which the entity has
an interest, including NHS charitable funds.
5.11 The primary statements and notes to the accounts must be presented with
separate ‘Group’ and ‘Parent Entity’ columns.
5.12 An NHS trust or NHS foundation trust may title the parent entity column “Trust” if it
wishes.
5.13 NHS providers may take advantage of the exemption afforded by the Companies
Act 2006 to omit the SoCI for the provider parent if it wishes.
5.14 Where an NHS provider takes advantage of this exemption it must disclose that it
has done so in a note to the accounts, together with the surplus/deficit of the
parent trust and comply with the other requirements of section 408 of the
Companies Act 2006.
5.15 More widely, where the entity determines that the difference between the ‘Group’
and ‘Parent Entity’ numbers is immaterial for a particular note, the ‘Parent Entity’
version of that note may be omitted from the accounts.
5.16 The omission and the extent of the immaterial differences must be explained.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
249
Example accounts format
5.17 Illustrative accounts formats are provided by the relevant national bodies to assist
with the completion of the accounts.
5.18 These example formats show the format required for the primary statements and
examples of how the notes to the financial statements must be presented.
5.19 Example accounts formats applicable to each area of the DHSC group are listed
below.
5.20 These are illustrative and are not mandatory for use except where this manual
indicates that format in the example accounts is required.
5.21 DHSC ALBs should refer to the Agency Pink/NDPB Green illustrative account,
published by HM Treasury.
5.22 The format for 2021-22 is already published alongside the FReM however, HMT
may make updates to the format at any time up to December 2021.
5.23 NHS providers should refer to the example trust accounts template published by
NHSE and NHSI. Any concerns over the form and content of the annual accounts
should be discussed with NHSE and NHSI.
5.24 CCGs should refer to the model accounts template for CCGs issued by NHSE and
NHSI.
Accounting policies
5.25 The relevant standards are IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements
paragraphs 117-124 and IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting
Estimates and Errors.
5.26 DHSC group bodies must disclose their accounting policies in a note to the
accounts. These must be consistent with any group-wide accounting policies
specified in this manual.
5.27 Example accounting policies are provided in Chapter 5 Annex 1: Example
accounting policies.
5.28 There is no requirement to disclose policies that are irrelevant or immaterial to the
entity in the accounting policies note.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
250
Key sources of judgement and estimation uncertainty
5.29 Under IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements entities must disclose the
judgements, apart from those involving estimations, that management has made in
the process of applying the entity's accounting policies and that have the most
significant effect on the amounts recognised in the financial statements.
5.30 Entities must also disclose information about key sources of estimation
uncertainty.
5.31 It will be for each entity to decide which uncertainties require disclosure in this
way, but examples might include:
• actuarial assumptions in respect of post-employment benefits
• assumptions underlying the likelihood and outcome of material provisions
• assumptions regarding the valuation of properties
• future changes in accounting policy.
5.32 The determination of the carrying values of some assets and liabilities may require
estimation of the effects of future uncertain events.
5.33 Examples include the estimation of the recoverable amount of plant, property and
equipment in the absence of recently observed market prices, or the assumptions
underlying the estimation of material provisions.
5.34 Where a new IFRS Standard or Interpretation has been issued, but has not yet
been implemented, IAS 8 requires disclosure in the accounts of this fact and the
known or reasonably estimated impact that its application will have in the period of
initial application.
5.35 “Issued” should be interpreted as having been issued by the IASB or IFRS IC,
even if the UK has not yet adopted the Standard, together with published changes
to future versions of the Treasury FReM.
Statement of Comprehensive Income (SoCI) / Comprehensive
Net Expenditure (SoCNE)
5.36 IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements requires the preparation of a
Statement of Comprehensive Income (SoCI).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
251
5.37 In the public sector context, this is appropriate for entities that operate on a cost
recovery basis, including NHS providers.
5.38 Entities that receive funding to incur expenditure on behalf of the government,
including NHS commissioners, will prepare a Statement of Comprehensive Net
Expenditure (SoCNE) which follows the principles of IAS 1 as adopted by HM
Treasury.
5.39 For organisations preparing a SoCI the option in IAS 1 to present this information
as two separate statements has been withdrawn.
5.40 This section consistently uses SoCNE to refer to either statement format, except in
contexts that deal specifically with NHS providers, in which case SoCI is used.
5.41 The Standard does not prescribe the structure of the SoCNE, but simply sets out
the items which must be disclosed on the face of the statement.
5.42 In addition to any items required by IAS 1, DHSC group bodies must present the
following items of income and expenditure on the face of the SoCNE:
• Revenue from patient care activities (NHS providers)
• Other operating revenue
• Employee benefits (alternatively, this and the following item may be combined as
‘Operating expenses’ where these are not easily separable)
• Other operating expenses
• Net operating surplus/deficit
• Finance income
• Finance costs
• Gain/losses on transfers by absorption
5.43 Other comprehensive income must be analysed between:
• amounts that will not be reclassified subsequently to income and expenditure,
including (where relevant):
• Gain on revaluations (may be analysed by property, plant and equipment, and
intangible assets, where material)
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
252
• Impairments and reversals taken to revaluation reserve
• Remeasurements of the defined pension liability/asset
• Net gain/loss on equity instruments designated at fair value through other
comprehensive income
• Net gain/loss attributable to changes in credit risk on financial liabilities designated
at fair value through profit or loss
• amounts that will subsequently be reclassified to income and expenditure, including
(where relevant):
• Net gain/loss on financial assets measured at fair value through other
comprehensive income
• Reclassification adjustment on financial assets measured at fair value through
other comprehensive income.
PDC dividend expense (NHS providers)
5.44 NHS providers must disclose PDC dividend expense in respect of the financial
year on the face of the SoCI.
Notes to SoCI / SoCNE
Operating segments
5.45 The relevant standard is IFRS 8, Operating Segments. An operating segment is a
component of an entity:
• that engages in activities from which it may receive income and incur expenses
(including income and expenses generated internally)
• whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity’s “chief operating decision
maker” (CODM) to make decisions about resource allocation to the segment and
assess its performance, and
• for which discrete financial information is available.
5.46 A separate segment must be reported only if it exceeds one of the quantitative
thresholds: 10% of revenue, profit/loss or assets; unless this would result in less
than 75% of the body’s revenue being included in reportable segments, in which
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
253
case additional reportable segments are identified such that the 75% threshold is
reached or exceeded.
5.47 An “all other segments” category must be included, as part of the reconciliation to
total revenue, profit or loss, and assets.
5.48 Segmental transactions must be disclosed on the same basis as that used for
internal reporting to the CODM.
5.49 This means that if segments are not recognised and measured on an IFRS basis
for internal reporting, then they do not need to be restated to IFRS prior to
disclosure.
5.50 Reconciliations must be provided between the aggregate amounts disclosed for
reportable segments and the totals included in the financial statements.
5.51 Key adjustments may include the removal of internal income and expenses, any
necessary restatement to an IFRS basis and the inclusion of amounts in respect of
the activities of operating segments which did not meet the criteria for a reportable
segment.
5.52 DHSC group bodies may not be allocating income to individual activities for the
purpose of internal reporting, choosing instead to report expenditure by activity
and reporting income only for the entity as a whole.
5.53 Where this occurs, and income is not allocated consistently to individual activities
when reporting to the CODM, the entity should determine which segments are
reportable by reference to the operating expenses of the segment and the total
operating expenses of the entity.
Employee benefits expense
5.54 This note is a requirement of the Companies Act 2006, section 411. IAS 19,
Employee Benefits, is relevant.
5.55 As described in the sections on income and operating expenditure, different local
requirements may necessitate completion of the summarisation schedules in a
way which is most appropriate in that sector.
5.56 Employee benefits must be shown in the accounts note in a single column for all
categories of staff.
5.57 Total figures must match those shown for employee benefits in the staff costs
disclosure in the Staff Report part of the annual report.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
254
5.58 The note must include at least the following rows:
• Salaries and wages
• Social security costs
• NHS Pension costs
• Other pensions costs
• Less: recoveries in respect of outward secondments (where treated net).
5.59 The figures must exclude non-executive directors/ lay Governing Body Members
but include executive board members/Governing Body Members and staff
recharged by other DHSC group bodies.
5.60 IAS 19 sets out the requirements for accounting for short-term employee benefits,
post-employment benefits and termination benefits. The ‘employee benefits
expense’ includes all three of these costs.
Ill-health retirements
5.61 NHS bodies are required to disclose the number of early retirements agreed on
the grounds of ill-health during the year, together with the estimated resulting
additional pension liabilities borne by the relevant pension scheme.
5.62 DHSC or the relevant national body will provide these figures when they become
available from NHS BSA – NHS Pensions.
Directors’ remuneration and other benefits (NHS foundation trusts)
5.63 The requirements under section 412 of the Companies Act 2006 to disclose
information on directors’ remuneration are considered to be satisfied by the
disclosures made in the notes to the accounts and in the Remuneration Report.
5.64 The requirements for disclosing directors’ other benefits, where relevant, are set
out in section 413 of the Companies Act 2006, and comprise:
• Advances and credits granted by the NHS foundation trust (or any subsidiary
undertaking) to any of directors of the trust:
• the amount of the advance
• an indication of the interest rate
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
255
• the main conditions, and
• any amounts repaid.
• Guarantees of any kind entered into on behalf of the directors of the NHS foundation
trust by the trust (or any subsidiary undertaking):
• the main terms of the guarantee
• the amount of the maximum liability that maybe incurred by guarantor entity, and
• any amount paid and any liability incurred by the guarantor for the purpose of
fulfilling the guarantee.
• The aggregate of:
• all advances
• all repayments of advances
• the maximum liabilities under guarantees, and
• amounts paid under such guarantees.
5.65 These disclosures apply to any advance or guarantee existing at any time during
the financial year, regardless of when it was entered into, whether the individual
concerned was a director at the time it was entered into and, if by a subsidiary,
regardless of whether the entity was a subsidiary at the time it was entered into.
Pension costs
5.66 The relevant standard is IAS 19, Employee Benefits. Entities with employees that
are members of the NHS Pensions Scheme, the Principal Civil Service Pension
Scheme or the Civil Servant and Other Pension Scheme unfunded, defined benefit
pension schemes must apply the adaptation to IAS 19 requiring the schemes to be
treated as defined contribution schemes.
5.67 Disclosure note requirements are provided each year by NHS BSA (NHS
Pensions Scheme), and by Cabinet Office (Civil Service Pensions). NHS
Pensions Scheme requirements will be published by the relevant national bodies.
5.68 Requirements for entities with employees in the Principal Civil Service Pension
Scheme or Civil Servant and Other Pension Scheme are included in the relevant
illustrative accounts published by HM Treasury, with changes being published as
Employers Pensions Notices (EPN).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
256
5.69 Entities with employees who are members of other pension schemes (for example,
Local Government Pension Schemes), should refer to FReM paragraph 12.1.1 in
the first instance to determine whether the scheme is a public sector pension
scheme under which the IAS 19 adaptation applies.
5.70 Otherwise, they will need to assess how the scheme operates to determine the
correct accounting and disclosure requirements
Analysis of operating expenses
5.71 The relevant standard is IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements, paragraph
99. DHSC group bodies will have differing disclosure requirements for
expenditure, based on materiality and sector specific transactions – see
paragraphs 5.5 to 5.24.
5.72 IAS 1 requires an analysis of operating expenses to be disclosed on either the
face of the SoCNE or in a note to the accounts. For consistency across the DHSC
group, this analysis must be presented in a note to the accounts.
5.73 This must reflect the nature of the expenditure, for example transport costs,
supplies and services.
5.74 If management considers that an analysis by function is more relevant, it may
include such disclosure in an additional note to the accounts. The note must
include at least the following rows (where relevant):
• Purchase of healthcare from NHS and DHSC bodies (commissioners should analyse
by sector)
• Purchase of healthcare from non-NHS/DHSC bodies
• Purchase of social care
• Rentals under operating leases
• Supplies and services – clinical
• Supplies and services – general
• Audit services (see paragraph 5.81)
• Other auditor’s remuneration (see paragraph 5.81)
• Internal audit expenditure (see paragraph 5.92)
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
257
• Consultancy services (see Chapter 5 Annex 2: Consultancy definition)
• Chair and non-executive directors’ costs
• Establishment (see paragraph 5.76)
• Transport
• Premises (see paragraph 5.77)
• Legal fees
• Clinical negligence
• Research and development
• Education, training and conferences
• Grants to local authorities (not applicable to NHS providers)
• Grants to other bodies (not applicable to NHS providers)
• Capital grants (not applicable to NHS providers)
• Drug costs (NHS providers only)
5.75 Additionally, impairments and reversals taken to the SoCI/SoCNE must be
disclosed within operating expenses.
5.76 Establishment expenditure relates to general expenses such as telephone costs,
stationery, printing and staff expenses.
5.77 Premises expenditure is expenditure, other than rent, incurred in relation to
buildings. Examples could include: building repairs and maintenance, utilities,
facilities management and catering.
5.78 Additionally, CCGs must analyse other commissioning expenditure against the
headings set out by NHSE and NHSI in example accounts.
5.79 Consideration should also be given to the analysis required for the summarisation
schedules.
5.80 In some cases, it will be necessary to report non-material items in the
summarisation schedules as they may be material in aggregate upon sector/group
consolidation.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
258
Audit fees
5.81 This is the total of fees paid or payable to the external auditor for the financial year
in question and must be analysed between statutory audit services and other
services in accordance with SI 2008 No.489, The Companies (Disclosure of
Auditor Remuneration and Liability Limitation Agreements) Regulations 2008.
These regulations were amended by SI 2011 No.2198, The Companies
(Disclosure of Auditor Remuneration and Liability Limitation Agreements)
(Amendment) Regulations 2011.
5.82 Further information is provided in the Disclosure of auditor remuneration technical
release issued by the ICAEW.
5.83 Audit fees must always be disclosed irrespective of materiality.
5.84 Non-audit fees payable to the external auditor (other auditors' remuneration) are
analysed across the following headings:
(a) the auditing of accounts of any associate of the entity
(b) audit-related assurance services
(c) taxation compliance services
(d) all taxation advisory service not falling within item c) above
(e) internal audit services
(f) all assurance services not falling within items a) to e)
(g) corporate finance transaction services not falling within items a) to f) above,
and
(h) all other non-audit services not falling within items b) to g) above.
5.85 Within the non-audit service headings above, there are various services that are
prohibited to be provided by the local auditor.
5.86 Further guidance on prohibited non-audit services is provided in the Revised
Ethical Standard 2019 issued by the Financial Reporting Council (FRC).
5.87 The implications for the auditors of local NHS bodies are set out in the Auditor
Guidance Note 1 (AGN 01), available on the NAO website.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
259
5.88 Where local auditors undertake additional statutory activities under the Code of
Practice that are not related to the audit of the financial statements (for example,
value for money work), these costs must be classified as “audit services” rather
than “other auditor remuneration”.
5.89 The disclosure of costs related to non-audit services must set out the basis for
such work and its nature and extent.
5.90 Where the auditor provides assurance on an NHS provider’s quality account or
quality report this work is not performed under the Code of Audit Practice and the
fees must be disclosed separately as ‘other services: audit-related assurance
services’.
Auditor liability limitation agreements
5.91 In accordance with SI 2008 no.489, The Companies (Disclosure of Auditor
Remuneration and Liability Limitation Agreements) Regulations 2008, where a
DHSC group body’s contract with its auditors provides for a limitation of the
auditor’s liability, the principal terms of this limitation must be disclosed in a note to
the accounts.
Internal audit expenditure
5.92 DHSC group bodies must disclose non-staff related internal audit expenditure, for
example where services are provided by a third party, including local counter fraud
services.
5.93 NHS providers must additionally disclose staff related internal audit expenditure,
based on the analysis in summarisation schedules.
Analysis of income and expenditure: programme and administration
5.94 There is no requirement for separate disclosure of administration and programme
income and expenditure in the financial statements, and DHSC group bodies
should not include this analysis in their accounts.
5.95 DHSC is required to report administration outturn as part of the Parliamentary
accountability report.
5.96 There is therefore a requirement to collect separate programme and (where
relevant) administration income and expenditure details within the summarisation
schedules and agreement of balances exercises.
5.97 DHSC group bodies must ensure these figures are consistent with the aggregate
figures in their published accounts.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
260
5.98 For some entities, such as NHS providers, income and expenditure are deemed to
be wholly programme, and no further analysis is required from those bodies.
Profit or loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment (NHS foundation
trusts)
5.99 Where land and buildings assets used in the provision of commissioner requested
services have been disposed of during the year, a narrative disclosure is required.
5.100 This must include the net book value of the asset, the amount of any sale
proceeds or other consideration receivable, and an explanation of the means by
which the NHS foundation trust will continue to meet its obligations to provide
commissioner requested services.
5.101 This might include details of replacement assets, use of under-utilised existing
assets or leasing arrangements.
Income
5.102 The main relevant standard is IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
DHSC group bodies will have differing disclosure requirements for income, based
on materiality and sector specific transactions – see paragraphs 5.5 to 5.24
5.103 DHSC group bodies must disclose income in a note to the accounts. For NHS
providers, this must include analyses of revenue from patient care activities (see
paragraphs 5.108 and 5.112).
5.104 An analysis of other operating income must also be disclosed. For NHS providers,
this must be clearly distinguished from patient care income.
5.105 This analysis must include at least the following rows (where relevant):
• Prescription fees and charges (NHS England and CCGs)
• Dental fees and charges (NHS England)
• Education and training
• Research and development
• Receipt of grants and donations for capital expenditure
• Charitable and other contributions to expenditure
• Non-patient care services to other bodies
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
261
• Rental revenue from operating leases
• Rental revenue from finance leases
• Income in respect of staff costs (where treated gross)
• Support from DHSC for mergers
5.106 Where ‘other income’ is material, additional disclosure must be made in the
accounts as to its source.
5.107 DHSC group bodies are reminded of the default gross accounting position, as
described in paragraphs 4.29 to 4.36.
Income from patient care activities (NHS providers)
5.108 NHS provider income must be classified as income from patient care activities
when it is earned under contracts with NHS bodies and others for the provision of
patient-related healthcare services.
5.109 This analysis must include at least the following rows (where relevant):
• Patient care income from DHSC/NHS bodies (analysed by sector)
• Patient care income from local authorities
• Patient care income from private patients
• Patient care income from overseas patients
• Other non-NHS patient care income
• Injury costs recovery
5.110 “Patient care income from non-NHS bodies” records all income for the provision of
patient care services from sources other than those separately analysed, including
income from Scottish, Welsh and Irish administrations.
5.111 Income arising from the activities of subsidiaries consolidated into the accounts of
the NHS provider must be classified on the same basis, regardless of how it is
classified in the accounts of the subsidiary.
5.112 NHS providers must also disclose their patient care income by nature of service in
a separate note. NHSE and NHSI will provide an example format for this in the
template accounts for NHS trusts and foundation trusts.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
262
Income from activities arising from commissioner requested services (NHS
foundation trusts)
5.113 As part of the income disclosures, NHS foundation trusts must also disclose the
level of income from activities that has arisen from commissioner requested and
non-commissioner requested services (as set out in the NHS foundation trust’s
Provider Licence and available on NHSE and NHSIs NHS foundation trust
directory).
5.114 This analysis must add up to the total income from activities set out on the face of
the SoCI. Where an NHS foundation trust has been placed in Trust Special
Administration, substitute ‘commissioner requested’ with ‘location specific’.
Overseas visitors
5.115 NHS providers must disclose the following in the notes to the accounts, relating to
treatment of overseas visitors:
• income from overseas visitors (where the patient is charged directly by the NHS
provider)
• cash payments received in year (relating to invoices raised in the current and prior
years)
• amounts added to the provision for impairment of receivables (relating to invoices
raised in the current and prior years), and
• amounts written off in-year (relating to invoices raised in the current and prior years).
5.116 The NHS provider has discretion where these numbers are disclosed within the
notes to the accounts.
5.117 Due to ministerial interest in this area, this disclosure (all four numbers) must be
included in NHS providers’ accounts where income from overseas visitors (where
the patient is charged directly by the NHS provider) exceeds £100,000 in the year.
5.118 NHS providers with overseas visitors' income below £100,000 are encouraged to
include the disclosure in their accounts, but this is not mandatory.
5.119 Further guidance on identifying when income must be recorded as being from
overseas visitors can be found in the DHSC issued Guidance on implementing the
overseas charging regulations 2015.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
263
Fees and charges (Income generation activities)
5.120 There is no relevant accounting standard: this disclosure is a Treasury
requirement. The FReM and accompanying illustrative statements provide
examples as to how the disclosure can be constructed.
5.121 In addition to reporting operating segments under IFRS, Treasury’s FReM requires
bodies to provide additional disclosures for fees and charges raised under
legislation, for instance dental and prescription charges, where the full cost
exceeds £1 million or the service is otherwise material in relation to the accounts.
5.122 This includes NHS income generation activities. Where the additional disclosures
are shown separately in the “Operating Segments” note, they do not need to be
repeated.
5.123 Where an entity has reported on fees and charges in its annual report (see
Parliamentary accountability and audit report), there is no requirement to duplicate
the fees and charges disclosure as a separate note to the accounts. (For NHS
foundation trusts, this disclosure can be included in either the accounts or the
annual report, as described in the FT ARM 2021-22.)
Discontinued operations
5.124 DHSC group bodies must review their activities against IFRS 5 to determine
whether any activities meet the definition of a discontinued operation, and if so, to
reclassify it as such and measure and disclose it accordance with that Standard.
5.125 Following the requirements of the FReM, activities that are transferred to other
bodies within the boundary of Whole of Government Accounts are ‘machinery of
government changes’. They must therefore be treated as continuing operations,
and accordingly must be removed from the accounts in the financial year of
disposal.
5.126 Discontinued operations can only occur therefore, in respect of activities that
genuinely cease without transferring to another entity, or which transfer to an entity
outside the boundary of WGA, such as the private or voluntary sectors.
Statement of Financial Position (SoFP)
5.127 IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements requires the preparation of a
Statement of Financial Position and sets out the line items to be included.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
264
5.128 Assets and liabilities must be analysed as “current” and “non-current” on the face
of the SoFP.
Taxpayers’ Equity and Other Reserves
5.129 The net total of assets and liabilities must equal the total taxpayers’ equity
(including charitable funds where relevant) used to finance the entity. The SoFP,
and additionally the Statement of Changes in Taxpayers’ Equity (see paragraph
5.187), must identify the reserves used to finance the entity’s assets and liabilities.
5.130 The SoFP/SoCTE may include any of the following reserves:
• General fund/reserve (not NHS providers)
• Income and Expenditure reserve (NHS providers)
• PDC reserve (NHS providers only)
• Revaluation reserve
• Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income reserve
• Merger reserve (in rare cases for legacy transactions)
• Other reserves (including accumulated balances of remaining classes of other
comprehensive income – see paragraph 5.43)
• Charitable fund reserves (where charitable funds are consolidated).
5.131 Additionally, IFRS 10 requires non-controlling interests in subsidiaries to be shown
within taxpayers’ equity, as a separate item.
Notes to SoFP
Property, plant and equipment
5.132 The relevant standard is IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment.
Categorisation
5.133 As a minimum, DHSC group bodies must establish and report on the following
classes of PPE:
• land
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
265
• buildings (excluding dwellings)
• dwellings
• transport equipment
• plant and machinery
• information technology
• furniture and fittings
• stockpiled goods (DHSC and PHE only), and
• payments on account and assets under construction.
Depreciation
5.134 Depreciation charged on asset categories must be disclosed separately from the
cost/valuation of the asset. The opening balance as at 1 April XX must equal the
total depreciation carried forward from the previous year.
5.135 Movements in depreciation other than that charged due to the reduction in the
useful life of the asset, such as through impairment or revaluation,
reclassifications, etc., must be separately disclosed.
5.136 The example accounts formats provide details of relevant lines.
Additional Disclosure requirements
5.137 It is not necessary to disclose the historical cost carrying amounts required by
paragraph 77(e) of IAS 16.
5.138 Separate disclosure is required, in the year an asset is acquired, of the current
value in existing use of assets funded by government grant, donation or by lottery
funding.
5.139 Where the funder provides cash, rather than the physical assets, any difference
between the cash provided and the value of the assets acquired must also be
disclosed.
5.140 Details of any restrictions or conditions imposed by the donor on the use of a
donated asset must be disclosed in a note to the financial statements.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
266
Useful Lives of Non-Current Assets
5.141 The range of the economic lives of non-current assets used by the entity must be
disclosed below the non-current assets' notes, together with other revaluation
details.
Intangible assets
5.142 The relevant standard is IAS 38, Intangible Assets. Presentation of intangible
assets will be similar to that for property, plant and equipment.
Categorisation
5.143 As a minimum, DHSC group bodies must establish and report on the following
classes of intangible assets:
• software licences
• IT – in-house and 3rd party software
• development expenditure
• licences, trademarks and artistic originals
• patents
• goodwill
• websites.
Financial instruments
5.144 The relevant standard is IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures. Where a
DHSC group body is exposed to material financial instrument risk, it must make
the relevant IFRS 7 disclosures.
5.145 Particular emphasis must be placed on considering appropriate disclosure
requirements relating to significant credit risk from receivables.
5.146 The disclosures in this note apply to all the entity’s financial instruments except:
• interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures where they are consolidated,
partially consolidated or equity-accounted, and
• employers’ rights and obligations under employee benefit plans.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
267
5.147 They therefore apply to financial instruments whose accounting is unchanged by
the financial instrument standards, such as current payables and receivables, and
financial instruments that are measured under other standards, such as provisions
arising under contracts, finance leases and PFI liabilities.
5.148 See Chapter 4 Annex 6: Financial Instruments for the full description of financial
instruments.
Inventories
5.149 The relevant standard is IAS 2, Inventories. As a minimum, DHSC group bodies
must establish and report on the following classes of intangible assets.
• work in progress
• drugs
• consumables.
5.150 Work-in-progress is the value of items in the process of manufacture. It does not
include partially completed episodes of healthcare.
Contract and other receivables
5.151 The relevant standards are IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements,
paragraphs 77 and 78(b) and IFRS 7, Financial Instruments Disclosures,
paragraph 36.
5.152 Where relevant, DHSC group bodies must separately disclose amounts receivable
from other NHS and DHSC group bodies.
5.153 This must include amounts receivable from any special health authorities and
DHSC executive agencies outside the DHSC accounting boundary (currently NHS
Blood and Transplant and Medicines & Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency),
and must exclude receivables from Scottish, Welsh and Irish health bodies.
Allowance for expected credit losses
5.154 The relevant standard is IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures, paragraphs
35H to 35L. DHSC group bodies must provide a reconciliation of movements in
the allowance for expected credit losses.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
268
Cash and cash equivalents
5.155 The relevant standard is IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows. DHSC group bodies
must analyse cash and cash equivalents into at least the following headings:
• Government Banking Service
• commercial banks and cash in hand
• deposits with National Loans Fund
• other short-term investments.
5.156 The definition of cash and cash equivalents may be different between the SoFP
and the SoCF due to the treatment of bank overdrafts.
5.157 Where overdrafts are used as part of day-to-day cash management, then they
may be included within cash and cash equivalents in the Statement of Cash
Flows.
5.158 However, for the SoFP, bank overdrafts are included under financial liabilities.
This note reconciles the two.
5.159 Bank balances held with the Government Banking Service must not be treated as
a bank balance with a commercial bank despite the contracts being in place with
commercial banks.
5.160 Only balances held in accounts outside this contracted arrangement should be
considered as being held in a commercial bank account.
5.161 Cash equivalents include liquid investments as defined under IAS 7. DHSC group
bodies must review the nature of such deposits, including items held with the
National Loan Fund at the year end, and the original term to maturity of the
investments to ensure the deposits are correctly allocated between cash
equivalents and other short-term loans (current assets).
Trade and other payables
5.162 The relevant standard is IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements paragraph
77. IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows paragraph 44A to 44E are also relevant
5.163 Where relevant, DHSC group bodies must separately disclose amounts payable to
other NHS and DHSC group bodies.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
269
5.164 For this purpose, this must include amounts payable to any special health
authorities and DHSC executive agencies outside the DHSC accounting boundary
(currently NHS Blood and Transplant and Medicines & Healthcare Products
Regulatory Agency), and must exclude payables to Scottish, Welsh and Irish
health bodies.
5.165 In accordance with amendments flowing from IASB’s disclosure initiative, an entity
is to provide a reconciliation between opening and closing balances in the
statement of financial position for liabilities arising from financing activities, that is
to include both cash and non-cash changes.
5.166 Whilst a specific layout is not mandated by the Standard, though an example of
how this may be completed is detailed in IAS 7 IE section C of the Standard, the
illustrative statements published alongside the FReM provide examples of
suggested layouts with which to complete this reconciliation.
5.167 Entities should refer to the relevant accounts template and consolidation schedule
which will provide the data requirements underpinning this disclosure.
Provisions
5.168 The relevant standard is IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent
Assets. IAS 19, Employee benefits is also relevant. For presentation purposes in
the SoFP, all provisions need to be separated into current and non-current
amounts.
5.169 DHSC group bodies must analyse provisions into at least the following headings
(where relevant):
• clinical negligence (NHS Resolution only – see paragraph 5.172)
• early departure costs (see paragraph 5.174)
• NHS Continuing Healthcare.
5.170 The expected timing of cash flows for each provision must be analysed by the
following periods:
• not later than one year
• later than one year and not later than five years
• later than five years.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
270
5.171 Where the time value of money is material, future cashflows are discounted.
Treasury issues guidance on appropriate discount rates and this is summarised in
Chapter 4 Annex 7 - Treasury Discount Rates
Clinical negligence claims
5.172 Where NHS Resolution has assumed responsibility for settlement of claims, the
relevant provisions will be brought to account by NHS Resolution.
5.173 NHS provider bodies must, however, disclose within the provisions note the value
of those liabilities recognised by NHS Resolution on their behalf. NHS Resolution
will provide the figure for the disclosure each year.
Early departure costs
5.174 NHS employers are responsible for meeting additional costs arising from early
departure. A provision must be established in relation to these costs as soon as
the conditions set out in IAS 19 are met.
5.175 The amounts due must be discounted to their present value using the pensions
discount rate.
5.176 For NHS Pensions Scheme early retirements, all cash outflows will be discounted
using a single Treasury pensions discount rate, published by Treasury in
November of the relevant financial year.
5.177 Once a decision has been made then agreement must be reached with NHS
Pensions as to how the liability will be discharged. If a lump sum payment is
agreed, this payment must be charged against the provision initially, with any
remainder to operating expenses.
5.178 If a 5-year payment is agreed, then the provision must be adjusted to this amount
and transferred to ‘Trade and other payables’, split appropriately between a
current liability and a non-current liability.
5.179 For local government pension scheme early retirements, cash outflows will be
discounted using the pension liability discount rate for that scheme.
Injury benefits
5.180 NHS employers are responsible for meeting the cost of injury benefits awards in
respect of claims made by NHS employees. The entitlement to injury benefits and
the amount of the awards are decided by NHS Pensions. The agency will notify
the claimants’ employer of the award made.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
271
5.181 Shortly after payments are made, NHS Pensions will invoice the employer for the
rechargeable amount.
5.182 The details provided on the award notification and the subsequent invoice must be
used for calculating injury benefit provisions as per IAS 37, including discounting if
material, using the appropriate Treasury pensions discount rate for the financial
period.
Defined Benefit Pension Schemes
5.183 The relevant standard is IAS19, Employee Benefits. The FReM requires NHS
bodies to account for the NHS Pensions Scheme as a defined contribution
scheme and so they will generally recognise an expense each year equal to their
total employer contribution.
5.184 As the scheme is designed in such a way that the NHS body cannot identify its
total share of assets or liabilities in the scheme, there is no requirement to
recognise them in the accounts.
5.185 Where an entity has staff who are members of a defined benefit pension scheme
(for example, Local Government Pension Schemes), and where their assets and
liabilities in the scheme can be separately identified, these must be disclosed as
described in IAS 19.
Statement of Changes in Taxpayers Equity (SoCTE)
5.186 The relevant standards are IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements, and IAS
20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance.
5.187 DHSC group bodies must present a SoCTE analysed by the same reserves as
presented in the SoFP (see paragraph 5.130). Financing from the parent body
must be included in the analysis of reserve movements as follows:
• net Parliamentary funding (DHSC agencies and special health authorities)
• grant-in-aid (DHSC NDPBs)
• net funding (CCGs)
• PDC received (NHS providers)
• PDC repaid (NHS providers)
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
272
• PDC written off (NHS providers)
• share capital issued (limited companies)
Statement of Cash Flows (SoCF)
5.188 The relevant standard is IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows. For foreign exchange
entries, the relevant standard is IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates.
5.189 Amounts must be shown gross. This is very important for receipts and
repayments of loans and PDC (where relevant), to enable DHSC reconciliations.
5.190 Cash and cash equivalents in the SoCF must include bank overdrafts where they
are repayable on demand and form an integral part of the entity’s cash
management.
5.191 This is different to the treatment in the SoFP, where IAS 32, Financial Instruments:
Presentation prohibits overdrafts from being off-set in this way.
5.192 In reconciling the operating expenditure to operating cash flows, entities must
exclude movements in receivables and payables relating to items that do not pass
through the SoCNE / SoCI (capital expenditure, finance leases, PFI contracts and
loans receivable).
5.193 In analysing capital expenditure and financial investment cash flows, entities must
adjust for receivables and payables relating to capital expenditure and those
relating to loans issued to or repaid by other bodies.
5.194 In analysing financing cash flows, entities must adjust for receivables and
payables relating to the capital element of payments in respect of leases and on-
balance sheet PFI/LIFT contracts.
5.195 IAS 7 permits discretion as to where certain cash flows may be disclosed,
depending on how an entity views them in relation to its activities.
5.196 In order to ensure consistency of treatment across the accounts group, the
following cash flows must be disclosed within the Statements of Cash Flows:
• interest received on investments represents cash flows associated with investing
activities and must be disclosed under that heading
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
273
• cash flows in relation to the payment of interest, including the interest element of
finance lease rentals, are associated with financing activities and must therefore be
disclosed under that heading
• for NHS providers, the payment of PDC dividend also represents a cash flow
associated with financing activities and therefore must be disclosed under that
heading.
5.197 DHSC group bodies must use the indirect method in their financial statements as
guided by the example accounts for each sector.
Other Disclosure Notes
Pooled budgets
5.198 A “pooled budget” in the NHS context may be a “joint operation” as defined by the
relevant standard IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements.
5.199 Where the arrangement constitutes a “joint venture”, IAS 28 (as adapted) is
applicable. Chapter 4 Annex 8 – Accounting for Pooled Budgets and Joint
Arrangements refers.
5.200 Unless transactions are immaterial, disclosure of a joint arrangement is required
under IFRS 12.
Better Payment Practice code – measure of compliance
5.201 This note reports compliance with the better payment practice (BPP) code in
respect of invoices received from both NHS and non-NHS trade creditors. The
code is summarised as:
• Target: pay all NHS and non-NHS trade payables within 30 calendar days of receipt of
goods or a valid invoice (whichever is later) unless other payment terms have been
agreed
• Compliance: at least 95% of invoices paid (by the bank automated credit system or
date and issue of a cheque) within thirty days or within agreed contract terms.
5.202 The note must relate to all invoices paid during the year, excluding those issued
up to 31 March that are in dispute at the year-end.
5.203 The note must disclose, for both NHS and non-NHS trade payables:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
274
• the total number and value of trade payables paid in the year
• the total number and value of trade payables paid within the target
• the percentage, by number and value, of trade payables paid within the target.
5.204 NHS foundation trusts have discretion over whether to include this disclosure in
their accounts, but otherwise must include it in their annual report.
The Late Payment of Commercial Debts (Interest) Act 1998
5.205 The Late Payment of Commercial Debts (Interest) Act 1998 allows entities to claim
interest on the late payment of debts by contracting partners.
5.206 Creditors can also claim a fixed sum of compensation should late payment occur.
This is to cover debt recovery costs. This was updated under SI 2013 No.395,
The Late Payment of Commercial Debts Regulations 2013.
5.207 This note must disclose the amounts of both interest and compensation paid
during the year under this legislation.
5.208 NHS foundation trusts have discretion over whether to include this disclosure in
their accounts, but otherwise must include it in their annual report.
Compliance with Public Contract Regulations 2015 (PCRs)
5.209 Procurement policy note (PPN) 03/16 issued on 21 March 2015 restated the
annual public requirements under regulation 113(7) of the Public Contract
Regulations 2015.
5.210 It requires contracting authorities to publish data demonstrating compliance, with
the information being freely available via the internet. Further guidance on the
PCRs is published on gov.uk.
5.211 The BPP and Late Payment disclosures detailed above go a significant way to
satisfying the requirements under PCR but do not generate 100% compliance. To
ensure full compliance with PCRs entities must also disclose the following detail
relating to payment performance and liability to pay interest accrued.
5.212 In relation to performance, disclosure should include:
• the total number and value of invoices paid within 30 days
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
275
• the total number and value of invoices paid within the BPP target that should have
been paid within the 30-day period.
• the percentage, by number and value, of invoices that have actually been paid against
invoices that should have been paid.
5.213 In relation to any liabilities, disclosure should include:
• the total amount of any liability to pay interest which accrued by failing to pay invoices
within the 30-day period where obligated to do so
• the total amount of interest actually paid in the discharge of any such liability
5.214 To align provider sector reporting in the ARA, the PCR requirements detailed in
paragraph 5.212 and 5.213 are mandated for NHS Trusts. The FT ARM has
mandated the reporting for FTs.
5.215 Whilst the PCRs apply to all departments, executive agencies, non-departmental
public bodies and wider public bodies, the need to publish data demonstrating
compliance with PCRs in the ARA is not mandatory. The PCRs merely request
that the data is freely available on the internet.
5.216 Whilst not mandated beyond the provider sector, entities may view the ARA and
format described above a suitable framework through which to report PCR
compliance.
5.217 The PCRs requirement for disclosure of payment performance exempts contracts
within the scope of the NHS (Procurement, Patient Choice and Competition) (No2)
Regulations 2013, thus referring to NHS healthcare contracts.
5.218 This exemption specifically relates to NHS Commissioners and their healthcare
contracts only, not extending to situations where providers sub contract with
another provider.
5.219 Note that BPP and Late payment requirements remain in force and require the
NHS / non-NHS split described in paragraph 5.140.
Capital and Other Commitments
5.220 For capital commitments, the relevant standards are IAS 16, Property, Plant and
Equipment paragraph 74(c) and IAS 38, Intangible Assets paragraph 122(e).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
276
5.221 DHSC group bodies must disclose total contracted capital commitments at 31
March not otherwise included in the financial statements, analysed by PPE and
intangible assets.
5.222 Other financial commitments (excluding leases, PFI and LIFT) under non-
cancellable contracts must also be disclosed, showing the total commitments
analysed by the following periods:
• not later than one year
• later than one year and not later than five years
• later than five years.
Commitments under leases
5.223 The relevant standards are IAS 17, Leases, SIC 27, Evaluating the Substance of
Transactions Involving the Legal Form of a Lease and IFRIC 4, Determining
whether an Arrangement contains a Lease.
Operating lease payments (as lessee)
5.224 DHSC group bodies must disclose the total future minimum lease payments under
operating leases, analysed by:
• land
• buildings
• other.
5.225 Each of these categories must be further analysed by the following periods:
• not later than one year
• later than one year and not later than five years
• later than five years.
Operating lease receipts (as lessor)
5.226 Where DHSC group bodies act as lessor in respect of operating leases, they must
disclose the total future minimum lease receipts, analysed in the same way as for
lessee obligations above.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
277
Finance lease obligations (as lessee)
5.227 DHSC group bodies must disclose the total future minimum lease payments under
finance leases, on both a present value and undiscounted basis, analysed by:
• land
• buildings
• other.
5.228 Each of these categories must be further analysed by the following periods:
• not later than one year
• later than one year and not later than five years
• later than five years.
5.229 The undiscounted analysis must additionally include a row for “less future finance
charges” to reconcile to the total obligation on a present value basis.
5.230 The minimum lease payments are:
• the payments over the term of the lease,
• less the following:
• contingent rent
• costs for services
• costs that will be reimbursed
• any amounts guaranteed by the other party or a related party to them, and
• where the lessee has the option to purchase the asset at a price that makes it
reasonably certain at the inception of the lease that the option will be exercised,
the payment to exercise the option.
5.231 A general description of significant lease arrangements must also be included in
this note.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
278
Finance lease receivables (as lessor)
5.232 Where DHSC group bodies act as lessor in respect of finance leases, they must
disclose the total future minimum lease receipts, analysed in the same way as for
lessee obligations above.
5.233 The note must include a reconciliation between the gross investment in finance
leases at the SoFP date and the present value of the minimum lease payments
receivable at the SoFP date.
Commitments under PFI, LIFT and other service concession arrangements
5.234 The relevant standards for this note are IFRIC 12, Service Concession
Arrangements, SIC 29, Service Concession Arrangements: Disclosures, and IAS
17, Leases.
5.235 The disclosures in SIC 29, Service Concession Arrangements: Disclosures must
be provided for all schemes.
5.236 Public Private Partnerships may comprise arrangements that are treated under
IFRS as either on-SoFP or off-SoFP.
5.237 Where relevant, DHSC group bodies must include the following disclosures
separately for LIFT contracts and for PFIs and other service concession
arrangements.
5.238 For off-SoFP arrangements, DHSC group bodies must disclose total future
minimum payments analysed by the following periods:
• not later than one year
• later than one year and not later than five years
• later than five years.
5.239 For on-SoFP arrangements, DHSC group bodies must disclose the total
commitments, including commitments in respect of ongoing service elements of
the contract, analysed by the same periods as above.
5.240 DHSC group bodies must provide disclosures for the imputed PFI liability element
of the contract measured as a finance lease liability in accordance with IAS 17 per
the above periods. It is not necessary to analyse these disclosures by class of
asset.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
279
5.241 For on-SoFP arrangements, DHSC group bodies must also disclose details of in
year expenditure in respect of service charges under PFI and LIFT contracts. For
NHS providers, this requirement will be met by the additional disclosure
requirement below.
5.242 Note: Due to differences between the requirements for entity accounts, and
additional collection for the Whole of Government Accounts, there are additional
collection requirements in summarisation schedules.
5.243 NHS providers only: For on-SoFP arrangements, disclosure is required of the total
unitary payment paid to the operator(s) in the year, on an accruals basis. This
must be the amount paid over; any PFI support income must not be netted off.
This can be for all schemes in total or individual schemes shown separately, at the
entity’s discretion.
5.244 Where relevant, any other amounts paid to the operator under the service
concession contract must also be disclosed. The amount paid must also be
broken down into:
• interest charge
• repayment of balance sheet obligation
• service element
• capital lifecycle costs
• revenue lifecycle costs
• addition to lifecycle prepayment, and
• contingent rent.
5.245 Under section 410A of the Companies Act 2006, where an entity is a party to an
arrangement (including PFI) which is not reflected in its SoFP and where, at the
SoFP date, the risks or benefits in relation to them are material, it must disclose in
a note to the accounts:
• the nature and business purpose of the arrangements, and
• the financial impact of the arrangements on the entity.
5.246 The information need only be given to the extent necessary for enabling the
financial position of the entity to be assessed.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
280
Contingencies
5.247 The relevant standard is IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent
Assets.
5.248 DHSC group bodies must disclose their material contingent assets and liabilities.
Where relevant, this must include at least the following categories of contingent
liabilities:
• clinical negligence (NHS Resolution only)
• NHS Resolution legal claims
• employment tribunal and other employee related litigation
5.249 Where disclosure of a contingent asset or liability may prejudice legal proceedings,
the situation should be discussed with the external auditor of the DHSC group
body, and agreement reached on what disclosure is possible/appropriate.
5.250 Where an entity has not disclosed in its annual report details of remote contingent
liabilities outside the scope of IAS 37 but required for Parliamentary reporting
purposes (see paragraph 3.126), this information must be disclosed as a note to
the accounts.
Events after the reporting period
5.251 The relevant standard is IAS 10, Events after the Reporting Period. Adjusting
events must be reflected in the financial statements.
5.252 Where non-adjusting events after the reporting period are so material that non-
disclosure could influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of
the financial statements, the following information is required:
• the nature of the event, and
• an estimate of its financial effect, or a statement that such an estimate cannot be
made.
5.253 DHSC group bodies must disclose the date when the financial statements were
authorised for issue and who gave that authorisation (IAS 10.17).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
281
Related party transactions
5.254 The relevant standard is IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures, interpreted as set out
in Chapter 4 Annex 1: IFRS Standards and applicability to the DHSC group.
5.255 NHS bodies should be aware of IAS 24 paragraph 17A, which refers to key
management personnel services being provided by another entity.
5.256 HM Treasury considers government departments and their agencies, and
Department of Health and Social Care Ministers, their close families and entities
controlled or influenced by them, as being parties related to DHSC group bodies.
5.257 A disclosure is required if a transaction (or series of transactions) is material on
either side, i.e. if a transaction is immaterial from the entity’s perspective but
material from a related party viewpoint then the entity must disclose it.
5.258 Paragraph 25 of IAS 24 allows entities which are related parties because they are
under the same government control to reduce the volume of the detailed
disclosures.
5.259 Note also that IAS 24 is interpreted such that DHSC group bodies must disclose
the Department of Health and Social Care as the parent department and provide a
note of the main entities within the public sector with which the body has had
dealings, but that no information needs to be given about these transactions.
5.260 NHS bodies must disclose as a related party all linked NHS charities (where these
are not consolidated) including the nature of the relationship, and details of
material transactions between the body and the linked charity.
5.261 Linked NHS charities are those where the charity has corporate trustees (i.e. the
board of the NHS trust or foundation trust act as the trustees of the charity) or
where there are trustees appointed by the Secretary of State or NHSE and NHSI
acting for the Secretary of State.
Losses and special payments
5.262 Entities must report losses and special payments as required by HM Treasury’s
Managing Public Money. Annexes 4.10 and 4.13 of Managing Public Money
contain guidance on the definitions of losses and special payments.
5.263 Where an entity has not disclosed details of losses and special payments in its
annual report (see paragraph 3.124), this information must be disclosed as a note
to the accounts.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
282
5.264 In the note to the accounts entities must disclose:
• separately the total number and total value of losses and special payments,
• a brief description of individual losses and special payments over £300,000, including
those relating to clinical negligence, fraud, personal injury, compensation under legal
obligation and fruitless payments
• a statement that these amounts are reported on an accruals basis but excluding
provisions for future losses, and
• any other explanation considered necessary.
5.265 Losses over £300,000 must be listed under the following categories:
• Cash and other losses (including overpayments, physical losses, unvouched
payments and theft)
• Fruitless payments and constructive losses
• Claims waived or abandoned (excluding cases between DHSC group bodies)
• Stores losses and damage to property
5.266 For bad debts, each case is an individual debtor and not each invoice. For stores
losses, the total net losses revealed at any one store within the year must be
aggregated and treated as one case (for example, pharmaceutical stores). Losses
of property must be aggregated to produce a total loss per case.
NHS providers
5.267 NHS providers must follow the requirements of Managing Public Money in full,
including contacting NHSE and NHSI to seek approval from HM Treasury for any
proposed special severance payments.
5.268 In addition to the above requirements, NHS providers must analyse the total
number and total volume of losses by the categories described in paragraph
5.265.
5.269 NHS providers must also analyse the following, irrespective of value:
• the total number and value of special payments categorised between:
• extra-contractual payments
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
283
• extra-statutory and extra-regulatory payments
• compensation payments
• special severance payments, and
• ex gratia payments
Gifts
5.270 In line with the guidance in Managing Public Money Annex 4.12, DHSC group
bodies must report on the total value of gifts made, if this exceeds £300,000, and
provide details of any individual gifts over £300,000.
5.271 DHSC group bodies are not expected to make gifts in the normal course of
business, and must contact their national body or DHSC sponsor division in the
first instance.
Third party assets
5.272 This note is an HMT requirement.
5.273 Third party assets are assets for which an entity acts as custodian or trustee but in
which neither the entity nor government more generally has a direct beneficial
interest. An example is money held on behalf of patients.
5.274 Third party assets are not recognised in the entity’s SoFP.
5.275 DHSC group bodies must disclose any third-party assets held, analysed by at
least the following headings:
• bank balances
• monies on deposit.
Business combinations disclosure
5.276 A DHSC group body that receives a transfer of functions must disclose in its
financial statements:
• the fact that the transfer has taken place
• a brief description of the transfer, including:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
284
• the date of the transfer
• the name of the body that transferred the function
• the effect on the financial statements, and
• the historical financial performance of the function, to enable users to understand
the operational performance.
5.277 The party that transfers the functions, assets or liabilities outwards must provide
similar disclosures.
5.278 Where that body has dissolved, the final set of accounts must contain an “events
after the reporting period” disclosure, giving this detail (see Chapter 4 Annex 9:
Reporting requirements on change of status).
5.279 Summarisation schedules will require a more detailed analysis to enable the
transitions to be reconciled between transferor and transferee.
5.280 Where the substance of the transaction is effectively one of an acquisition, the
DHSC group body should consider whether some, or all, of the IFRS 3, Business
Combinations disclosures are needed to provide readers with a proper
understanding of the transaction.
Performance disclosures for NHS trusts
5.281 NHS trusts must include a disclosure note of performance against the breakeven
duty.
5.282 Trusts should refer to guidance issued by NHSE and NHSI for details of the
application of the breakeven duty and the required disclosure.
5.283 NHS trusts must also include a disclosure note of performance against the capital
resource limit.
5.284 This must follow the format provided in the summarisation schedules issued by
NHSE and NHSI.
5.285 NHS trusts must also include a disclosure note of performance against the
external finance limit using the following format:
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
285
External finance limit (EFL) X Cash flow financing (from SoCF) (1)
X
Other capital receipts X External financing requirement X Under / (Over) spend against EFL
X / (X)
Note
(1) This is defined as net cash flows before financing, following the derivation set out in the
NHSE and NHSI provider finance in year monitoring return (PFR).
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
286
Chapter 5 Annex 1: Example accounting
policies
5.286 The annex provides a standard template for DHSC group bodies to use as a basis
for their accounting policies note. Entities may tailor the text to suit their specific
circumstances, but must adopt accounting policies consistent with any group wide
policies specified in this manual.
5.287 Where alternative wordings are specified for different sectors (for example, NHS
providers), the appropriate text should be selected and other variants omitted.
National bodies may provide NHS sectors with versions of the accounting policies
tailored in this way.
5.288 Entities may omit policies that are not relevant or have immaterial effect.
The accounting policies set out below are for illustrative purposes. When using them to prepare an accounting policies note, entities should add to or amend the text where needed to reflect the nature of their business and the specific policies they adopt as a result. DHSC ALBs in particular should ensure their accounting policies reflect their specific circumstances. Text in italics constitutes instructions to preparers of accounts, and should not appear in the published accounting policies note. Text in [square brackets] indicates optional text or variant wordings for different types of entities. Entities should include only relevant text. 1. Accounting Policies NHS bodies: [The Secretary of State for Health / NHS England and NHS Improvement, in exercising the statutory functions conferred on Monitor, / NHS England] has directed that the financial statements of [NHS trusts / NHS foundation trusts / Clinical Commissioning Groups] shall meet the accounting requirements of the Department of Health and Social Care Group Accounting Manual (GAM), which shall be agreed with HM Treasury. Consequently, the following financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the DHSC Group Accounting Manual 2021-22, issued by the Department of Health and Social Care. The accounting policies contained in the GAM follow International Financial Reporting Standards to the extent that they are meaningful and appropriate to the NHS, as determined by HM Treasury, which is advised by the Financial Reporting Advisory Board. Where the DHSC Group Accounting Manual permits a choice of accounting policy, the accounting policy that is judged to be most appropriate to the particular circumstances of the [NHS trust / NHS foundation trust / Clinical Commissioning Group] for the purpose of giving a true and fair view has been selected. The particular policies adopted are
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
287
described below. These have been applied consistently in dealing with items considered material in relation to the accounts. National consolidations and DHSC ALBs: These financial statements have been prepared in a form directed by the Secretary of State and in accordance with the Financial Reporting Manual (FReM) 2021-22, issued by HM Treasury, and the Department of Health and Social Care Group Accounting Manual (GAM) 2021-22. The accounting policies contained in the FReM and GAM follow International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adapted or interpreted for the public sector context. Where the FReM or GAM permits a choice of accounting policy, the accounting policy that is judged to be most appropriate to the particular circumstances of [the entity] for the purpose of giving a true and fair view has been selected. The particular policies adopted are described below. These have been applied consistently in dealing with items considered material in relation to the accounts. 1.1 Going concern State whether the entity’s accounts have been prepared on a going concern basis and explain the rationale. Where applicable, entities must also describe any material uncertainties over going concern. Suggested disclosures are given below. NHS bodies: [The entity’s] annual report and accounts have been prepared on a going concern basis. Non-trading entities in the public sector are assumed to be going concerns where the continued provision of a service in the future is anticipated, as evidenced by inclusion of financial provision for that service in published documents. DHSC ALBs: [The entity’s] annual report and accounts have been prepared on a going concern basis. [The entity] is [supply financed / financed by grant-in-aid] and draws its funding from the Department of Health and Social Care (DHSC). Parliament has demonstrated its commitment to fund DHSC for the foreseeable future, and DHSC has demonstrated its commitment to the funding of [the entity]. 1.2 Accounting convention These accounts have been prepared under the historical cost convention, modified to account for the revaluation of [investment property,] property, plant and equipment, intangible assets, [stockpiled goods] and certain financial assets and financial liabilities. Consolidated accounts, NHS providers with consolidated charitable funds, and entities with interests in other entities: [1.3 Basis of consolidation Describe which entities are included in the account and the approach taken to consolidation.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
288
NHS providers with consolidated charitable funds must disclose details of these. Where there are no other consolidated bodies, this note may be titled ‘NHS charitable funds’. 1.3.1 Subsidiaries Entities over which [the entity] has the power to exercise control are classified as subsidiaries and are consolidated. [The entity] has control when it has the ability to affect the variable returns from the other entity through its power to direct relevant activities. The income, expenses, assets, liabilities, equity and reserves of the subsidiary are consolidated in full into the appropriate financial statement lines. The capital and reserves attributable to non-controlling interests are included as a separate item in the Statement of Financial Position. Appropriate adjustments are made on consolidation where the subsidiary’s accounting policies are not aligned with [the entity] or where the subsidiary’s accounting date is not coterminous. Subsidiaries that are classified as ‘held for sale’ are measured at the lower of their carrying amount or ‘fair value less costs to sell’. 1.3.2 Associates Entities over which [the entity] has the power to exercise significant influence so as to obtain economic or other benefits are classified as associates and are recognised in these financial statements using the equity method. The investment is recognised initially at cost and is adjusted subsequently to reflect [the entity]’s share of the associate’s profit or loss and other gains or losses. It is also reduced when any distribution is received by [the entity] from the associate. Associates that are classified as ‘held for sale’ are measured at the lower of their carrying amount or ‘fair value less costs to sell’ 1.3.3 Joint arrangements Arrangements over which [the entity] has joint control with one or more other entities are classified as joint arrangements. Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement. A joint arrangement is either a joint operation or a joint venture. A joint operation exists where the parties that have joint control have rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities relating to the arrangement. Where [the entity] is a joint operator it recognises its share of, assets, liabilities, income and expenses in its own accounts. Provide details if this applies. A joint venture is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement have rights to the net assets of the arrangement. Joint ventures are recognised as an investment and accounted for using the equity method. Provide details if this applies.]
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
289
1.4 Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty In the application of [the entity’s] accounting policies, management is required to make various judgements, estimates and assumptions. These are regularly reviewed. 1.4.1 Critical judgements in applying accounting policies The following are the judgements, apart from those involving estimations (see below) that management has made in the process of applying [the entity’s] accounting policies and that have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in the financial statements: Disclose the judgements made by management, as required by IAS 1.122. 1.4.2 Sources of estimation uncertainty The following are assumptions about the future and other major sources of estimation uncertainty that have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year: Disclose information about assumptions and sources of estimation uncertainty, as required by IAS 1.125. Disclosures must include the nature of the assumption and the carrying amount of the asset/liability at the end of the reporting period and may include sensitivity of the carrying amount to the assumptions, expected resolution of uncertainty and range of possible outcomes within the next financial year, and an explanation of changes to past assumptions if the uncertainty remains unresolved. Examples could include: indices used for asset valuations, asset lives, provision balances, intangible asset valuations. 1.5 Transfer of functions As public sector bodies are deemed to operate under common control, business reconfigurations within the DHSC group are outside the scope of IFRS 3 Business Combinations. Where functions transfer between two public sector bodies, the GAM requires the application of ‘absorption accounting’. Absorption accounting requires that entities account for their transactions in the period in which they took place. Where assets and liabilities transfer, the gain or loss resulting is recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive [Income / Net Expenditure], and is disclosed separately from operating costs. [Where relevant] Transfers of former Primary Care Trust assets from NHS Property Services to NHS providers under the Asset Transfer Policy, will occur via a modified absorption approach, in which the corresponding debit / credit to reflect the gain / loss on transfer is recognised directly through the reserves. 1.6 Pooled budgets [The entity] has entered into a pooled budget arrangement with [xxx] [in accordance with section 75 of the NHS Act 2006]. Under the arrangement, funds are pooled for [describe activities] and [a note to the accounts] provides details of the income and expenditure. The pool is hosted by [body]. [The entity] accounts for its share of the assets, liabilities, income and expenditure arising from the activities of the pooled budget, identified in accordance with the pooled budget agreement.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
290
1.7 Operating segments Income and expenditure are analysed in the Operating Segments note and are reported in line with management information used within [the entity]. 1.8 Revenue In the application of IFRS 15 a number of practical expedients offered in the Standard have been employed. These are as follows; [the entity] is not required to disclose information regarding performance obligations that are part of a contract that has an original expected duration of one year or less, [The entity] is not required to disclose information where revenue is recognised in line with the practical expedient offered in the Standard, where the right to consideration corresponds directly with value of the performance completed to date. The FReM has mandated the exercise of the practical expedient offered in the Standard that requires [the entity] to reflect the aggregate effect of all contracts modified before the date of initial application. [List any other expedients employed by the entity] NHS providers: The main source of revenue for [the entity] is contracts with commissioners in respect of healthcare services. Revenue in respect of services provided is recognised when (or as) performance obligations are satisfied by transferring promised services to the customer, and is measured at the amount of the transaction price allocated to that performance obligation. At the year end, [the entity] accrues income relating to performance obligations satisfied in that year. Where a patient care spell is incomplete at the year end, revenue relating to the partially complete spell is accrued in the same manner as other revenue. Where income is received for a specific performance obligation that is to be satisfied in the following year, that income is deferred. The method adopted to assess progress towards the complete satisfaction of a performance obligation is [provide details]. [The entity] receives income under the NHS Injury Cost Recovery Scheme, designed to reclaim the cost of treating injured individuals to whom personal injury compensation has subsequently been paid, for instance by an insurer. [The entity] recognises the income when it receives notification from the Department of Work and Pension's Compensation Recovery Unit, has completed the NHS2 form and confirmed there are no discrepancies with the treatment. The income is measured at the agreed tariff for the treatments provided to the injured individual, less a provision for unsuccessful compensation claims and doubtful debts in line with IFRS 9 requirements of measuring expected credit losses over the lifetime of the asset.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
291
If the NHS provider sells goods, disclose the relevant accounting policies for this too. Income from the sale of non-current assets is recognised only when all material conditions of sale have been met, and is measured as the sums due under the sale contract. Outline any other sources of revenue. Other entities: Outline the main sources of revenue. Revenue in respect of services provided is recognised when (or as) performance obligations are satisfied by transferring promised services to the customer, and is measured at the amount of the transaction price allocated to that performance obligation. Where income is received for a specific performance obligation that is to be satisfied in the following year, that income is deferred. Payment terms are standard reflecting cross government principles. Significant terms include [provide details]. The value of the benefit received when [the entity] accesses funds from the Government’s apprenticeship service are recognised as income in accordance with IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants. Where these funds are paid directly to an accredited training provider, non-cash income and a corresponding non-cash training expense are recognised, both equal to the cost of the training funded. 1.9 Employee Benefits 1.9.1 Short-term employee benefits Salaries, wages and employment-related payments, including payments arising from the apprenticeship levy, are recognised in the period in which the service is received from employees, including non-consolidated performance pay earned but not yet paid. The cost of leave earned but not taken by employees at the end of the period is recognised in the financial statements to the extent that employees are permitted to carry forward leave into the following period. 1.9.2 Retirement benefit costs Civil Service Pensions (where relevant) Past and present employees are covered by the provisions of the Principal Civil Service Pension Scheme (PCSPS) and the Civil Servant and Other Pension Scheme (CSOPS). These schemes are unfunded, defined benefit schemes covering civil servants. The schemes are not designed in a way that would enable employers to identify their share of the underlying scheme assets and liabilities. Therefore, the schemes are accounted for as though they were defined contribution schemes: the cost to [the entity] of participating in a
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
292
scheme is taken as equal to the contributions payable to the scheme for the accounting period. For defined contribution schemes, such as Civil Service partnership pensions, [the entity] recognises the contributions payable for the year. [The entity] recognises the full cost of benefits paid under the Civil Service Compensation Scheme, including the early payment of pensions. NHS Pensions (where relevant) Past and present employees are covered by the provisions of the NHS Pensions Schemes. These schemes are unfunded, defined benefit schemes that cover NHS employers, General Practices and other bodies allowed under the direction of the Secretary of State in England and Wales. The schemes are not designed to be run in a way that would enable NHS bodies to identify their share of the underlying scheme assets and liabilities. Therefore, the schemes are accounted for as though they were defined contribution schemes: the cost to [the NHS body] of participating in a scheme is taken as equal to the contributions payable to the scheme for the accounting period. For early retirements other than those due to ill health the additional pension liabilities are not funded by the scheme. The full amount of the liability for the additional costs is charged to expenditure at the time [the NHS body] commits itself to the retirement, regardless of the method of payment. The schemes are subject to a full actuarial valuation every four years and an accounting valuation every year. Local Government Pensions (where relevant) Some employees are members of the Local Government Pension Scheme (LGPS), which is a defined benefit pension scheme. The scheme assets and liabilities attributable to those employees can be identified and are recognised in [the NHS body]’s accounts. The assets are measured at fair value and the liabilities at the present value of the future obligations. The increase in the liability arising from pensionable service earned during the year is recognised within operating expenses. The interest cost during the year arising from the unwinding of the discount on the scheme liabilities is recognised within finance costs. The interest earned during the year from scheme assets is recognised within finance income. Re-measurements of the defined benefit plan are recognised in the Income and Expenditure reserve and reported as an item of other comprehensive [income / net expenditure]. Where an entity cannot identify LGPS assets and liabilities attributable to its employees, it should account for the scheme as a defined contribution scheme and include a suitable accounting policy. Where entities have employees that are members of other pensions schemes, they should satisfy themselves of the accounting and disclosure requirements for these schemes under IAS 19, and include an accounting policy for these schemes as required.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
293
1.10 Other expenses Other operating expenses are recognised when, and to the extent that, the goods or services have been received. They are measured at the fair value of the consideration payable. 1.10.1 Grants payable (where relevant) Where grant funding is not intended to be directly related to activity undertaken by a grant recipient in a specific period, [the entity] recognises the expenditure in the period in which the grant is paid. All other grants are accounted for on an accruals basis. 1.10.2 Value added tax Most of the activities of [the entity] are outside the scope of value added tax (VAT). Irrecoverable VAT is charged to the relevant expenditure category or included in the capitalised purchase cost of non-current assets. Where output tax is charged or input VAT is recoverable, the amounts are stated net of VAT. Entities for which the above is not appropriate should specify an alternative policy. 1.10.3 Climate Change Levy Expenditure is recognised in line with the levy charged, based on the chargeable rates for energy consumption per the rates detailed in the Climate Change Levy documentation. [1.11 Corporation tax Entities liable to pay corporation tax should provide details and include an appropriate accounting policy.] 1.12 Property, plant and equipment 1.12.1 Recognition Property, plant and equipment is capitalised if: it is held for use in delivering services or for administrative purposes it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to, or service potential will be supplied to [the entity] it is expected to be used for more than one financial year the cost of the item can be measured reliably, and either the item has cost of at least £5,000, or collectively, a number of items have a cost of at least £5,000 and individually have a cost of more than £250, where the assets are functionally interdependent, had broadly simultaneous purchase dates, are anticipated to have simultaneous disposal dates and are under single managerial control.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
294
Where a large asset, for example a building, includes a number of components with significantly different asset lives, the components are treated as separate assets and depreciated over their individual useful economic lives. 1.12.2 Measurement All property, plant and equipment is measured initially at cost, representing the cost directly attributable to acquiring or constructing the asset and bringing it to the location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management. Assets that are held for their service potential and are in use are measured subsequently at their current value in existing use. Assets that were most recently held for their service potential but are surplus are measured at fair value where there are no restrictions preventing access to the market at the reporting date. Revaluations of property, plant and equipment are performed with sufficient regularity to ensure that carrying amounts are not materially different from those that would be determined at the end of the reporting period. Current values in existing use are determined as follows: Land and non-specialised buildings – market value for existing use Specialised buildings – depreciated replacement cost, modern equivalent asset basis. (Where applicable) [Assets held at depreciated replacement cost have been valued on an alternative site basis where this would meet the location requirements of the service being provided.] Properties in the course of construction for service or administration purposes are carried at cost, less any impairment loss. Cost includes professional fees and, where capitalised in accordance with IAS 23, borrowing costs. Assets are revalued and depreciation commences when they are brought into use. IT equipment, transport equipment, furniture and fittings, and plant and machinery that are held for operational use are valued at depreciated historic cost where these assets have short useful economic lives or low values or both, as this is not considered to be materially different from current value in existing use. (A different policy should be adopted and disclosed here where assets are not of sufficiently low value and/or do not have sufficiently short lives for depreciated historic cost to be materially the same as current value in existing use.) An increase arising on revaluation is taken to the revaluation reserve except when it reverses an impairment for the same asset previously recognised in expenditure, in which case it is credited to expenditure to the extent of the decrease previously charged there. A revaluation decrease that does not result from a loss of economic value or service potential is recognised as an impairment charged to the revaluation reserve to the extent that there is a balance on the reserve for the asset, and thereafter to expenditure. Gains and losses recognised in the revaluation reserve are reported as other comprehensive [income / net expenditure] in the [Statement of Comprehensive Income / Net Expenditure]. 1.12.3 Subsequent expenditure
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
295
Where subsequent expenditure enhances an asset beyond its original specification, the directly attributable cost is capitalised. Where subsequent expenditure restores the asset to its original specification, the expenditure is capitalised and any existing carrying value of the item replaced is written-out and charged to operating expenses. 1.13 Investment properties Investment properties are measured at fair value. Changes in fair value are recognised as gains or losses in income/expenditure. Only those assets which are held solely to generate a commercial return are considered to be investment properties. Where an asset is held, in part, for support service delivery objectives, then it is considered to be an item of property, plant and equipment. Properties occupied by employees, whether or not they pay rent at market rates, are not classified as investment properties. 1.14 Intangible assets 1.14.1 Recognition Intangible assets are non-monetary assets without physical substance, which are capable of sale separately from the rest of [the entity’s] business or which arise from contractual or other legal rights. They are recognised only when it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to, or service potential be provided to, [the entity]; where the cost of the asset can be measured reliably; and where the cost is at least £5,000. Software that is integral to the operating of hardware, for example an operating system, is capitalised as part of the relevant item of property, plant and equipment. Software that is not integral to the operation of hardware, for example application software, is capitalised as an intangible asset. Expenditure on research is not capitalised: it is recognised as an operating expense in the period in which it is incurred. Internally-generated assets are recognised if, and only if, all of the following have been demonstrated: the technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so that it will be available for use the intention to complete the intangible asset and use it the ability to sell or use the intangible asset how the intangible asset will generate probable future economic benefits or service potential the availability of adequate technical, financial and other resources to complete the intangible asset and sell or use it, and the ability to measure reliably the expenditure attributable to the intangible asset during its development. 1.14.2 Measurement Intangible assets acquired separately are initially recognised at cost. The amount initially recognised for internally-generated intangible assets is the sum of the expenditure
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
296
incurred from the date when the criteria for recognition are initially met. Where no internally-generated intangible asset can be recognised, the expenditure is recognised in the period in which it is incurred. Following initial recognition, intangible assets are carried at current value in existing use by reference to an active market, or, where no active market exists, at the lower of amortised replacement cost (modern equivalent assets basis) and value in use where the asset is income generating. Internally-developed software is held at historic cost to reflect the opposing effects of increases in development costs and technological advances. Revaluations and impairments are treated in the same manner as for property, plant and equipment. 1.15 Depreciation, amortisation and impairments Freehold land, assets under construction or development, [investment properties,] [stockpiled goods,] and assets held for sale are not depreciated/amortised. Otherwise, depreciation or amortisation is charged to write off the costs or valuation of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, less any residual value, on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives. The estimated useful life of an asset is the period over which [the entity] expects to obtain economic benefits or service potential from the asset. This is specific to [the entity] and may be shorter than the physical life of the asset itself. Estimated useful lives and residual values are reviewed each year end, with the effect of any changes recognised on a prospective basis. Assets held under finance leases are depreciated over the shorter of the lease term and the estimated useful life, unless [the entity] expects to acquire the asset at the end of the lease term, in which case the asset is depreciated in the same manner as for owned assets At each financial year end, [the entity] checks whether there is any indication that its property, plant and equipment or intangible assets have suffered an impairment loss. If there is indication of such an impairment, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated to determine whether there has been a loss and, if so, its amount. Intangible assets not yet available for use are tested for impairment annually at the financial year end. Impairment losses that arise from a clear consumption of economic benefit are taken to expenditure. Where an impairment loss subsequently reverses, the carrying amount of the asset is increased to the revised estimate of the recoverable amount but capped at the amount that would have been determined had there been no initial impairment loss. The reversal of the impairment loss is credited to expenditure. 1.16 Donated assets Donated non-current assets are capitalised at current value in existing use, if they will be held for their service potential, or otherwise at fair value on receipt, with a matching credit to income. They are valued, depreciated and impaired as described above for purchased assets. Gains and losses on revaluations, impairments and sales are treated in the same
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
297
way as for purchased assets. Deferred income is recognised only where conditions attached to the donation preclude immediate recognition of the gain. 1.17 Government grant funded assets Government grant funded assets are capitalised at current value in existing use, if they will be held for their service potential, or otherwise at fair value on receipt, with a matching credit to income. Deferred income is recognised only where conditions attached to the grant preclude immediate recognition of the gain. 1.18 Leases Leases are classified as finance leases when substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred to the lessee. All other leases are classified as operating leases. 1.18.1 [The entity] as lessee Property, plant and equipment held under finance leases are initially recognised, at the commencement of the lease, at fair value or, if lower, at the present value of the minimum lease payments, with a matching liability for the lease obligation to the lessor. Lease payments are apportioned between finance charges and reduction of the lease obligation to achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability. Finance charges are recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive [Income / Net Expenditure]. Operating lease payments are recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Lease incentives are recognised initially as a liability and subsequently as a reduction of rentals on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Contingent rentals are recognised as an expense in the period in which they are incurred. Where a lease is for land and buildings, the land and building components are separated and individually assessed as to whether they are operating or finance leases. 1.18.2 [The entity] as lessor (where relevant)
A lessor shall classify each of its leases as an operating or finance lease. A lease is
classified as finance lease when the lease substantially transfers all the risks and rewards
incidental to ownership of an underlying asset. Where substantially all the risks and
rewards are not transferred, a lease is classified as an operating lease.
Amounts due from lessees under finance leases are recorded as receivables at the amount of [the entity]’s net investment in the leases. Finance lease income is allocated to accounting periods to reflect a constant periodic rate of return on [the entity]’s net investment outstanding in respect of the leases. Income from operating leases is recognised on a straight-line or another systematic basis over the term of the lease. Initial direct costs incurred in negotiating and arranging an
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
298
operating lease are added to the carrying amount of the leased asset and recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term. 1.19 Private Finance Initiative (PFI) [and NHS Local Improvement Finance Trust (LIFT)] transactions (where relevant) PFI [and NHS LIFT] transactions that meet the IFRIC 12 definition of a service concession, as interpreted in HM Treasury’s FReM, are accounted for as ‘on-Statement of Financial Position’ by the trust. The underlying assets are recognised as property, plant and equipment, together with an equivalent PFI liability. The annual unitary payment is separated into the following component parts, using appropriate estimation techniques where necessary: payment for the fair value of services received repayment of the PFI liability, including finance costs, and payment for the replacement of components of the asset during the contract ‘lifecycle replacement’. 1.19.1 Services received The cost of services received in the year is recorded under the relevant expenditure headings within ‘operating expenses’ 1.19.2 PFI [and LIFT] assets, liabilities and finance costs The PFI [/LIFT] assets are recognised as property, plant and equipment when they come into use. Subsequently, the assets are measured at current value in existing use. A PFI [/LIFT] liability equal to the capital value of the contract is recognised at the same time as the PFI [/LIFT] assets are recognised. This does not include service elements and interest charges within the PFI contract which are expensed in accordance with IFRIC 12 as adapted and interpreted by the FReM and as detailed below. An annual finance cost is calculated by applying the implicit interest rate in the contract to the opening PFI liability for the period, and is charged to ‘Finance Costs’ within the Statement of Comprehensive [Income / Net Expenditure]. An element of the annual unitary payment is therefore allocated as a financing cost when repaying the PFI liability over the life of the contract. The element of the annual unitary payment increase due to cumulative indexation is treated as contingent rent and is expensed as incurred. 1.19.3 Lifecycle replacement
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
299
Components of the asset replaced by the operator during the contract (‘lifecycle replacement’) are capitalised where they meet [the entity]’s criteria for capital expenditure. They are capitalised at the time they are provided by the operator and are measured initially at cost. The element of the annual unitary payment allocated to lifecycle replacement is pre-determined for each year of the contract from the operator’s planned programme of lifecycle replacement. Where the lifecycle component is provided earlier or later than expected, a short-term accrual or prepayment is recognised respectively. Where the fair value of the lifecycle component is less than the amount determined in the contract, the difference is recognised as an expense when the replacement is provided. If the fair value is greater than the amount determined in the contract, the difference is treated as a ‘free’ asset and a deferred income balance is recognised. The deferred income is released to operating income over the shorter of the remaining contract period or the useful economic life of the replacement component. 1.19.4 Assets contributed by [the entity] to the operator for use in the scheme Assets contributed for use in the scheme continue to be recognised as items of property, plant and equipment in [the entity]’s Statement of Financial Position. 1.19.5 Other assets contributed by [the entity] to the operator Other assets contributed (e.g. cash payments, surplus property) by [the entity] to the operator before the asset is brought into use, where these are intended to defray the operator’s capital costs, are recognised initially as prepayments during the construction phase of the contract. When the asset is made available to [the entity], the prepayment is treated as an initial payment towards the PFI liability and is set against the carrying value of the liability. For PFI assets funded principally by third party usage, the following alternative policies should be used. Where there is a unitary payment from the entity in respect of part of the asset, the following paragraph should replace the paragraph above for the PFI liability: [A PFI liability is recognised at the same time as the PFI assets are recognised. It is measured initially at the capital value of the contract, discounted using the implicit interest rate, and is subsequently measured as a PFI liability in accordance with the FReM. Additionally, the following policy is needed for the deferred income balance recognised in respect of the future service potential of the asset. Either, where there is also a liability: [On initial recognition of the asset, the difference between the fair value of the asset and the initial value of the PFI liability is recognised as deferred income, representing the future service potential to be received by [the entity] through the asset being made available to third party users.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
300
The balance is subsequently released to operating income over the life of the concession on a straight-line basis.] Or, if there is no initial liability at all: [On initial recognition of the asset, an equivalent deferred income balance is recognised, representing the future service potential to be received by [the entity] through the asset being made available to third party users. The balance is subsequently released to operating income over the life of the concession on a straight-line basis.] Provide an accounting policy for any off-statement of financial position PFI/LIFT schemes, including the nature and business purpose of the arrangement and the financial impact on the entity. If a PFI/LIFT property which is recognised and measured in accordance with IAS 17 is sub-leased to or from another DHSC group body, then provide appropriate accounting policies in addition to those above. 1.20 Inventories [and stockpiled goods] Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value, using the [first-in first-out / weighted average] cost formula. (Where relevant) Strategic goods held for use in national emergencies (stockpiled goods) are held as non-current assets within property, plant and equipment. These stocks are maintained at minimum capability levels by replenishment to offset write-offs and so are not depreciated, as agreed with HM Treasury. Stockpiled goods are held at current value in existing use. 1.21 Cash and cash equivalents Cash is cash in hand and deposits with any financial institution repayable without penalty on notice of not more than 24 hours. Cash equivalents are investments that mature in 3 months or less from the date of acquisition and that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash with insignificant risk of change in value. In the Statement of Cash Flows, cash and cash equivalents are shown net of bank overdrafts that are repayable on demand and that form an integral part of [the entity]’s cash management. Cash, bank and overdraft balances are recorded at current values. 1.22 Provisions Provisions are recognised when [the entity] has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event, it is probable that [the entity] will be required to settle the obligation, and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. The amount recognised as a provision is the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation at the end of the reporting period, taking into account the risks and uncertainties. Where a provision is measured using the cash flows estimated to settle the
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
301
obligation, its carrying amount is the present value of those cash flows using HM Treasury’s discount rates. Early retirement provisions are discounted using HM Treasury’s pension discount rate of negative x.xx% (2020-21: negative 0.95%) in real terms. All general provisions are subject to four separate discount rates according to the expected timing of cashflows from the Statement of Financial Position date: A nominal short-term rate of x.xx% (2020-21: minus 0.02%) for inflation adjusted expected cash flows up to and including 5 years from Statement of Financial Position date. A nominal medium-term rate of x.xx% (2020-21: 0.18%) for inflation adjusted expected cash flows over 5 years up to and including 10 years from the Statement of Financial Position date. A nominal long-term rate of x.xx% (2020-21: 1.99%) for inflation adjusted expected cash flows over 10 years and up to and including 40 years from the Statement of Financial Position date. A nominal very long-term rate of x.xx% (2020-21: 1.99%) for inflation adjusted expected cash flows exceeding 40 years from the Statement of Financial Position date.
1.23 Clinical negligence costs (where relevant) NHS Resolution (the trading name of the NHS Litigation Authority NHSLA) operates a risk pooling scheme under which [the entity] pays an annual contribution to NHS Resolution, which in return settles all clinical negligence claims. The contribution is charged to expenditure. Although NHS Resolution is administratively responsible for all clinical negligence cases, the legal liability remains with [the entity]. 1.24 Non-clinical risk pooling (where relevant) [The entity] participates in the Property Expenses Scheme and the Liabilities to Third Parties Scheme. Both are risk pooling schemes under which [the entity] pays an annual contribution to NHS Resolution and, in return, receives assistance with the costs of claims arising. The annual membership contributions, and any excesses payable in respect of particular claims are charged to operating expenses as and when they become due. CCGs: [1.25 Continuing healthcare risk pooling In 2014-15, a risk pool scheme was introduced by NHS England for continuing healthcare claims, for claim periods prior to 31 March 2013. Under the scheme, CCGs contribute annually to a pooled fund, which is used to settle the claims.]
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
302
1.26 Contingent liabilities and contingent assets A contingent liability is: a possible obligation that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within the control of [the entity], or a present obligation that is not recognised because it is not probable that a payment will be required to settle the obligation, or the amount of the obligation cannot be measured sufficiently reliably. A contingent liability is disclosed unless the possibility of a payment is remote. A contingent asset is a possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within the control of [the entity]. A contingent asset is disclosed where an inflow of economic benefits is probable. Where the time value of money is material, contingent liabilities and contingent assets are disclosed at their present value. 1.27 Financial assets Financial assets are recognised when [the entity] becomes party to the contractual provision of the financial instrument or, in the case of trade receivables, when the goods or services have been delivered. Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual rights have expired or when the asset has been transferred and [the entity] has transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership or has not retained control of the asset. Financial assets are initially recognised at fair value plus or minus directly attributable transaction costs for financial assets not measured at fair value through profit or loss. Fair value is taken as the transaction price, or otherwise determined by reference to quoted market prices, where possible, or by valuation techniques. (Specify – see IFRS 9 B5.1.2A.) Financial assets are classified into the following categories: financial assets at amortised cost, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income, and financial assets at fair value through profit and loss. The classification is determined by the cash flow and business model characteristics of the financial assets, as set out in IFRS 9, and is determined at the time of initial recognition. 1.27.1 Financial assets at amortised cost Financial assets measured at amortised cost are those held within a business model whose objective is to hold financial assets in order to collect contractual cash flows and where the cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest. This includes most trade receivables, loans receivable, and other simple debt instruments.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
303
Provide brief details of any other financial assets in this category. After initial recognition, these financial assets are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash receipts through the life of the financial asset to the gross carrying amount of the financial asset. 1.27.2 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income Financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income are those held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets and where the cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest. Provide brief details of any financial assets in this category. Omit the following where not relevant. [The entity] has irrevocably designated the following equity instruments as measured at fair value through other comprehensive income in accordance with IFRS 9 paragraph 4.1.4: Specify equity instruments and the reason for designation. 1.27.3 Financial assets at fair value through profit and loss Financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss are those that are not otherwise measured at amortised cost or fair value through other comprehensive income. This includes derivatives and financial assets acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the short term. Provide brief details of any other financial assets in this category. Omit the following where not relevant. [The entity] has irrevocably designated the following financial assets as measured at fair value through profit or loss in accordance with IFRS 9 paragraph 4.1.5: Specify financial assets and the reason for designation. 1.27.4 Impairment For all financial assets measured at amortised cost or at fair value through other comprehensive income (except equity instruments designated at fair value through other comprehensive income), lease receivables and contract assets, [the entity] recognises a loss allowance representing expected credit losses on the financial instrument. [The entity] adopts the simplified approach to impairment, in accordance with IFRS 9, and measures the loss allowance for trade receivables, contract assets and lease receivables at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit losses. For other financial assets, the loss allowance is measured at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit losses if the credit
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
304
risk on the financial instrument has increased significantly since initial recognition (stage 2), and otherwise at an amount equal to 12-month expected credit losses (stage 1). Explain briefly how expected credit losses are determined, distinguishing as necessary between approaches for different categories of financial asset. HM Treasury has ruled that central government bodies may not recognise stage 1 or stage 2 impairments against other government departments, their executive agencies, the Bank of England, Exchequer Funds, and Exchequer Funds’ assets where repayment is ensured by primary legislation. [The entity] therefore does not recognise loss allowances for stage 1 or stage 2 impairments against these bodies. For financial assets that have become credit impaired since initial recognition (stage 3), expected credit losses at the reporting date are measured as the difference between the asset’s gross carrying amount and the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. Any adjustment is recognised in profit or loss as an impairment gain or loss. 1.28 Financial liabilities Financial liabilities are recognised when [the entity] becomes party to the contractual provisions of the financial instrument or, in the case of trade payables, when the goods or services have been received. Financial liabilities are de-recognised when the liability has been extinguished – that is, the obligation has been discharged or cancelled or has expired. Omit any of the following where not relevant. 1.28.1 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit and loss Derivatives that are liabilities are subsequently measured at fair value through profit or loss, Embedded derivatives that are not part of a hybrid contract containing a host that is an asset within the scope of IFRS 9 are separately accounted for as derivatives only if their economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to those of their host contracts, a separate instrument with the same terms would meet the definition of a derivative, and the hybrid contract is not itself measured at fair value through profit or loss. [Disclose how fair value is determined]. Provide brief details of any other financial liabilities in this category. Omit the following where not relevant. [The entity] has irrevocably designated the following financial liabilities as measured at fair value through profit or loss in accordance with IFRS 9 paragraph 4.2.2: Specify financial liabilities and the reason for designation. 1.28.2 Other financial liabilities After initial recognition, all other financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
305
estimated future cash payments through the life of the asset, to the amortised cost of the financial liability. In the case of DHSC loans that would be the nominal rate charged on the loan. NHS providers: [1.29 Public Dividend Capital (PDC) and PDC dividend Public dividend capital is a type of public sector equity finance, which represents the Department of Health and Social Care’s investment in the trust. HM Treasury has determined that, being issued under statutory authority rather than under contract, PDC is not a financial instrument within the meaning of IAS 32. At any time, the Secretary of State can issue new PDC to, and require repayments of PDC from, the trust. PDC is recorded at the value received. An annual charge, reflecting the cost of capital utilised by the trust, is payable to the Department of Health and Social Care as PDC dividend. The charge is calculated at the real rate set by the Secretary of State with the consent of HM Treasury (currently 3.5%) on the average relevant net assets of the trust. Relevant net assets are calculated as the value of all assets less all liabilities, except for: donated and grant funded assets charitable funds average daily cash balances held with the Government Banking Service (GBS) and National Loans Fund (NLF) deposits (excluding cash balances held in GBS accounts that relate to a short-term working capital facility) approved expenditure on COVID-19 capital assets assets under construction for nationally directed schemes any PDC dividend balance receivable or payable. The average relevant net assets are calculated as a simple average of opening and closing relevant net assets. In accordance with the requirements laid down by the Department of Health and Social Care, the dividend for the year is calculated on the actual average relevant net assets as set out in the “pre-audit” version of the annual accounts. The dividend thus calculated is not revised should any adjustment to net assets occur as a result the audit of the annual accounts. The PDC dividend calculation is based upon the trust’s group accounts (i.e. including subsidiaries), but excluding consolidated charitable funds.] 1.30 Foreign currencies [The entity]'s functional currency and presentational currency is pounds sterling, and figures are presented in thousands of pounds unless expressly stated otherwise. Transactions denominated in a foreign currency are translated into sterling at the spot exchange rate on the date of the transaction. At the end of the reporting period, monetary items denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the spot exchange rate on 31 March.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
306
Exchange gains and losses on monetary items (arising on settlement of the transaction or on retranslation at the Statement of Financial Position date) are recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive [Income / Net Expenditure] in the period in which they arise. 1.31 Third party assets Assets belonging to third parties (such as money held on behalf of patients) are not recognised in the accounts since [the entity] has no beneficial interest in them. Details of third-party assets are given in [a note] to the accounts. 1.32 Losses and Special Payments (where reported in financial statements) Losses and special payments are items that Parliament would not have contemplated when it agreed funds for the health service or passed legislation. By their nature they are items that ideally should not arise. They are therefore subject to special control procedures compared with the generality of payments. They are divided into different categories, which govern the way that individual cases are handled. Losses and special payments are charged to the relevant functional headings in expenditure on an accruals basis, including losses which would have been made good through insurance cover had [the entity] not been bearing its own risks (with insurance premiums then being included as normal revenue expenditure). 1.33 Gifts Gifts are items that are voluntarily donated, with no preconditions and without the expectation of any return. Gifts include all transactions economically equivalent to free and unremunerated transfers, such as the loan of an asset for its expected useful life, and the sale or lease of assets at below market value. 1.34 IFRS Standards that have been issued but have not yet been adopted The DHSC GAM does not require the following IFRS Standards and Interpretations to be applied in 2021-22. These Standards are still subject to HM Treasury FReM adoption. IFRS 16 Leases - The Standard is effective 1 April 2022 as adapted and interpreted by the FReM. IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts – The Standard is effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2023. IFRS 17 is yet to be adopted by the FReM, therefore early adoption is not permitted. [Where it is practicable, provide an assessment of the impact of Standards that have not yet been adopted.]
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
307
Chapter 5 Annex 2: Consultancy
definition
5.289 The detail provided below is taken from the Cabinet Office guidance regarding the
definition of consultancy published on gov.uk.
5.290 The provision to management of objective advice and assistance relating to
strategy, structure, management or operations of an organisation in pursuit of its
purposes and objectives. Such assistance will be provided outside the ’business-
as-usual’ environment when in-house skills are not available and will be of no
essential consequence and time-limited. Consultancy may include the
identification of options with recommendations, or assistance with (but not delivery
of) the implementation of solutions.
Finance Consultancy
The provision of objective finance advice including advice relating to corporate financing structures, accountancy, control mechanisms and systems. This includes both strategic and operational finance.
IT/IS Consultancy The provision of objective IT/IS advice including that relating to IT/ IS systems and concepts, strategic IT/IS studies and development of specific IT/IS projects. Advice related to defining information needs, computer feasibility studies, making computer hardware evaluations and to e-business should also be included.
Strategy Consultancy
The provision of strategic objective advice including advice relating to corporate strategies, appraising business structures, Value for Money reviews, business performance measurement, management services, product or service design, and process and production management.
Legal Consultancy The provision of external legal advice and opinion including advice in connection with the policy formulation and strategy development particularly on commercial and contractual matters.
Property & Construction Consultancy
Provision of specialist advice relating to property services and estates including portfolio management, design, planning and construction, tenure, holding and disposal strategies.
Human Resource, Training & Education Consultancy
The provision of objective HR advice including advice on the formulation of recruitment, retention, manpower planning and HR strategies, and advice and assistance relating to the development of training and education strategies.
Technical Consultancy
The provision of technical advice including the provision of technical studies, prototyping and technical demonstrators, concept development, project and task based technical advice.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
308
Marketing & Communications Consultancy
The provision of objective marketing and communications advice including advice on the development of publicising and the promotion of the Department’s Business Support programmes, including advice on design, programme branding, media handling, and advertising.
Organisation & Change Management Consultancy
Provision of objective advice relating to the strategy, structure management and operations of an organisation in pursuit of it purposes and objectives. Advice related to long range planning, re-organisation of structure, rationalisation of services, general business appraisal of organisation should also be included.
Procurement Consultancy
The provision of objective procurement advice including advice in establishing procurement strategies.
PPM Consultancy The provision of advice relating to ongoing programmes and one-off projects. Advisory support in assessing, managing and or mitigating the potential risks involved in a specific initiative; work to ensure expected benefits of a project are realised.
Group Accounting Manual 2021-22
309
© Crown copyright 2021
Published to GOV.UK in pdf format only.
[Directorate/Division/Branch]
www.gov.uk/dhsc
This publication is licensed under the terms of the Open Government Licence v3.0 except
where otherwise stated. To view this licence, visit nationalarchives.gov.uk/doc/open-
government-licence/version/3
Where we have identified any third party copyright information you will need to obtain
permission from the copyright holders concerned.
Recommended